NXT System Refercence

Manual Update Notice
The following manual has been revised and released:
Manual title: NXT System Reference

Manual number (updated edition): QD006-25
Manual number (previous edition): QD006-24
Date of issue: February 15, 2010
The main changes that have been made are detailed in the table below.
Chapter, Section Summary of changes
1 Safety Guideline Added content related for the tray unit-LTC.

2.2.2 Operation screen Added new pictograms and descriptions to the sta-
tus area.
4.7 Replenishing Trays Added the following sections.
on a Tray Unit-LT 4.7.4 Guidance display and procedure (when using
supply from A magazine mode)
4.7.5 When using the supply reservation function
4.8 Replenishing Trays Added this section.
on a Tray Unit-LTC
5.6 Setting Trays Added this section.
on a Tray Unit-LTC
Minor changes and corrections have also been

made at various locations throughout manual.
Added an explanation in the software list and a new section for this software.
Note:
For a copy of the entire manual, contact your nearest Fuji sales representative or send
an e-mail request to the address below.
E-mail: intnetqst@fuji.co.jp
Fuji Scalable Placement Platform
NXT
System Reference
Original Instructions
QD006-25
CAUTION !
Contact Fuji or a Fuji representative before
transporting this product to a foreign location within
your company or selling it to a third party within
your country or a different country.
If this product is sold or transported to a different
country without contacting Fuji, it may not be
possible for us to supply spare parts or provide
maintenance.
Fuji Scalable Placement Platform
NXT
System Reference
The manuals listed below are shipped with the NXT machine.
NXT Setup Manual
NXT System Reference
NXT Mechanical Reference
FUJI Intelligent Feeder Manual
NXT Programming Manual
In order to operate this machine in the safest and most efficient
manner, please read the provided manuals thoroughly and
observe all instructions and warnings.
Keep these manuals in an accessible location near the machine to
enable them to be easily used when needed.
QD006-25
FUJI Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Copyrights
All rights regarding this manual are reserved by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. This manual may
not, in whole or in part, be reproduced by any means (electronic, mechanical or otherwise), or reused in
any way, without the prior written permission of Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Warranty and Liability

Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. accepts no responsibility for situations that may arise due to any of
the following:
• The use of third party parts.
• The use of non-genuine Fuji parts.
• Incorrect settings made by the customer.
• Improper use of Fuji equipment.
Notice
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. reserves the right to change the content of this manual without
notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure that this manual is correct in every detail. However, please contact
Fuji in the unlikely event that errors or omissions are detected.
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. accepts no liability whatsoever for damages that may arise as a
result of this manual, with the exception of problems that originate in our products.
QD006-25 Contents
Contents
1. Safety Guideline .................................................. 1
1.1 About Symbols ................................................. 1
1.1.1 Degree of Hazards.................................................. 1
1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols ....................................... 1
1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types ................. 2
1.3 Safety Rules for NXT ....................................... 6
1.3.1 Main Unit................................................................. 6
1.3.2 Tray Unit-L ............................................................ 10
1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC .................................................. 11
1.3.4 Tray Unit-M ........................................................... 12
1.3.5 Disposal of linear motor magnets ......................... 12
1.4 Safety Labels ................................................. 13
1.4.1 NXT Safety Label Explanations ............................ 16
1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button................... 17
1.6 Locking System.............................................. 18
1.6.1 Lockout Procedure................................................ 18
1.6.2 Unlocking Procedure ............................................ 20
2. Machine Components and Functions ................ 21
2.1 Module Components ...................................... 21
2.1.1 M3(S) modules ..................................................... 21
2.1.2 M6(S) modules ..................................................... 21
2.2 Operation Panel ............................................. 22
2.2.1 Operation panel buttons ....................................... 22
2.2.2 Operation screen .................................................. 23
2.3 Signal Tower .................................................. 27
2.3.1 The signal tower display and module condition .... 27
2.3.2 Changing the signal tower settings....................... 28
3. Supplying Power to the NXT.............................. 29
3.1 Machine Power Status Transition .................. 29
3.2 Turning ON/OFF the NXT .............................. 30
3.2.1 Turning ON the NXT ............................................. 30
NXT System Reference i

Contents QD006-25
3.2.2 Turning OFF the NXT........................................... 31

3.2.3 Waking modules................................................... 32
3.2.4 Changing a module to sleep mode ...................... 34
4. Production .......................................................... 35
4.1 Starting Production ........................................ 35
4.2 Interrupting Production................................... 36
4.2.1 Cycle stop ............................................................ 36
4.2.2 Finishing and unloading the current panels (Stop after
production of one board) ....................................... 36
4.2.3 Emergency stop ................................................... 37
4.2.4 Using the interval stop function ............................ 38
4.3 Restarting Production .................................... 39
4.3.1 Restarting after cycle stop or after finishing and
unloading current panels ....................................... 39
4.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop ..................... 39
4.4 Transmitting Jobs........................................... 41
4.5 Displaying the Image Monitor ........................ 43
4.6 Supplying Parts .............................................. 44
4.6.1 Splicing parts........................................................ 44
4.6.2 Replacing Feeders ............................................... 49
4.6.3 Replacing feeders (Tray unit-LT/LTC).................. 54
4.6.4 Using dynamic alternate feeders.......................... 55
4.6.5 Feeder changeover using the automatic changeover
function .................................................................. 57
4.6.6 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation
function .................................................................. 59
4.7 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LT ........... 60
4.7.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax
Verifier) .................................................................. 60
4.7.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using
Fujitrax Verifier) ..................................................... 64
4.7.3 Guidance display and procedure (when using supply
from B magazine mode) ........................................ 68
from A magazine mode) ........................................ 72
4.7.5 When using the supply reservation function ........ 76
ii NXT System Reference

QD006-25 Contents
4.7.6 Setting the pickup position.................................... 77

4.8 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LTC......... 79
Verifier)................................................................... 79
Fujitrax Verifier)...................................................... 84
from B magazine mode)......................................... 88
from A magazine mode)......................................... 92
4.8.5 When using the supply reservation function ......... 96
4.8.6 Setting the pickup position.................................... 97
4.9 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-L.............. 99
Verifier)................................................................... 99
Fujitrax Verifier).................................................... 102
4.9.3 Guidance display and procedure (Non-stop parts
resupply) .............................................................. 105
4.9.4 Setting the pickup position.................................. 108
4.9.5 Tray unit-Ls that have an LED next to the parts supply
drawer .................................................................. 110
4.10 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-M......... 111
4.10.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using
4.10.3 Setting the pickup position................................ 119
4.10.4 When parts run out for both position A and position B
............................................................................. 121
4.10.5 Using the SUPPLY button ................................ 122
4.11 Clearing Errors ........................................... 123
4.12 Additional Information ................................ 124
4.12.1 Conveyor only function when a module is non-
functional.............................................................. 124
4.12.2 Pair Module Production .................................... 126
4.12.3 Skipping devices............................................... 129
4.12.4 Skipping holders ............................................... 130
NXT System Reference iii

Contents QD006-25
4.12.5 Blocking feeders............................................... 131

4.12.6 Using only one nozzle on a H02 head ............. 133
4.12.7 Using only two nozzles on the H04 head ......... 134
4.12.8 Using only four nozzles on the H08 head ........ 135
4.12.9 Using only six nozzles on the H12(S) head ..... 136
4.12.10 Using multiframe vision processing with the H01
head..................................................................... 137
4.12.11 Automatic changeover function...................... 139
4.12.12 Automatic backup pin function ....................... 146
4.12.13 Panel position correction function .................. 155
4.12.14 Checking for cracked nozzles ........................ 162
4.12.15 Using a tray unit-LT/LTC ................................ 163
4.12.16 Supplying from supply magazine mode (Tray unit-
LT/LTC) ............................................................... 165
4.12.17 About non stop parts resupply (Tray unit-L)... 168
4.12.18 Device statistical warnings and error stop is
supported............................................................. 172
4.12.19 Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings 174
4.12.20 Temporarily saving trace data on the machine
............................................................................. 177
4.12.21 Module conveyor support............................... 178
4.12.22 Support for the automatic tray remover.......... 186
4.12.23 Performing dual production with different width
panels .................................................................. 195
4.12.24 Support for specifying the conveyor lane pitch
............................................................................. 196
4.12.25 Duplicate IP address detection function......... 197
4.12.26 Free allocation function .................................. 198
4.12.27 Panel unloading order .................................... 199
4.12.28 Interval stop function ...................................... 202
4.12.29 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function.. 204
4.12.30 Backup pin allocation check function ............. 207
4.12.31 Nozzle changeover error detection function... 211
5. Performing Changeover ................................... 213
5.1 Changeover Items........................................ 213
5.2 Selecting Changeover Items ........................ 214
iv NXT System Reference

QD006-25 Contents
5.2.1 Changeover guidance screen............................. 214

5.2.2 Using the Changeover Guidance Screen ........... 215
5.3 Changing the Job ......................................... 216
5.3.1 Job changeover guidance................................... 216
5.3.2 Job changeover procedures ............................... 216
5.4 Replacing Feeders ....................................... 218
5.4.1 Feeder replacement guidance screen ................ 218
5.4.2 Removing and attaching feeders ........................ 219
5.4.3 Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT/
LTC ...................................................................... 223
5.4.4 Operation when using the free allocation function
............................................................................. 224
5.5 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-LT ................... 226
5.5.1 Tray setting guidance screens............................ 226
5.5.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ......... 227
5.5.3 Setting trays (when not using Fujitrax Verifier) ... 230
5.5.4 Changing magazines .......................................... 233
5.5.5 Setting the tray push amount.............................. 238
5.5.6 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LT
............................................................................. 238
5.5.7 Tray height error guidance.................................. 239
5.6 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-LTC ................ 240
5.6.4 Changing magazines .......................................... 247
5.6.6 Cautions when inserting trays into the tray unit .. 252
5.7 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-L ..................... 253
5.7.5 Trays that can be used with Tray unit-L.............. 259
5.7.6 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-L
NXT System Reference v

Contents QD006-25
............................................................................. 259
5.7.7 Tray part setting conditions for H04 heads ........ 260
5.7.8 Tray height error guidance ................................. 261
5.7.9 Remaining tray quantity error guidance ............. 261
5.7.10 About production starting conditions when using
alternate feeders.................................................. 262
5.8 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-M .................... 263
5.8.1 Tray setting guidance screen ............................. 263
5.8.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ........ 264
5.8.3 Setting trays (when not using Fujitrax Verifier) .. 267
5.8.4 Setting the tray push amount ............................. 269
5.8.5 Trays that can be used with a tray unit-M .......... 270
5.8.6 Cautions when inserting trays ............................ 271
5.9 Replacing Backup Plates ............................. 272
5.9.1 Backup plate replacement Guidance Screen..... 272
5.9.2 Removing and attaching backup plates ............. 273
5.9.3 Cautions when using the optional soft backup pins ..
275
5.9.4 Procedure for exchanging backup frames ......... 277
5.10 Replacing Nozzles ..................................... 278
5.10.1 Nozzle Replacement Guidance Screen ........... 278
5.10.2 Removing and Attaching Nozzles .................... 279
5.10.3 Nozzle List........................................................ 281
5.10.4 Nozzle station list ............................................. 282
5.11 Replacing Feeder Pallets ........................... 283
5.11.1 Feeder pallet replacement guidance screen .... 283
5.11.2 Removing the feeder pallet .............................. 284
5.11.3 Loading a feeder pallet..................................... 287
5.12 Replacing the Placing Head....................... 290
5.12.1 Head replacement guidance screen ................ 290
5.12.2 Removing and attaching the placing head ....... 290
5.12.3 Setting nozzle jigs ............................................ 294
5.13 Other Changeover ..................................... 296
5.13.1 Device type changeover................................... 296
5.13.2 Parts camera type changeover ........................ 297
vi NXT System Reference

QD006-25 Contents
6. Manual Mode Commands................................ 299

6.1 Cleaning Command ..................................... 300
6.1.1 Procedure ........................................................... 300
6.2 Head Positioning Command ........................ 302
6.2.1 Procedure ........................................................... 302
6.3 Job Test Command...................................... 304
6.3.1 Checking the pickup position .............................. 304
6.3.2 Clearing the quantity of produced panels ........... 311
6.3.3 Clearing the number of panels loaded................ 312
6.4 Diagnosis Command.................................... 313
6.4.1 Procedure ........................................................... 313
6.5 Panel Removal Command ........................... 314
6.5.1 Procedure ........................................................... 314
6.6 Exchange Command.................................... 316
6.6.1 Exchanging feeder pallets .................................. 316
6.6.2 Ejecting nozzles.................................................. 317
6.6.3 Exchanging Heads.............................................. 317
6.6.4 Exchanging backup plates.................................. 318
6.6.5 Exchanging backup plates (moving lane 2 forward)
............................................................................. 318
6.7 Head Adjustment Command ........................ 319
6.7.1 Removing air from the needle............................. 319
6.7.2 Measuring needle offsets.................................... 319
6.7.3 Checking the applied glue .................................. 320
6.7.4 Cleaning the nozzles on the head ...................... 320
6.7.5 Cleaning all of the nozzles.................................. 320
6.8 Information Command.................................. 321
6.8.1 Procedure ........................................................... 322
7. Accessory Software ......................................... 323
7.1 Introduction .................................................. 323
7.2 Starting Accessory Software ........................ 324
7.3 Floor Monitor ................................................ 325
7.3.1 Floor Monitor fields and their meanings.............. 325
NXT System Reference vii

Contents QD006-25
7.4 Vision processing error analysis .................. 326

7.4.1 Information displayed in the vision processing error
analysis screen.................................................... 326
7.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings
............................................................................. 327
7.5 Production Progress Displays ...................... 329
7.5.1 Progress Monitor items ...................................... 329
7.5.2 Detailed production information ......................... 330
7.5.3 Production and non-production time views ........ 334
7.5.4 Changing the target cycle time........................... 336
7.5.5 Changing the operation rate............................... 337
7.6 Warnings ...................................................... 338
7.6.1 Displaying warnings ........................................... 338
7.6.2 Warning information ........................................... 338
7.6.3 Displaying current warnings ............................... 339
7.6.4 Displaying warning details.................................. 340
7.6.5 Displaying the warnings log list .......................... 340
7.6.6 Setting the success rate..................................... 341
7.7 Messages..................................................... 342
7.7.1 Displaying messages ......................................... 342
7.7.2 Editing messages............................................... 342
7.7.3 Adding messages............................................... 343
7.8 Error Search................................................. 344
7.9 Production Schedules .................................. 345
7.9.1 Making a new schedule...................................... 345
7.9.2 Editing a schedule.............................................. 345
7.9.3 Deleting a schedule............................................ 346
7.10 Service List ................................................ 347
7.10.1 Displaying the services .................................... 347
7.10.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service
installer ................................................................ 348
7.11 Machine Accessories ................................. 349
7.11.1 Starting Machine Accessories.......................... 349
7.11.2 Making machine configuration settings ............ 350
7.11.3 Making module configuration settings.............. 352
viii NXT System Reference

QD006-25 Contents
7.11.4 Acquiring trace data.......................................... 354

7.11.5 Acquiring images .............................................. 355
7.11.6 Acquiring PAM results ...................................... 356
7.11.7 Sending the final offset file to a module............ 356
7.11.8 Managing module matrix measurement data ... 357
7.11.9 Directly loading matrix or feeder pallet measurement
software................................................................ 360
7.11.10 Changing to on machine PAM mode .............. 361
7.11.11 Updating software on the NXT........................ 361
7.11.12 Upgrading machine control software .............. 362
7.11.13 Unclamping a module ..................................... 363
7.11.14 Clamping a module......................................... 364
7.11.15 Specifying a production mode ........................ 364
7.11.16 Conveyor calibration ....................................... 365
7.11.17 Completing nozzle maintenance..................... 366
7.11.18 Check backup pin position.............................. 367
7.11.19 Forcibly clearing errors ................................... 368
8. NXT Software Tools......................................... 369
8.1 Introduction .................................................. 369
8.2 Image Viewer ............................................... 371
8.2.1 Installing Image Viewer....................................... 371
8.2.2 Checking images with Image Viewer.................. 371
8.3 NetworkSetting............................................. 372
8.4 VersionUp .................................................... 373
8.5 AsciiToBinV382............................................ 374
8.6 EmergencyInstaller ...................................... 375
8.6.1 Making all settings after upgrading ..................... 377
8.7 MotionToolMini............................................. 378
8.7.1 Installing MotionToolMini .................................... 378
8.7.2 Starting MotionToolMini ...................................... 378
8.7.3 Displaying servo positions .................................. 378
8.7.4 Receiving a dump file via MotionToolMini .......... 378
8.7.5 Receiving a trace file via MotionToolMini ........... 379
8.7.6 Displaying servo details via MotionToolMini ....... 379
NXT System Reference ix

Contents QD006-25
8.7.7 Displaying errors via MotionToolMini ................. 379

8.7.8 Using the MTReset function............................... 379
8.8 TcpIpSetting................................................. 380
8.9 TTraceSaveServer ....................................... 382
8.10 IOMonitor ................................................... 383
8.10.1 Elements of the dialog box............................... 383
8.10.2 Installing I/O Monitor ........................................ 385
8.10.3 Displaying I/O statuses .................................... 386
8.11 Equipment Check....................................... 387
8.11.1 Installing Equipment Check.............................. 387
8.11.2 Checking modules on a production line ........... 388
8.11.3 Checking modules not on a production line ..... 388
8.11.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors... 389
8.11.5 Checking the operation of units........................ 391
8.11.6 Setting tray unit-L, tray unit-LT calibration values
............................................................................. 391
8.11.7 Tray unit-L command list.................................. 392
8.11.8 Tray unit-LT command list................................ 398
8.11.9 Conveyor command list.................................... 399
8.11.10 Checking unit configuration............................ 400
8.12 MEdit.......................................................... 404
8.12.1 Installing MEdit................................................. 404
8.12.2 Editing jobs from the global job directory ......... 404
8.12.3 Editing jobs currently in an NXT....................... 405
8.12.4 Restoring an edited job to its original state ...... 405
8.12.5 Testing skip mark data in the job ..................... 406
9. System Management ....................................... 407
9.1 Upgrading Machine Control Software .......... 407
9.1.1 Using Accessory Software ................................. 407
9.1.2 Using VersionUp from the NXT tools ................. 409
9.2 Upgrading Unit Software on the NXT........... 410
9.3 Changing Network Settings ......................... 412
10. Troubleshooting.............................................. 413
x NXT System Reference

QD006-25 Contents
10.1 Troubleshooting Points .............................. 413

10.2 Checking Error Codes................................ 413
10.3 Troubleshooting Common NXT Issues ...... 414
10.3.1 Mark vision processing errors........................... 414
10.3.2 Part vision processing errors ............................ 415
10.3.3 Pickup errors..................................................... 416
10.3.4 Poor placing accuracy ...................................... 418
10.3.5 Panel conveyance errors .................................. 420
10.3.6 If there are missing parts .................................. 421
10.3.7 An error occurs that the XS-axis is in an unknown
position................................................................. 422
10.3.8 An error occurs that a panel is between modules but
there is no panel................................................... 422
10.3.9 An encoder backup error occurs....................... 422
10.3.10 If the machine cannot download a job. ........... 423
10.3.11 If there is computer system trouble................. 424
10.4 Troubleshooting Common Fuji Flexa and Fujitrax
Related Issues................................................ 431
10.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors.................................... 431
10.4.2 Fujitrax related errors........................................ 431
10.5 Major Machine Issues ................................ 433
10.6 Acquiring Trace Data ................................. 434
10.6.1 Acquiring trace data using Accessory Software 434
10.6.2 Automatic trace data generation after an OS error
............................................................................. 434
10.6.3 Forced generation of trace data when turning on the
machine................................................................ 435
10.6.4 Temporarily saving trace data on the machine. 435
NXT System Reference xi

Contents QD006-25
MEMO:
xii NXT System Reference

QD006-25 1. Safety Guideline
1. Safety Guideline
Fuji machines are designed and produced with safety as one of our main considerations.
However, even a perfectly designed machine can be damaged, or someone can still be
injured if the user does not follow the safety rules. It is the responsibility of the user to make
sure all safety rules are followed during operation and maintenance.
Be sure to read these safety rules before operating the machine. Keep this manual close
at hand when operating the machine.
1.1 About Symbols

To avoid injury to persons and damage to the machine, Fuji employs a number of messages
and symbols that are used in manuals and on the machines. Be sure you understand the
meanings of these symbols before reading the manual.
1.1.1 Degree of Hazards
Symbol Definition
Failure to observe this hazard warning will lead to severe
DANGER injury or death.
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe

WARNING injury or death.
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to

CAUTION personal injury or damage to the machine.
1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols
Symbol Explanation
Hazard
A triangle is used to draw your attention to a hazard. The symbol
inside the triangle indicates the nature of the hazard (in this case,
electrical shock).
Prohibition
A circle with a diagonal line is used to draw your attention to an
operation that is prohibited. The symbol inside the circle indicates
the nature of the operation (in this case, disassembly).
A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to to

a mandatory action. In other words, you are required to carefully
carry out the given instructions.
NXT System Reference 1

1. Safety Guideline QD006-25
1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types
DANGER
Do not approach moving parts during automatic or manual
operation
• Body parts or clothing may be caught in the machine causing

personal injury.
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the conveyor
inlets
• Body parts may get caught in the machine resulting in injury.

• If using a single machine independently, install safety covers or
interlock sensors at the conveyor openings, in accordance with
your local safety regulations, to prevent injuries at the conveyor.
Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors

open
• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or

clothing may be caught in the machine causing personal injury.
• When maintenance work is completed, return the safety covers
and doors to their original (closed) position.
Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP

buttons before operating the machine
• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP

buttons so that they can be pressed quickly in case of an
emergency.
Check the safety functions before starting operation
• Before starting the machine check the operation of the

EMERGENCY STOP button, the safety switches on the covers,
doors and all other machine safety features.
• Contact a Fuji serviceman immediately if any of the safety
functions fail.
Do not remove safety switches or disarm the safety

functions
• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches. Persons

working on the machine may be seriously injured if operation
commands are issued by mistake.
2 NXT System Reference

WARNING
Check that there is nobody inside the machine when
working on the machine with two persons or more
• Verify that nobody is within or near the machine before

operating the machine. Operating the machine may cause
injury to the person who is carrying out maintenance.
Do not approach a machine that has stopped moving
• There are times during automatic operation when the machine

may appear to have stopped while it is waiting for a board,
waiting for the next machine, reading marks, transmitting data,
etc. In such cases, once certain conditions are fulfilled, the
machine will begin moving again automatically, so care should
be taken. Only approach the machine after the EMERGENCY
STOP button has been pressed.
• When the message "Ready" displays at the machine display,
the machine will begin to move once certain conditions are
satisfied. Keep in mind that the machine will begin to move
regardless of whether these conditions are satisfied
intentionally or inadvertently.
Do not place hands near the main conveyor
• Hands or other body parts may be caught in the machine.
Always perform maintenance work after turning OFF the

machine power supply.
• Failure to observe this may result in sudden machine

movements or electric shock, and is therefore extremely
dangerous.
Do not insert or remove connectors while power is being

supplied to the machine
• Removing or inserting connectors while power is supplied to the

machine may not only cause damage to the machine, but may
also cause electrical shock.
Stay clear from the machine when it is being lifted
• Never put hands or feet under the machine when the machine
is being raised by means of a jack or other device for leveling or
transport.

WARNING
Do not wear gloves made of cloth when operating the
machine
• Rubber gloves will tear when caught by the machine and

prevent hands from being drawn into the machine. Gloves
made of cotton or similarly strong material may cause hands to
be drawn into the machine.
Long hair should be tied back
• Long hair may get caught in running machines.

Hair should be kept short or tied back so that it does not get
caught in the machine.
Turn off the air supply when carrying out maintenance on

cylinders, valves, and filters
• Removing cylinders, valves, or filters without turning the air

supply off, may cause parts or particles to be propelled into the
eyes.
• Be sure to turn off the air supply when carrying out maintenance
on cylinders, valves, and filters.
Be sure to wear protective glasses when removing parts

from the machine
• Be sure to wear protective glasses when removing or

disassembling parts.
Check the machine monitor and the target axes while

manually operating the machine
• When operating the machine, carefully follow the instructions

that are displayed at the machine display.
• Operating the machine without looking at the machine display
may lead to operating errors or result in damage to the machine
or products.
Do not touch the servo amp power terminal for at least five
minutes after turning off the power
• The servo amp retains a high voltage even after the power has
been turned off.
• Always wait at least five minutes, and ensure that the CHARGE
lamp is off, before undertaking any work that may result in
contact with the servo amp terminal.

CAUTION
Do not operate the machine after removing or disabling
sensors
• Removing or disabling sensors will disarm the interlock, leading

to collisions and damage to the machine.
Confirm the operational status at the machine messages for

machines that support automatic changeover
• On machines equipped with an automatic changeover system,

it is difficult to ascertain the changeover status from the front of
the machine during operation in production mode. Follow the
instructions that display at the machine monitor.
Ensure to use the handle when opening or closing the safety

doors, fences or covers
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences or covers without

using the handle may result in injury to the hand.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences or covers with force,
without using the handle may result in damage to the machine.

1.3 Safety Rules for NXT

1.3.1 Main Unit
WARNING
When changing the conveyor width with the module retracted,
do not insert hands in the area near the conveyor
• Fingers may be pinced or caught in the movable conveyor rail,

resulting in serious injury.
When mounting the MCU, ensure that no one is between the

MCU and machine base
• A person could be crushed to death if caught between the MCU and

base.
When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is

behind the module
• A person could be crushed between the base and module, resulting

in serious injury.
When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the

module cover support and module
• Fingers may be pinced or caught, resulting in serious injury.
When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the

module lower front cover and base
• Fingers may be pinced or caught, resulting in serious injury.
When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or

other body parts in between modules
• If caught between modules, fingers or other body parts could be cut

or severed.
When working on the module in an opening with the cover off,

ensure that no one pushes or pulls out in the module
• The module may pinch, sever, or cause serious injury.
When working on the base in the opening above the waste tape
box, ensure that no one pulls out a module

WARNING
When working on the base in an opening with the cover off,
ensure that no one pushes or pulls out in the module
Do not rotate the module lock knob to [UNLOCK] when a module

is loaded on the MCU.
• If the module moves on the MCU, it could pinch and sever fingers,
and if it falls from the MCU it could cause severe injury or death.
There is a limit to the number of modules that can be pulled out

safely at the same time. (Maximum: Four M3 modules on an 8M
base, or two M3 modules on a 4M base.)
• If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the
front, possibly resulting in serious physical harm. This is especially
true when the front leveling bolts have not been adjusted.
Do not modify the module stopper mechanism on the base and

remove the module without mounting the MCU first.
• The module could fall from the base causing severe injury or death.
Do not stare at the vision process light sources with naked eyes.
Wear protective glasses.
• Eye damage may be caused by the light.
Stay off of the base.
• Failure to do so could result in injury.
When handling the MCU, watch out for corners and protrusions.
Always be ready to apply the caster brake when handling the

MCU.
• Always use the caster brake when stopping an MCU loaded with a
module.

WARNING
When lifting a backup plate, be careful to not put your hands in
the areas between the plate, width-changing ball screw, and
hexagonal shaft. Also, be careful to not cut your hands on the
corners of the conveyor rails.
Do not lift a backup plate if you are not strong enough, and
maintain correct lifting posture if you do lift a backup plate.
• Because the backup plates are very heavy, lifting them incorrectly
could result in back or other injuries.
Never insert hands or other body parts into the duct of the waste
tape disposal unit.
• There is a very sharp cutter blade. Exercise extreme caution

especially when carrying the unit.
Two or more people should carry the waste tape disposal unit.
• Maintenance of the waste tape disposal unit is usually accompanied

by removing the unit from the machine. Two or more people should
carry the unit because it is very heavy.
Ensure that the work bench where the waste tape disposal unit
is placed is flat.
• The unit may fall to the ground if the work bench is tilted, causing
personnel injury and the machine damage.
Do not touch the Y-axis linear motor in a M6S module

immediately after production is stopped.
• Contact with the shaft or coil section could cause burns. The shaft
and coil section of the Y-axis linear motor remain at high
temperatures even after production is stopped.
People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis

linear motor in M6S modules (do not come within 400 mm).
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the Y-axis linear motor in

M6S modules. Pacemakers may malfunction because of the
magnetic field, so extreme caution should be taken.
Do not disassemble the linear motor used for the Y-axis in the
M6S module.
• Absolutely do not disassemble the linear motor coil and shaft parts.
Injury and/or machine damage may occur by magnetic parts
shooting out due to the strong force of the magnets.

CAUTION
Be careful to not pinch your hands when opening and closing
the front or side covers.
Do not insert fingers or other body parts into the gap between
the machine side cover and base.
When working in front of the base, ensure that clothing or arms

are not caught on the guide pins on the top of the base to
prevent the risk of injury.
When there is no module on the base, do not block the module

position confirmation sensor or module seating confirmation
sensor to activate the air cylinder.
• The air cylinder may activate and move the lever or clamper
causing personnel injury.
Do not push the mark camera unit by hand when moving the
placing head.
• The position of the mark camera may be shifted, which negatively

affects the placing accuracy of the machine.
Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station

when loading it in the machine.
Ensure to place the waste tape disposal unit with the duct
upside on the work bench.
• The duct of the unit may creep by its own weight.
Be careful of the magnetic attraction when using a jig near the

linear motor of the M6S.
• Injury could result by a jig being drawn towards the linear motor.
People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis

linear motor in M6S modules (do not come within 400 mm).
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field generated by

a linear motor.

1.3.2 Tray Unit-L
WARNING
When pushing the tray unit-L into the machine, ensure that no
one is between the tray unit-L and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if caught

between the tray unit-L and machine.
Lock the caster brake whenever the tray unit-L is removed from
the machine.
• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-L
could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.
CAUTION
Be careful to not pinch your fingers when opening or closing
the tray unit-L covers (upper cover, front cover, lower cover,
etc.). Do not leave the doors open while the tray unit-L is
unattended.
When operating the handle for adjusting the tray unit-L height,
make sure that hands are not caught between the handle and
cover.
When removing or replacing the empty tray box, be careful to

not pinch your hands between the tray unit-L and empty tray
box.
Do not insert your hand through the bottom of the tray unit-L
into the inner section where the mechanical parts are.

1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC
WARNING
When pushing the tray unit-LT/LTC into the machine, ensure
that no one is between the tray unit-LT/LTC and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if caught

between the tray unit-LT/LTC and machine.
Lock the caster brake whenever the tray unit-LT/LTC is removed

from the machine.
• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-LT/
LTC could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.
Handle with care when lifting, carrying and positioning the

magazine rack.
• The magazine rack is heavy and injury could result if dropped.
CAUTION
Be careful to not pinch your fingers when opening or closing
the tray unit-LT/LTC doors (upper door, lower door). Do not
leave the doors open while the tray unit-LT/LTC is unattended.
When operating the handle for adjusting the tray unit-LT/LTC

height, make sure that hands are not caught between the handle
and cover.
When removing or replacing the empty tray box, be careful to

not pinch your hands between the tray unit-LT/LTC and empty
tray box.
Do not insert your hand through the bottom of the tray unit-LT/
LTC into the inner section where the mechanical parts are.

1.3.4 Tray Unit-M
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between
the tray unit-M and the feeder pallet when attaching or removing
the tray unit-M.
Use two or more people to lift, carry and position the tray unit-M.
• The tray unit-M is extremely heavy and injury could result if

dropped.
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the side spaces

between the machine and the tray unit-M during automatic
operation.
• Body parts may be pinched or caught, resulting in injury.
CAUTION
Be careful to not pinch or get body parts caught on the tray unit-
M door when opening and closing it. Ensure that the door is
never left open.
• Body parts may be pinched or caught, resulting in injury.
1.3.5 Disposal of linear motor magnets

Extremely powerful magnets are used on the stator of the linear motor. It is extremely
important to follow the caution points below when disposing of the linear motor. If disposal
is done by a third party, be sure to instruct them that demagnetization is necessary before
disposal.
• Before removing the stator, be sure to turn off the machine.
• Before removing the stator, prepare a space with no magnetic materials in which
to put it.
• After removing the stator, cover it with non-magnetic material such as paper or
wood to a thickness of at least 55 mm.
• Do not disassemble the stator under any circumstances.
• Heat the stator to at least 330 degrees Celsius for at least 1 hour
(demagnetization processing). Upon cooling, the stator can be disposed of
along with normal industrial waste.

1.4 Safety Labels

To warn the operator of hazards, safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions
indicated in the figure below.
Familiarize yourself with each label and its message before operating the machine.
M3(S) Module M6 Module
*1 *1
*1
*1
M6S Module
*1
*1
NXTSAF010Ec

4M base *1
*1
*2
*1
*1
Dependent 4M base
2M base
*1
*1
*1 *1
*2
NXTSAF011E

MSU Engineering panel stand

WARNING
⼊๔
Head cleaner
Tray unit-LT
Tray unit-L
*1
Tray unit-LTC
*1
*1
*1 Tray unit-M
Side cover
NXTSAF012Ed

1.4.1 NXT Safety Label Explanations
Symbol Explanation
Warning: Pinching danger
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between
adjacent modules.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Direct exposure to the lighting unit may result in damage to the
eyes. Ensure to use light protection eyewear when necessary.
Caution, Warning: Shock danger

*1: High voltage! Contact may cause electric shock. Turn off
the power prior to servicing.
*2: Connect a 200 - 230V AC +/-10% 50/60Hz primary power
supply to the machine.
Caution, Warning: Cutting danger

An automatic tape cutter is positioned behind this frame.
Exercise extreme caution when performing maintenance.
Warning: Do not step

Do not step or stand on this area.
Caution, Warning: Moving parts

Do not insert hands or other body parts.
Moving parts may cause injury. Turn off the power before
inserting any body parts.
Warning: High Temperature

Contacting with the main body and shaft of the linear motor
could result in burns. They are high temperature.
Warning: Magnetic Field

Heart pacemakers and other precision equipment could be
affected by the magnetic field. Always keep a distance of 400
mm or more.
Warning: Disassembly prohibited

Do not disassemble the linear motor shaft. Injury may occur
by parts shooting out due to the strong force of the magnets.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Wear eye protection such as protective glasses while
performing this procedure. There is a danger of foreign
objects such as dust getting in your eyes.

1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button

In the event of an emergency, press any of the red EMERGENCY STOP buttons located
on the machine at the positions indicated in the figure below.
EMERGENCY STOP button
EMERGENCY
STOP button
Tray unit-L
EMERGENCY STOP button EMERGENCY STOP button
Tray unit-LT Tray unit-LTC

NXTSAF001Ee

1.6 Locking System

When performing maintenance or service on the machine, all personnel who service the
machine should use locks to prevent others from turning on the machine power or air. This
procedure is referred to as a lockout.
To prevent accidents, especially those caused by mistakes when multiple operators are
present, all related personnel should have thorough knowledge of lockout procedures.
1.6.1 Lockout Procedure

Prepare 2 commercially available padlocks, and require all service personnel to carry
lockout nametags.
1. Switch off the machine power.
2. Rotate the main switch on the base to the OFF position.
NXTSAF004
3. Lock the main switch with a padlock.

All personnel working on the machine should attach their lockout nametags to the
padlock.
Note: The presence of a nametag on the padlock signals that the machine is being serviced and that the lock
is not to be removed.
NXTSAF006

4. In the same manner, rotate the air valve handle to the OFF position and lock with the
second padlock.
All personnel working on the machine should attach their nametags to the padlock.
NXTSAF005
5. The lockout is complete.

1.6.2 Unlocking Procedure

When finished servicing the machine, all personnel should remove their lockout nametags
from the padlocks.
1. Confirm that all personnel are clear of the machine.
2. Confirm that the machine is in a safe condition. Remove the padlock from the air valve
and rotate the handle to the ON position.
NXTSAF007
3. Remove the padlock from the main switch and rotate it to the ON position.
NXTSAF008
4. This concludes the unlocking procedure.

QD006-25 2. Machine Components and Functions
2. Machine Components and Functions

2.1 Module Components
2.1.1 M3(S) modules
Signal lamp
Placing head
Nozzle station
Operation panel
Handle
Front door
Mark camera
Conveyor
Parts camera
Feeder pallet
01SYS-0253
2.1.2 M6(S) modules

Signal lamp
Nozzle station
Operation panel
Handle
Front door
Mark camera
Placing head
Conveyor
Parts camera
Feeder pallet 01SYS-0254

2. Machine Components and Functions QD006-25
2.2 Operation Panel

2.2.1 Operation panel buttons
READY ON GROUP START
CYCLE STOP
STOP
MANUAL POWER
OK
CANCEL
⍫ශࠠ࡯
EMERGENCY
MONITOR STANDBY NXTOPE028a
• STANDBY: Indicates that power is being supplied to the module.
• POWER: Wakes the module or if pushed for a long time, puts the module to
sleep.
• STOP: Stops production after completion of the current panel.
• START: Starts production.
• READY ON: Clears the error status for the module.
• GROUP: Performs operations for multiple modules simultaneously.
• CYCLE STOP: Stops production after completion of the current cycle.
• MANUAL: Toggles between manual command and autopilot operation.
• Arrow keys: Changes the position of the cursor (focus) on the screen.
• OK: Confirms and performs the selected module operation.
• CANCEL: Cancels an operation.
• MONITOR: Toggles the display between the vision monitor and operation
screen.
• EMERGENCY: Cuts the 200V power to the module and stops operation.

2.2.2 Operation screen

The NXT automatically determines the operations required for production and uses the
operation screen to help guide the operator. Operator guidance and details of the machine
status are displayed on the screen in an intuitive graphical format using "pictograms".
Autopilot screen
The autopilot screen displays as shown below when guiding the operator to perform actions
on the machine.
C D
B 01SYS-0163
Explanation of each area

A: Guidance area
This area displays operation and changeover guidance as well as the machine status.
B: Panel loaded indicator area

This indicates whether or not a panel is present on the conveyor and the panel
production status.
Color Status
White No panel is present on the conveyor.
Light green A panel that is currently being produced is present

on the conveyor.
Dark green A panel for which production is completed is

present on the conveyor.
Note: This does not actually detect the absence or presence of a panel. This indicator reflects
the panel status of what the software considers to be the current state. Consequently, if the
manual mode command for removing panels from the module is used, but panels are not
actually removed, this will incorrectly indicate that there are no panels present even though
there actually are panels still on the conveyor.
C: Job name area

This area displays the name of the current job.
D: Panels produced quantity area

This displays the quantity of panels that have been produced on that module.

E:Status display area

This area displays the module number, production status, and machine status.
These pictograms are displayed in the top row.
Dual lane production Lane 1: pass mode Lane 1: production Lane 1: pass mode
Lane 2: production Lane 2: pass mode Lane 2: pass mode
Single lane production Single lane pass mode Triple lane production Triple lane pass mode
Single lane "breakdown" Dual lane "breakdown" Background color: Red

conveyor only mode conveyor only mode
IDLE IDLE VT253 VT253

Single lane idle Dual lane idle Single lane idle Dual lane idle Backup pin allocation
mode mode mode mode check mode
No vision processing, feeder indexing Vision type 253, no conveyance
These pictograms are displayed in the second row
10 11
Waiting for the right/left module Uploading image Feeder statistical warning Tray statistical warning
(slot number indicated) (slot number indicated)
0 /5
Interval stop Nozzle statistical warning No waste tape box
Simple periodic nozzle changeover warning
These pictograms are displayed in the third row
A 35 deg.C 35 deg. C 35 deg.C

B C DEF 40 K P a 40 K P a 40 K P a
Holder skipped GL temperature adjustment GL temperature adjustment GL temperature adjustment

(holder number indicated) (Red: high temperature error) (Green: temperature in range) (Yellow: high temperature
warning)
35 deg.C 35 deg. C 35 deg. C 11, 12, 13

40 K P a 40 K P a 40 K P a 2, 3, 4, 5
GL temperature adjustment GL temperature adjustment GL temperature adjustment Board skip at machine

(Grey: temperature control (Red: low temperature error) (Yellow: low temperature warning) (board number indicated)
turned off)
These pictograms are displayed in the bottom row.
Next job present Auto changeover Stop operation

production mode
01SYS-0164Ee

Error display screen

The screen displays as illustrated below when an error occurs.
H
I
01SYS-0162
(The above example screen displays a panel positioning error.)
Explanation of each area

F: Error location
This area indicates the location at which the area occurred.
G: Guidance area
This area displays the guidance for the operator.
H: Seek Number / Sub Code

This area displays the error code and sub error code which are useful for searching for
information about the error.
I: Error information
This area displays additional information relating to the error.

Manual mode screen

The manual mode screen displays as shown below after MANUAL is pushed. In this
operation mode, the operator selects the command to perform manually. If the MANUAL
button is pushed when this screen is displayed, the operation mode changes back to
autopilot mode.
01SYS-0003a
Refer to " 6. Manual Mode Commands " for explanations on these commands.
Image monitor screen

The image monitor screen displays after MONITOR is pushed. This screen displays the
vision processing images and results as the machine is working.
Most of the operation panel buttons other than MONITOR are disabled when this screen is
being displayed. It is necessary to return to the original screen to use the operation panel
keys. If the MONITOR button is pushed when this screen is displayed, the screen returns
back to the original screen.
Note: The machine operates with the trace mode ON when the vision monitor is displayed during
production. When trace mode is ON, the placing cycle time will increase by approximately
20% due to a drop in the vision processing speed.

2.3 Signal Tower

Signal Tower
NXTBAS222E
2.3.1 The signal tower display and module condition

It is possible to determine the condition of a module by checking which of the three color
lights are on, off, and flashing on the signal tower for that module.
Action
Priority Signal Tower Display Machine Conditions
1 Machine error Error for which self recovery is not possible

2 Awaiting operator Part setup guidance is displayed.
setup Pair module START enabled.
3 Production stopped Recovery up due to a parts out condition.Recovery
up due to a vision processing error.Remove empty
trays from the removal area.Reject parts conveyor
is full.
4 Awaiting operation START enabled.
Awaiting changeover by operator.
5 Production will stop A parts out warning has occurred.
soon A part cannot be supplied.
Non-stop tray supply guidance is displayed.
6 Message for operator A parts out warning has occurred.
during production
7 Throughput dropping Warning from host is displayed.
8 Preparing for Auto calibration in progress.
production Automatic changeover in progress.
9 Producing Panel conveyance & production in progress.
10 Waiting on previous/ Waiting on previous or next stage.
next stage
11 Manual mode Maintenance in progress in manual mode.
Performing a manual command.
PAM in progress.

2.3.2 Changing the signal tower settings

Use the Accessory Software to specify the color and buzzer settings for the different signal
tower statuses. For more details, refer to the Accessory Software online manual.
Click this to toggle the setting between ON and OFF.
Machine Status Red Yellow Bule Buzzer Enable

Machine error
Awaiting operator setup
Awaiting operation
Preparing for production
Production
Manual mode
Settings for Machine Conditions During Production (Option)
Enable
Production stopped Disable
Enable
Production will stop soon
During's Disable
Producing Enable
Throughput dropping Disable
Enable
Waiting on previous/next stage
Disable
This displays the lighting condition for the signal

tower in the various conditions.
If a condition is "disabled", the signal
Click a color area to toggle the setting
tower will not indicate that condition.
(on - flashing - off) for that color.
NXTOPE159E

QD006-25 3. Supplying Power to the NXT
3. Supplying Power to the NXT

3.1 Machine Power Status Transition
The diagram below illustrates the power transition stages on the NXT.
Power OFF
Main switch ON Main switch OFF
Sleep
Press POWER button Hold down POWER button

(4 seconds)
Awake NXTOPE043
• Power OFF:
The power supply to the machine is cut completely.
• Sleep:
Power is being supplied to the control PCB, but not to the module hardware.
Power can be supplied to the module hardware quickly.
• Awake:
Both the hardware and software are booted up.

3. Supplying Power to the NXT QD006-25
3.2 Turning ON/OFF the NXT

3.2.1 Turning ON the NXT
1. Turn the power switch on the base to ON.
Modules
Power switch
Base 01SYS-0255
2. From this point, power is supplied to the base and modules. The modules will
automatically perform an initial boot up.
01SYS-0004a
3. Once the initial boot up is completed, the modules automatically enter sleep (standby)
mode.
NXTOPE044

3.2.2 Turning OFF the NXT

This needs to be performed when repairs are being performed on the system, or the
machine is not going to be used for a long period of time.
1. Ensure that all modules are not operating or peforming some kind of processing by
checking the operation panels. If the operation panels are displaying the initial screen
or the module is asleep, those modules are not operating or performing any special
processing and it is safe to proceed.
2. Turn the main power switch off. The power is cut to the components in the NXT machine
(base and modules).
Power switch
Modules
Base
01SYS-0256

3.2.3 Waking modules

Modules can be easily woken up. Once woken, modules will download the last job through
Fuji Flexa. Once the job information has been downloaded, the machine can enter
production mode.
1. Confirm that the STANDBY LED on the operation panel is illuminated.

Note: Turn ON the main switch if the STANDBY LED is not illuminated. The STANDBY LED
starts to flash when the main swtich is turned ON. The STANDBY LED continues to flash
until the power has been supplied to the machine hardware. The machine enters the Sleep
status when the STANDBY LED remains on.
NXTOPE044
2. Push the POWER button.
NXTOPE045
Note: By pushing and holding GROUP and then pushing POWER, all of the modules for the base
are woken.
3. The following screen displays after pushing the POWER button. This screen displays
while the job is downloading.
01SYS-0005a

4. After the job has been downloaded, the following screen displays.
01SYS-0006
Notes when waking paired modules

On the NXT, it is possible for two adjacent M3(S) modules to work together during
production on a single panel that is longer than 250 mm. This is called pair module
production and when two M3(S) modules are working together, they are called paired
modules.
Panel
Pair module
NXTOPE129
Normally, all of the modules are woken up roughly at the same time. However, if a job that
uses pair module production has already been transmitted to the machine, then neither
paired module can be used until both paired modules are awake.
The screen shown below displays on the paired module that is awake until the other module
is also awake.
NXTOPE128a

Once both paired modules are awake, the main screen is displayed on both modules and
production can be started.
01SYS-0006
3.2.4 Changing a module to sleep mode

This changes the module to sleep mode. In this mode, most items are no longer receiving
power.
1. When the machine is not in production mode, push and hold the POWER button for
longer than four seconds and then release. The module should then enter sleep mode.
Caution: There is a risk of electrical shock or damage if working on electrical items in the module
when it is in this mode. When working on a module, it should be completely removed from
the machine or the NXT machine should be turned off.
Note: By pushing and holding GROUP and then pushing POWER, all of the modules for the base
enter sleep mode.
01SYS-0007

QD006-25 4. Production
4. Production
4.1 Starting Production
1. After turning on the machine, push START at the main screen to begin production.
01SYS-0008
2. Calibration is automatically performed. When calibration is complete, panels are loaded

and production is commenced.
01SYS-0132E
Note: The above screen displays when all changeover necessary for production has been
performed. Refer to section "5. Performing Changeover" for details on the changeover
process.

4. Production QD006-25
4.2 Interrupting Production

4.2.1 Cycle stop
1. Push CYCLE STOP to temporarily interrupt production at the next cycle.
01SYS-0133
4.2.2 Finishing and unloading the current panels (Stop after

production of one board)
1. Push STOP to interrupt production after completion of the current panels loaded in that
module. After the current panel is unloaded, the STOP pictogram is displayed in the
status area at the operation panel of the module.
Caution: Push STOP on the first module when performing pair module production in order to stop
the paired modules. Production is completed at both modules and the panel is unloaded to
the next module.
Note: If STOP is pushed again at modules where the STOP pictogram is displayed, the stop
command is canceled and the machine enters normal production mode.
01SYS-0134

2. Once the loaded panels have been completed, they are unloaded to the next module
and the stop command is also sent to the module. The previous module display
changes while it is waiting for production to be completed.
3. Production is continued in the following modules after loading the final panels until
production of those panels is completed. The module that is producing the final panels
displays the stop pictogram in the lower left corner of the operation panel.
Module 1 Module 2
Waiting for production to be completed The module with the final panels
at other modules
01SYS-0135Ea
Note: If STOP is pushed again at the module with the stop pictogram, the STOP command is
cancelled and production continues.
4.2.3 Emergency stop

1. Push EMERGENCY to stop the machine immediately in the case of an emergency.
EMERGENCY
01SYS-0136
Note: The vacuum pump does not stop even when EMERGENCY is pushed.

4.2.4 Using the interval stop function

1. Specify interval stop settings at the [Module Configuration] screen in Accessory
Software. After the specified number of panels are produced, the machine will
automatically cycle stop after the last panel has been unloaded from the machine.
01SYS-0205
Note: When the interval stop function is being used, a special pictogram is displayed in the status
area (the left side) of the operation panel.
For details regarding the interval stop function, refer to section " 4.12.28 Interval stop
function ".

4.3 Restarting Production

4.3.1 Restarting after cycle stop or after finishing and unloading
current panels
1. The screen below displays requesting the operator to push START when production has
been interrupted by pushing CYCLE STOP or STOP. When restarting after having
pushed CYCLE STOP, production starts from the next sequence. When production is
restarted after STOP has been pushed (current panels are finished and unloaded), the
machine loads the next panel and production begins.
01SYS-0008
4.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop

1. Ensure that the problem that resulted in the emergency stop has been resolved.
2. Release the EMERGENCY STOP button by turning in the clockwise direction.
01SYS-0010

3. Push START.
01SYS-0008

4.4 Transmitting Jobs

1. Confirm that one of the screens below displays on all of the modules.
Note: Job transmission is not possible when a screen other than one of those below displays.
• The following displays when waiting for START to be pushed.
01SYS-0011
• The following displays when the current job does not exist in the module,
however, the next job does.
01SYS-0012
• The following displays when neither the current or next job exists in the module.
01SYS-0013

2. Transmit the job using Fuji Flexa. Refer to the transmission procedures in the Fuji Flexa
Programming Manual for further details on transmission.
The above screens display during transmission 01SYS-0014E
3. The job name on the modules changes when transmission is complete.
Job for Lane 2 T Test

Job for Lane 1 T Test
01SYS-0015
Note: The different jobs have been sent to lane 1 and lane 2 in the screen shown above.
01SYS-0016

4.5 Displaying the Image Monitor

The following section explains how to display the image monitor during production.
1. Push MONITOR to change the display from the operation screen to the image screen.
Note:
1. By pushing and holding GROUP while performing the above actions, the operation panels
for all of the modules on the base are changed to the image monitor.
2. The machine operates with the trace mode ON when the vision monitor is displayed
during production. When trace mode is ON, the placing cycle time will increase by
approximately 20% due to a drop in the vision processing speed.
2. The screen reverts back to the initial screen when MONITOR is pushed again.
Press MONITOR button

Operation Screen Press MONITOR button Vision Monitor
NXTOPE065
Note: The operation buttons at the operation panel are disabled when the vision monitor is
displayed. Switch back to the operation screen when it is necessary to use the operation
buttons.

4.6 Supplying Parts

There are two basic options for resupplying parts during production.
a. New part tape can be connected to the previous part tape for which parts are going
to run out soon.
b. By exchanging feeders during production, feeders with new reels of parts can be set.
(It is possible to supply parts without stopping the machine by using alternate
feeders. )
4.6.1 Splicing parts

The proper splicing tools and items need to be available before starting the splicing
operation.
Tape cutter Splicing tool NXTSPL006
When performing splicing using Fujitrax Verifier, there are three different modes which can
be used: (1) without DIDs, (2) one point verification, and (3) two point verification.
When not using Fujitrax Verifier, throughly ensure that the parts to be connected are correct
and then connect the carrier tapes together.
Verifying (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

1. Check the parts out warning that is displayed at the operation panel of the machine, the
status screen of Kit Manager, or the part condition screen of Kit Handy.
2. Prepare a new parts reel that contains the same type of parts as the parts that are
currently being placed.
3. Start Kit Handy and click the Windows mark to display the start menu. Select [Kit Handy]
to display the logon screen.
4. Enter or select a user ID and click [OK] to display the Kit Handy menu.
5. Click [Parts Status List].
6. Enter or scan the name of the NXT for which splicing will be performed and click [OK].
7. At the Kit Handy screen, select [Mode] - [Splicing].
8. When using one point verification or without DID mode, all feeder positions for which
splicing is required are displayed at Kit Handy. Select the feeders for which splicing will
be performed by tapping the feeder position. Then, scan the DID or part barcode of the
new parts reel.
9. When using two point verification, use Kit Handy to scan the DID of the old parts reel
and then scan the DID of the new parts reel.

10.After the DID or part barcode has been scanned, splicing can be performed if no
problem was found during the splicing check. However, if an error occurs, then the new
parts reel and the parts reel currently loaded on the feeder do not match and splicing
cannot be performed.
Connecting carrier tapes

1. Remove the old reel and unwind the remaining tape.
DID
࡝࡯࡞ࡎ࡞࠳
NXTSPL008b
2. Using the splicing cutter, cut the tape at the correct position based on the tape pitch after
the last part on the tape. Ensure that the top film is facing up when cutting the tape.
New tape Existing tape
(P2) 2-pitch
(P2) 2-pitch
Feed direction
(P4) 4-pitch (P4) 4-pitch Feed direction
NXTSPL001
3. If not using Fujitrax, ensure that the parts are the same type.
4. Cut the new tape on the new reel at the correct position based on the tape pitch just
before the first part in the tape. Ensure that the top film is facing up when cutting the
tape.
5. Ensure that the top film can be peeled back from the starting point without a problem by
peeling the film on the new tape back for about 1 mm and then sticking it back down.
New tape
1 mm NXTSPL007
Note: Do not peel too far back or parts may be lost.

6. Put a splicing chip in the splicing tool.
Splicing chip
NXTSPL002a
7. Set the end of the old tape in the splicing tool with the top film facing up so the end
comes to the middle of the splicing chip and move the holding clip over the tape to hold
it in position.
8. Set the beginning of the new tape in the splicing tool with the top film facing up so the
front tip comes to the middle of the splicing chip and move the holding clip over the tape
to hold it in position.
Holding clips
New tape
Existing tape
NXTSPL003a
9. Squeeze the grips for the splicing tool quickly to set the splicing chip.
Handle
NXTSPL004a
Note: When squeezing the grips, keep fingers and other body parts away from the splicing area
to avoid injury.

10.Using the pin on the splicing tool, align the splicing top film tape over the spliced tape
spot and press firmly to fix the tape in that position.
Note: Be sure to use the correct size for the top film tape based on the width of the tape being
spliced.
11.Gently peel the top blue section of the top film splicing tape off the spliced tape. A yellow
band of tape should remain on the spliced tape.
NXTSPL005
12.Move the holding levers on the splicing tool so the tape can be removed and gently
remove the spliced tape from the splicing tool.
13.Gently wind up any old length of tape onto the new reel and set the reel on the feeder
reel holder.
NXTSPL009b
14.If using Fujitrax, tap the displayed message at Kit Handy to inform Fujitrax that splicing
has been completed.
This completes the splicing procedure.
When using the splicing jigs shown below, refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Splicing
Detection Unit Instruction Manual for details.
AA9DA01 AA94T02
AA94Z02 AA95A02
01NST-0353E

Caution regarding splicing carrier tape

Splicing is a procedure that should only be performed when the number of remaining parts
in the carrier is very small. If splicing is performed when there are still lots of parts left in
the carrier tape, then the diameter of the tape roll may exceed the diameter of the parts reel
when the carrier tape is taken up.
Carrier Tape Carrier Tape
Parts reel Parts reel 01SYS-0332E
If the reel is set in the reel holder with the carrier tape in this condition then the tape may
interfere with the feeder, and the loose tape may get twisted as it is moved forwards,
causing indexing problems.
Ensure that the diameter of the tape roll does not exceed the diameter of the parts reel.
Cautions when using the free allocation function

When the free allocation function is being used, both the slot at which the feeder is actually
set and the slot specified in the job are displayed at the parts out warning screen in Kit
Handy. Perform splicing for the feeder displayed in the [Position] column.
Slot with parts out condition
01SYS-0188E
In the screen shown above, the feeder for which a parts out warning occurred is set at 1-1-
20-0. However, slot 1-1-11-0 is specified in the job.

4.6.2 Replacing Feeders

The following screen displays when parts run out during production.
It is possible to switch the display between the feeder setup guidance and the feeder
allocation list by pressing [OK].
Screen change guidance
Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
Feeder setup guidance 01SYS-0054E
Slot information
Slot number
Pitch
Tape width
Device comment
Feeder allocation list 01SYS-0055E
Slot information shows the slot numbers at which feeders must be set and other information
such as device comment.
The feeder setup guidance screen displays the feeders which are required for changeover.
Feeders are listed in order of priority as shown below.
• Feeder which are included in the alternate feeder group but are not yet ready for
production.
• Original feeders have a higher priority than alternate feeders.
• Feeders which have the same priority are displayed in order of slot number from
lowest to highest.
The feeder allocation list screen displays the slots at which feeders need to be set. The
screen can be changed to display information for all feeders by pushing the up and down
arrow keys.
Note: Follow the procedures displayed on the guidance screen to perform feeder changeover. It
is also possible to perform feeder changeover during production. Procedures for loading
and unloading tape feeders are shown in this section. The same procedures can be used
for stick feeders.

Procedures differ depending on whether or not Fujitrax Verifier is used. If Fujitrax Verifier is
not being used, verify that a parts out condition is displayed at the machine operation panel,
and then skip to step 5.
1. Verify that a parts out warning is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status
screen in Kit Manager, or the parts status screen in Kit Handy.
2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being
placed. Set the new parts reel in a feeder.
3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick
verification. (The machine will check the parts type once the feeder has been inserted
into the device pallet).
Note: When using AVL data, be sure to create an ID if the new parts have a different part number
than the current parts.
4. Verify that a parts out condition is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status
5. The feeders on which parts have run out are located in the slot positions where the LEDs
on the front cover are red. Locate the feeder with a red LED and pull up on the clamp
lever as shown in the picture below to raise the feeder clamper and disconnect the
feeder power.
Note: Do not remove a feeder that has a green or yellow LED lit. A collision could occur between
a nozzle that is picking up parts and the feeder thus causing damage.
6. With the clamper raised and keeping the feeder level, slide the feeder backwards to
remove.
Slot No.
LED
Clamp lever
NXTOPE025Eb
Note: When removing feeders, it is essential that the clamp lever is raised all of the way and kept
in that condition when the feeder is pulled out. If the clamp lever is not completely raised,
it is possible that the power to the feeder is not disconnected. If the feeder is removed with
power still being supplied, the connector can become bad and the internal feeder board can
be damaged.

7. Firmly grip the handle of the pulled back feeder and pull it out of the machine to remove
it.
Caution: Be sure to firmly grip the handle to prevent the feeder from being dropped.
NXTOPE157b
8. Replace the empty part reel with a new one of the same part. Place the feeder guide
into the slot on the feeder pallet.
NXTOPE022b
CAUTION
Ensure that the guide at the base of the feeder is inserted into the
slot. If it is not inserted correctly, there is the danger of the feeder
colliding with the placing head.
Guide
Slot 01NST-0379

9. Slide the feeder forward in the slot on the feeder pallet.
NXTOPE023a
10.Pull the clamp lever up as shown in the picture below to raise the clamper and then slide
the feeder fully into position until the connector at the tip of the feeder is inserted in the
connector on the feeder pallet.
Connector
(Machine side)
Connector
Clamper (Feeder side)
Clamp lever
NXTOPE024Ea
11.Lower the clamp lever when the feeder is fully inserted to lower the clamper and lock the
feeder. When the lever is lowered the feeder power should come on and the “PWR”
LED on the operation panel for the feeder is turned on.
Clamper
Clamp lever
NXTOPE026Ea
Note: If the feeder is fully inserted but not properly locked, the sensor on the clamper will not allow
power to be restored and the PWR LED will not come on. In this condition, the feeder
cannot be used.

12.When using W8 feeders with 7 inch reel holders, ensure that the reel holders of every
second feeder are extended downwards. It does not matter whether the reel holders of
odd-numbered slots or even-numbered slots are extended downwards.
W8 feeder
W8 feeder
01NST-0290
Reel holder
13.When the feeder is set in position, press the set button for the number of that slot and if
the feeder is the correct type with the right pitch and set properly, the set LED will turn
green.
Slot no. 14 15 16
Set button
NXTOPE011
Note: The operation above is not necessary when Fujitrax Verifier is used.
After the feeder has been set and the set button has been pushed, information for the
feeder is displayed at the feeder set guidance screen. If the set button is pushed again,
information for the feeder is cleared.
Set information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Tape width
Device comment
01SYS-0112E

4.6.3 Replacing feeders (Tray unit-LT/LTC)

The following feeder exchange guidance displays when parts run out during production
when using feeders set on the tray unit-LT/LTC to supply parts.
Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
The feeder slot positions on the tray unit-LT are slot 39 to 45.
The feeder slot positions on the tray unit-LTC are slot 27 to 45. 01SYS-0311E
The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the
feeders into the feeder slots for the tray unit-LT/LTC.
Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC

On a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC, if parts run out for feeders and trays at the same time,
the guidance for supplying tray parts is displayed first. When tray parts replenishment is
completed or if the left arrow button is pushed, the guidance for supplying feeder parts is
displayed.
Tray parts supply guidance Feeder set guidance
Replenishment for both magazines completed

or left arrow button pushed. 01SYS-0312E
If trays replenishment is completed for one magazine and production can be continued, a
pictogram to indicate that feeder replenishment should be performed first is displayed.
Push the left arrow button to display the feeder replenishment guidance.
Guidance pictogram to supply feeder parts first Feeder set guidance
Push the left arrow button. 01SYS-0313E

4.6.4 Using dynamic alternate feeders

Production can be continued by using the dynamic alternate feeder function. During
production, a report is issued by Fujitrax Verifier that a part is going to run out. The operator
prepares a feeder with the same part and places this feeder in an empty position in the
module. Fujitrax Verifier checks the set feeder and changes that feeder position into an
alternate feeder (next device in MCS/F4G) for the matching part. Once the original feeder
runs out of parts, the alternate feeder is then used by the machine.
In order to use the dynamic alternate feeder function, Fujitrax Verifier must be used.
Two different modes can be selected when using dynamic alternate devices. Settings for
the modes are specified in Fujitrax.
Setting Description
Look For Removable The alternate feeder can be used when a condition such as
a parts out warning occurs for the feeder currently being
used in production, or when a problem occurs during parts
pick up.
Keep Alt Feeder The alternate feeder can be use regardless of the condition
of the feeder currently being used for production.
Using dynamic alternate feeders

1. Verify that a parts out warning is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status
2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being
placed. Set the new parts reel in a feeder.
3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick
verification. (The machine will check the parts type once the feeder has been inserted
into the device pallet).
Note: Create a different ID if the new parts have a different part number than the current parts.
4. Set an alternate feeder for which verification has been performed into an empty slot on
the device pallet.
5. Check the feeder set LED for that position. If it turns green, verification was completed
successfully and the feeder status is changed into an alternate feeder.
6. Once the original feeder runs out of parts, remove that feeder and the machine starts to
use the alternate feeder. After the feeder is removed, the LED for the alternate feeder
changes to red and the feeder must be removed (it becomes a “removeable feeder”).
Note: If multiple dynamic alternate feeders are set for the same part, the status of all of the set
feeders becomes “removeable”.
Caution: When removing feeders, it is essential that the clamp lever is raised all of the way and kept
be damaged.
From this point, procedures differ according to the mode selected for dynamic alternate
devices.

When [Look For Removable] is selected

1. The guidance area changes to display the guidance for moving the alternate feeder to
the original feeder position. Remove the alternate feeder. At this point the original slot
red LED will begin to blink.
01SYS-0146
Caution: When there are multiple alternate feeders, only remove one of the alternate feeders. If two
or more feeders are removed, the feeder guidance will not display correctly.
2. Set the removed alternate feeder in the original feeder position. The feeder set LED
turns green if verification is OK and production can continue.
Note: When removing the alternate feeder (removable feeder) and setting in the slot for the
original feeder, make sure to perform this within the [Miss Prevention Timer] time limit set
at the Central Server. If the action is not completed within this time limit, the feeder status
becomes "No ID" and the feeder must be verified again before it can be used.
When [Keep Alt Feeder] is selected

1. Parts pick up is performed using the alternate feeder until a new feeder is set into the
original slot. Once a new feeder is set into the original slot, parts pick up is continued
from that feeder.

4.6.5 Feeder changeover using the automatic changeover function

When the automatic changeover function is being used, feeder pallet changeover guidance
is displayed after job changeover if the feeder setup is different.
Feeder pallet exchange guidance
Set information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Tape width
Device comment
Auto changeover production mode
01SYS-0140E
1. Push MANUAL at the module operation panel.
01SYS-0141
2. Set the PCU.
01SYS-0142
Note: For details on using the PCU, refer to section "5.4 Removing/Loading a Feeder Pallet" in
the NXT Mechanical Reference manual.

3. Push OK to unclamp the feeder pallet.
01SYS-0143
4. Remove the feeder pallet by gently sliding the PCU body away from the base.
01SYS-0144
5. Insert a feeder pallet that has been loaded with new feeders into the machine. The
feeder pallet will clamp automatically.
01SYS-0142
6. Push START.

4.6.6 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation function

Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens
listed below. Check the parts out condition at the screen which is most convenient (this will
vary depending on whether or not Kit Handy is used and the location of the computer).
• Machine operation panel
• Kit Handy
• Kit Manager
The feeder exchange guidance displayed at the machine operation panel is the same as
when the free allocation function is not being used. For details, refer to section " 4.6.2
Replacing Feeders ".
01SYS-0190J
The screen shown above indicates that a part outs condition has occurred for the feeder
set in slot 11. This is not the feeder for slot 11 which is specified in the job.
The feeder exchange guidance which is displayed at Kit Handy and Kit Manager shows
both the actual slot at which the feeder is set and the slot which is specified in the job.
Slot with parts out condition
1-1-1-0 1-1-2-0
Slot number
01SYS-0189E
The screen shown above indicates that a parts out condition has occurred for the feeder
set in slot 1. This feeder is specified for slot 2 in the job.
Feeder changeover using the automatic changeover function

1. Remove the feeder for which the parts out condition occurred from the feeder pallet.
Also, perform quick verification for the new parts reel. For details, refer to section " 4.6.2
2. Set the new feeder into any slot. For details on setting the feeder, refer to section " 4.6.2
3. Ensure that the green LED is lit on the feeder control panel.

4.7 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LT

There are three main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-LT.
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Using tray
verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Not using
tray verification)
• Normally supplying tray parts just to magazine A or to magazine B.
No matter the mode being used, supply tray parts based on the tray supply guidance
displayed on the operation panel.

Verifier)
Refer to the tray parts supply guidance screen.
Slot Device information Screen change guidance
Operation guidance
Slot
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Push the up and down arrow keys to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12).
The background color of the selected slot changes to green.
If position "A-12" is selected and the down arrow key is pushed,
position "B-1" is selected.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting trays in
a slot is completed, the red mark changes to blue.
Original device Position from which pickup is currently
Alternate device being performed
Device information
The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts to run out is displayed.
Operation guidance
Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.
Setting feeder parts
Screen change guidance Setting tray parts
Use the right/left arrow keys to change the screen.
Specifying the pickup point
01SYS-0314E

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT. There are two front doors on the tray unit-LT.
Open the door for the area that you are supplying trays.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0236
2. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition,
the LED for the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is flashing.
LED 01SYS-0246
3. Use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237
4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot to be resupplied.

5. Quick verify the tray and tray drawer using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray
verification with position check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the
DID (tray).
Note: For details on tray verification, refer to section “5. Verifying Tray Parts” in the Fujitrax
Verifier User Manual.
6. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, set it here. For more details, refer to "
4.7.6 Setting the pickup position ".
7. Set the tray(s) in the tray drawer.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
8. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
Caution: When setting the tray drawer in the slot, set it gently so as to not jar the trays.
Note: If you wish to change the display to supply trays for other slots, use the up and down arrow
keys on the operation panel to select the slot and then set trays.
9. If there is guidance for setting trays in other slots, then repeat steps 4 to 8.

10.Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.
01SYS-0231
Note: It is possible to enter production even though not all of the trays have been set as long as
all the trays necessary for production have been set. When this condition is fulfilled,
guidance for pushing COMPLETE is displayed as shown below.
01SYS-0232
11.Use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0240
12.Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.
COMPLETE button
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0241
Note: Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LT.

4.7.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Refer to the parts supply guidance screen.
Operation guidance
Slot
Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the pickup point

Setting tray parts
Setting feeder parts 01SYS-0315E

Front door
Front door
01SYS-0236
the LED for the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is lit.
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237

Note: The LED for the slot that is to have trays supplied is lit.

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
7. If it is necessary to specify the first pickup point, then specify it at this time. Refer to "
4.7.6 Setting the pickup position " for details.
8. Push OK on the operation panel.

01SYS-0231
01SYS-0232
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0240
12.Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is started.
COMPLETE button
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0241

4.7.3 Guidance display and procedure (when using supply from B

magazine mode)
Operation guidance
Slot
When using "supply from B magazine mode" the slot number 10 to 12 do not display.
Slot 12 in magazine B is the location to which the drawer with the empty tray is moved.
When this slot is selected, the background color changes to yellow.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting trays in a slot is
completed, the red mark changes to blue.
Original device Position from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate device
Device information
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed for
the currently selected slot.
Operation guidance
Use the right/left arrow keys to change the screen. Setting tray parts
Specifying the
pickup point
01SYS-0316E
1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT for the lower magazine.
Front door
01SYS-0317E

Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0318E
3. Remove the tray drawer from slot 12.
Tray drawer
01SYS-0319E
5. Check the slot to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition,
LED
01SYS-0320

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0321E
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0322E

COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0323E

4.7.4 Guidance display and procedure (when using supply from A

magazine mode)
Operation guidance
Slot
When using "supply from B magazine mode" the slot number 10 to 12 do not display.
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the
pickup point
01SYS-0381E
Note: Supplying parts from magazine A is supported from NXT machine application V5.15.
1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT for the lower magazine.
Front door
01SYS-0382E

Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0397E
Tray drawer
01SYS-0384E
LED
01SYS-0320

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0399E

COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0383E


Parts supply for the tray unit-LT can be performed efficiently by following the guidance
displayed at the operation panel of the machine. However, even if guidance to supply tray
parts is not being displayed at the operation panel, it is possible to efficiently supply tray
parts by pushing SUPPLY PARTS. This function should be used in cases like the one
shown below.
• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator
wishes to perform part supply for the alternate tray now in order to prevent a
parts out condition from occurring while he/she is gone.
1. When the machine is performing automatic operation, push SUPPLY PARTS. The
SUPPLY PARTS button will begin to flash.
SUPPLY PARTS button (upper level)
SUPPLY PARTS button (lower level) 01SYS-0403E
2. Guidance for supplying tray parts will be displayed at the machine operation panel. The
magazine of the tray unit-LT will retract so that parts supply is possible.
01SYS-0406
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to " 4.7.1 Guidance display and
procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ". or " 4.7.2 Guidance display and procedure
(when not using Fujitrax Verifier) " for how to set trays.
4. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.
COMPLETE button
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0241

4.7.6 Setting the pickup position

It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-
LT from Kit Handy or on the machine from the pickup position screen.
It is also possible to specify the pickup position through Accessory Software. When the
position is specified on the machine and through Accessory Software jointly, the setting
made last is the valid setting.
Procedure
1. When the tray exchange guidance screen is displayed, push the right arrow key.
Pickup position pictogram
01SYS-0233E
2. The pickup position settings screen is displayed. Use the arrow keys to set the values
for X and Y.
Pickup position settings
01SYS-0234E
• The default values for pickup position settings are the current pickup position.
• The numbers displayed at the corners of the tray diagram (for example (5, 4))
represent the tray dimensions.
: Increases the pickup point for X by 1. : Increases the pickup point for Y by 1.
: Decreases the pickup point for X by 1. : Decreases the pickup point for Y by 1.
NXTOPE150
3. Once the correct setting has been specified, push OK.
• If a tray is set in subslot 2, then the display changes to display the pickup
position point setting guidance for subslot 2.

• If there is no tray set in subslot 2 or the subslot 2 setting is completed, then the
tray exchange guidance is redisplayed.
Note: If CANCEL is pushed, the setting is cancelled.
Specifying the pickup position from Kit Handy

Perform the following steps on a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-L.
2. Specify the column (X) and row (Y) for the first pickup cavity in Kit Handy.
NXTOPE257E
Note: If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point
becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.
3. Tap [OK].
The specification for the part supply direction is different depending on the direction of the
tray set in the drawer even if the same tray is used.
Direction 0 Direction 90
(X, Y) = (4, 4)
(X, Y) = (1, 4)
(X, Y) = (3, 1)
(X, Y) = (4, 3) 01SYS-0176E

4.8 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LTC

There are three main methods for supplying parts for a tray Unit-LTC.
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Using tray
verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Not using
tray verification)
• Normally supplying tray parts just to magazine A or to magazine B.

Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the pickup
point
01SYS-0385E

1. Open the front door on the tray Unit-LTC. There are two front doors on the tray Unit-
LTC. Open the door for the area that you are supplying trays.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0285E
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0286E

5. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
DID (tray).
Note: For details on tray verification, refer to section “5. Verifying Tray Parts” in the Fujitrax
Tray
Tray drawer 01SYS-0287E

01SYS-0405
01SYS-0387
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0290E

COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note: Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray Unit-LTC.
13.When using tray verification with position check, the tray unit reads the FIDL of the tray
drawer and checks the part type, pickup point, and tray height. The supply guidance
redisplays if some condition occurs such as the wrong tray is set or tray parts have come
out of their cavities. Correct the problem and set the tray in the unit.


Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
Push the up and down arrow keys to select the slot. The slot numbers range from 1 to 12.
If position "A-12" is selected and the down arrow key is pushed, position "B-1" is selected.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When the trays have been set
in the appropriate slots, the red mark changes to blue.
Alternate device
Device information
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed
for the currently selected slot.
Operation guidance
Specifying the
pickup point
01SYS-0388E

1. Open the front door on the tray Unit-LTC. There are two front doors on the tray Unit-
LTC. Open the door for the area that you are supplying trays.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0285E
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0286E

Note: The LED for the slot that is to have trays supplied is lit.

Tray
7. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, specify it at this time. Refer to " 4.7.6
Setting the pickup position " for information.
01SYS-0405

01SYS-0387
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0290E
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E

4.8.3 Guidance display and procedure (when using supply from B

magazine mode)
Operation guidance
Slot
When using "supply from B magazine mode" the slots 11 to 12 do not display.
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the
pickup point
01SYS-0389E
1. Open the front door on the tray Unit-LTC for the lower magazine.
Front door
01SYS-0390E

Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0391E
01SYS-0392E
Tray drawer
LED
01SYS-0320

Tray
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0394E

11.Close the bottom front door and then push the COMPLETE button.
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0395E

4.8.4 Guidance display and procedure (when using supply from A

magazine mode)
Operation guidance
Slot
When using "supply from A magazine mode" the slots 11 to 12 do not display.
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the
pickup point
01SYS-0396E
1. Open the front door on the tray Unit-LTC for the lower magazine.
Front door
01SYS-0400E

Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0286E
LED
01SYS-0320

Tray
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0401E

COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0402E


Parts supply for the tray unit-LTC can be performed efficiently by following the guidance
shown below.
• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator
SUPPLY PARTS button will begin to flash.
SUPPLY PARTS button (upper level)
SUPPLY PARTS button (lower level) 01SYS-0409E
magazine of the tray unit-LTC will retract so that parts supply is possible.
01SYS-0410
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to " 4.8.1 Guidance display and
procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ". or " 4.8.2 Guidance display and procedure
(when not using Fujitrax Verifier) " for how to set trays.
4. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note: Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTC.


It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray Unit-
LTC from Kit Handy or on the machine from the pickup position screen.
made last is the valid setting.
Specifying the pickup position on the machine

The pickup point setting is accessed from the tray exchange guidance screen. From the
tray exchange guidance screen, select the pickup point pictogram and then push OK.
01SYS-0233E
for X and Y.
01SYS-0234E
NXTOPE150


NXTOPE257E
3. Tap [OK].
If a tray is set in subslot 2, then the display changes to display the pickup position point
setting guidance for subslot 2.
(X, Y) = (4, 4)
(X, Y) = (1, 4)
(X, Y) = (3, 1)
(X, Y) = (4, 3) 01SYS-0176E

4.9 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-L

There are three main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-L.
• Stopping the tray unit-L (using tray verification)
• Stopping the tray unit-L (not using tray verification)
• Non-stop parts resupply
4.9.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

Slot Tray information
Operation guidance
Slot
Supply trays to the slot designated by the red mark.
Trays should first be supplied to slots from which pickup is currently
being performed.
Sub-slot 1 Sub-slot 2
Original device
1
2 Alternate device
3 Slot from which pickup is
Red: Tray supply required
4 currently being performed
Blue: Tray supply completed
5 Yellow: Parts out warning
Tray information
The slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
The device comment, pickup direction, and starting pickup position (1,1) are
If Fujitrax is being used, the parts out advance warning time (minutes) is displayed.
Operation guidance
01SYS-0024E

1. Open the tray unit door.
Front door
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NXTOPE125
2. Remove the tray drawer from the slot that parts are to be resupplied.
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
a. At Kit Handy, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.
DID (tray).
Note: For details on verifying trays refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the Fujitrax Verifier
User Manual.
5. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
Subslot 2 NXTOPE186E

6. Set the tray drawer into the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed on the
operation panel.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Tray NXTOPE126
Caution: Gently set the tray pallet into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.
7. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat steps 2 to 6 until all
necessary trays have been set.
8. Close the door and push SUPPLY COPLT.
NXTOPE127
Note: Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming scattered.
9. When using tray verification with position check, the tray unit reads the FIDL of the tray


Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
being performed.
Original device
1
2 Alternate device
3 Slot from which pickup is (Red: Tray supply required
4 currently being performed
Blue: Tray supply completed)
5
Tray information
The device comment, pickup direction, and starting pickup position (1,1) are
Operation guidance
01SYS-0137E
Front door
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NXTOPE125
2. Remove the tray drawer from the slot that parts are to be resupplied.

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
4. While checking the guidance screen, set the tray in the correct device position.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Tray NXTOPE126
NXTOPE127
Note: Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming dislodged.

It is possible to supply parts from the parts supply drawer when [Tray Settings] - [Supply
from the front door/parts supply drawer] is selected in the machine accessories section of
Accessory Software. If this setting is selected and alternate trays are being used,
production can be continued even if tray drawers are being rejected to the parts supply
drawer.
Drawer
NXTOPE090E

4.9.3 Guidance display and procedure (Non-stop parts resupply)

When the tray parts become low during production, tray parts resupply guidance is
displayed. Follow the guidance to resupply parts while using the splicing mode from the Kit
Handy.
Operation guidance
Slot
being performed.
1 Original device
2 Alternate device
Slot from which pickup is 3
currently being performed 4 Red: Tray supply required
Blue: Tray supply completed
5 Yellow: Parts out warning
Tray information
The device comment and pickup direction are displayed
for the currently selected slot.
Operation guidance
Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot. 01SYS-0138E
Use the Kit Handy to check the type of parts that are required. The parts are displayed in
order of remaining production time in Kit Handy.
KIT Handy
File Mode Tool
Device Check - Splicing mode
Resupply parts for the uppermost parts
Status Pre Slot Part Barcode Time that have a * and the PartsE (red) or
*PartsE 0 5-1-2-1 AAAAA 0:30 PartsOutWarning (yellow) status for
*PartsO 0 5-1-2-2 AAAAA 0:30
that slot number.
SetOK 0 5-1-4-1 DDDDD 3
SetOK 0 5-1-4-2 CCCCC 5:43
*SetOK 0 5-1-6-1 BBBBB 12:12
*SetOK 0 5-1-6-2 BBBBB 12:12
5-1-2-2
Subslot No.
*SetOK 0 5-1-8-1 EEEEE 11:11
*SetOK 0 5-1-8-2 EEEEE 11:11
Slot No.
Stage No.
Module No.
NXTOPE185E

Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
DID (tray).
User Manual.
Note: After scanning the part barcode or the DID, the first pickup position for the tray parts can be
specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy. For details, refer to section " 4.9.4
Setting the pickup position " in this manual.
2. Set the tray in a spare drawer.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
3. Open the parts supply drawer.
Parts supply drawer
NXTOPE088E
4. Set the drawer with the replenishment parts in the parts supply drawer.
Drawer
NXTOPE090E
Caution: Ensure that the set drawer is properly set in the parts supply drawer and be sure to gently
close the parts supply drawer so to not scatter any parts.

5. After the parts supply drawer has been closed, the screen shown below is displayed.
01SYS-0139
Caution: The machine automatically performs a parts height check for the tray after the parts supply
drawer is closed.
6. Push OK if it is necessary to return to the tray parts resupply guidance screen.

Otherwise, push SUPPLY COPLT to complete tray supply.
7. The machine continues to use the original parts until they run out. When the original
parts run out, the replenishment parts are then changed and the drawer with the empty
tray for the original parts is moved to the parts removal area. Open the parts removal
door and remove the drawer. (This is when the [Use tray removal area] setting is
selected for the [Tray setting] for the module configuration in Accessory Software for
non-stop tray resupply.) The buzzer sounds and pallet removal guidance is displayed.
Parts removal area
Drawer
NXTOPE091Eb
Note: When the [Use supply drawer] setting is selected for the [Tray setting] for the module
configuration in Accessory Software, the tray drawer is moved to the supply drawer. Gently
pull forward the supply drawer and remove the drawer with the empty trays.


L from Kit Handy or on the machine from the pickup position screen.
made last is the valid setting. When Fujitrax Verifier is being used, the pickup position can
be set from Kit Handy.

The pickup point setting is accessed from the tray exchange guidance screen. From the
tray exchange guidance screen, select the pickup point pictogram and then push OK.
01SYS-0057E
for X and Y.
01SYS-0113E
NXTOPE150


NXTOPE257E
3. Tap [OK].
The specification for the part supply direction is different depending on the direction of the
tray set in the drawer even if the same tray is used.
(X, Y) = (4, 4)
(X, Y) = (1, 4)
(X, Y) = (3, 1)
(X, Y) = (4, 3) 01SYS-0176E

4.9.5 Tray unit-Ls that have an LED next to the parts supply drawer
Some tray unit-Ls have an LED next to the parts supply drawer. This LED indicates whether
or not it is possible to open the parts supply drawer.
LED
On: It is not possible to open the parts supply drawer.
Parts Off: It is possible to open the parts supply drawer.
supply drawer
01SYS-0186E

4.10 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-M

If tray parts run out during production, tray parts out guidance is displayed on the operation
panel. Supply trays as described in the tray parts guidance.
From this point, the guidance displayed at the operation panel and the exchange
procedures are different depending on whether [Verify ON] or [Verify OFF] is specified for
Fujitrax configuration settings (or on whether or not Fujitrax is being used).

Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
"A" and "B" represent the position in which the tray unit-M is set on the feeder pallet (A: left, B: right).
"A" is not displayed when operation is being performed with the tray unit-M set on only one side.
Push the up and down arrow keys to select a slot (slot numbers 1 to 10). The background color
of the selected slot changes to green.
When slot "A-10" is currently selected, pushing the down arrow key will display slot "B-1".
Supply trays to the slot designated by the red mark. The red mark will change to a blue mark
once a tray has been set.
Original device Device from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate device
Device information
The position and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
The device comment and pickup direction are displayed for the currently selected slot.
In the case of the NXT, the Stage No. is always displayed as "1".
Operation guidance

Use the arrow keys to change screens.
Set feeder parts (when one tray unit-M is set) 01SYS-0183E
Note: If the background color is yellow, then a recovery limit has been reached and production
cannot be continued. Be sure to supply parts as soon as possible to restart production.
When the background is green, production is continuing but the parts have run out for the
indicated slot. (Be sure to supply parts as soon as possible to prevent the machine from
stopping production due to a side or both sides running out of parts (when performing
production with two units supplied and using alternate trays)).


2. Raise the tray stopper.
Tray stopper
NXTOPE221E
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.
User Manual.
Note: After scanning the part barcode or the DID, the first pickup position for the tray parts can be
specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy. For details, refer to section " 4.10.3
Setting the pickup position " in this manual.

4. Check the slot indicated in the guidance and then remove the empty tray and gently set
a new tray with the same part number back in the slot from which the empty tray was
removed.
Tray
NXTOPE222E
Caution: Gently set the tray into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also,
ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper located in the rear of the slot. If the tray
contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.
5. Perform tray verification and set trays for all slots at which a parts out condition exists.
a. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the
empty trays of other parts.
Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present
the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out -
10 NXTMTU098E
b. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but
replenishment is not required.
6. When all trays have been replenished, the guidance automatically changes to a screen
to push “COMPLETE” button.
01SYS-0184

7. Lower the tray stopper.
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224E
8. Gently close the tray unit door and then push COMPLETE. Production is continued.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225E


Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance

Specify pickup position

Set tray parts
Note: If the background color is yellow, then a recovery limit has been reached and production
cannot be continued. Be sure to supply parts as soon as possible to restart production.
When the background is green, production is continuing but the parts have run out for the
indicated slot. (Be sure to supply parts as soon as possible to prevent the machine from
stopping production due to a side or both sides running out of parts (when performing
production with two units supplied and using alternate trays)).


Tray stopper
NXTOPE221E
3. Check the slot indicated in the guidance and then remove the empty tray and gently set
a new tray with the same part number back in the slot from which the empty tray was
removed.
Tray
NXTOPE222E
Caution: Gently set the tray into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also,
ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper located in the rear of the slot. If the tray
contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.

4. If necessary, specify settings for tray pickup position. Refer to section " 4.10.3 Setting
the pickup position " for details.
5. At the machine operation panel, select the slot for which parts were supplied and push
[OK].
a. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the
empty trays of other parts.
Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present
the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out -
10 NXTMTU098E
b. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but
replenishment is not required.
6. When all trays have been replenished, the guidance automatically changes to a screen
to push “COMPLETE” button.
01SYS-0185
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224E

8. Gently close the tray unit door and then push COMPLETE. Production is continued.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225E


M from Kit Handy or on the machine from the pickup position screen.
made last is the valid setting. When Fujitrax Verifier is being used, the pickup position can
be set from Kit Handy.

01SYS-0115E
2. Specify the new pickup position for X (columns) and Y (rows). Use the arrow buttons to
change the X and Y values.
01SYS-0061E
• When this guidance is first displayed, the current pickup point is automatically
specified.
• The values displayed in the brackets (for example (5,10)) represent the cavity
number for X and Y.
NXTOPE150



Perform the following steps using a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-M.
NXTOPE257E
3. Tap [OK].

4.10.4 When parts run out for both position A and position B
When two tray unit-Ms are in a module, production is stopped when parts have run out for
position A and position B and these are waiting for replenishment parts. If this occurs,
follow the procedures below.
Position A Waiting Position B Waiting

Slot Part Present/Parts out Slot Part Present/Parts out
01 X - Parts out - 01 X Present
02 Y Present 02 Y - Parts out -
03 03
NXTMTU099E
1. Parts replenishment guidance for the first parts is shown in the operation panel.
Resupply the parts according to the displayed guidance.
Note: Replenishment is not completed just by removing the empty tray and then pushing OK.
2. Production is resumed once parts for the first tray unit have been replenished, and a
single side is still waiting for parts to be replenished.
Position A Position B Waiting

01 X Present 01 X Present
03 03
NXTMTU100E
Note: in the example diagram above the parts "X" were the first parts that needed to be
replenished.
3. Guidance for replenishing parts for the other side is displayed in the operation panel.
Resupply parts according to the displayed guidance. Once all of the parts for the other
side have been replenished, parts replenishment for both positions is completed.
If the operator wishes to continue production with the current parts for a reason such as
production for the current job is nearly completed, then move the parts from the tray unit-M
position that was not the first to require replenishment (position B in the example) into the
tray unit-M position that was first (position A in the example).
Position A Position B Waiting

01 X Present 01 X - Parts out -
03 03
NXTMTU101E
After setting the trays, specify the pickup point for the moved tray and then push OK. For
details, refer to section " 4.10.3 Setting the pickup position " in this manual.

4.10.5 Using the SUPPLY button

Parts supply for the tray unit-M can be performed efficiently by following the guidance
shown below.
• It is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator
SUPPLY PARTS button will begin to blink.
SUPPLY PARTS button
01SYS-0181E
magazine of the tray unit-M will retract so that parts supply is possible.
01SYS-0182
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. For details on setting tray parts, refer to
section " 4.10.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier) " or
section " 4.10.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier) " in
this manual.
4. Finally, close the front door and press COMPLETE.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225E

4.11 Clearing Errors

The error screen displays upon the occurrence of an error.
Cause of the error Error code Information
Procedures for
clearing the error
This screen is an example of error guidance.
Cause of the error
A pictogram representing the cause of the error or the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
In the example shown above, air leakage is the cause of the error.
Error code
This code represents the cause of the error. More detailed information about the error can be
obtained by using Accessory Software to search for this error code.
Information
Information such as the status of the I/O at the place where the error occurred and the name
of the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
01SYS-0028E
Contact a member of the maintenance staff or technical engineer and ask them to fix the
error.
1. Push READY ON to proceed with production, if necessary.

4.12 Additional Information

4.12.1 Conveyor only function when a module is non-functional
Normally, it is not possible to continue production on modules that share a base with a
module that has items or servo motors that are not working. It is possible to use the
conveyor only on the module with the problem and continue production with this function.
Non-functional module (conveyor only)
Base NXTOPE115
Check the list below for the item that is non-functional. It is possible that this function cannot
be used depending on the non-functional item.
Can be used Cannot be used

Servo Amplifiers Servo motors CPU board Servo board
XY-robot Robot cables Vision DIO
processing board
Waste tape Nozzle changer Remote I/O Serial signal
processing unit (RS232C)
Nozzle station Mark camera IEEE-1394 Operation panel
Parts camera Device unit Safety doors
Conveyor Module control boxes
Air related items
If one of the items in the "Can be used" list is non-functional, follow the procedures below
to prepare the machine, and then restart production.
1. Check inside the module for any panels. If any panels are present, use the manual
mode panel removal command and remove the panel.
Note: If it is not possible to use the manual mode command, then use the remote command from
Accessory Software to unclamp the module and remove the panels.
2. With the non-functional module pulled forward, turn off the main switch in order to turn
off the machine.
3. Open the job for production in Fuji Flexa and distribute the parts allotted to the module
with the non-functional item to the other modules and save the job.
Note: If the job is to be optimized, do not select the [Reallocate Feeders] option. If this option is
selected, it is possible that feeders will be assigned back to the module with the non-
functioning item.
4. Turn on the main switch and wait until the modules boot and then automatically enter
sleep mode.
5. Start Accessory Software and select the desired module from Floor Monitor and then
click the module name to the left of the picture. A log on page displays.
Note: For paired M3(S) modules, specify conveyor only settings for both modules in the pair.

6. Select the user ID from the drop-down list.
7. Enter a password for the selected user and click [Log on]. If the log on is successful,
the machine accessories page is displayed with the previously selected module already
selected.
8. With the desired module selected, click [Module Configuration] from [Menu]. The
modules settings page is displayed.
9. Select [Breakdown Operation Settings] from the [Category] drop-down list and the
settings for that category are displayed.
10.Select the [Conveyor only] option for that module.
11.Click [Send to Machine] and the settings are sent to the module.
12.Once Accessory Software indicates that the settings are complete, it is safe to close the
window.
13.Push POWER on the modules to wake them and then return the non-functional module.
14.Transmit the job from Fuji Flexa to the machine.
15.Push START and production commences.

Note: On modules with the [Conveyor only] setting, it is not possible for the conveyor to perform
changeover. If the conveyor width needs to be changed, it is necessary to turn the
conveyor width shafts by hand to be the right width. If the conveyor width is changed, it may
be necessary to adjust the sensitivity of the conveyor right and left sensors. Refer to the
NXT Mechanical Reference manual for details on this procedure.
Lane 2 width adjustment shaft
Lane 1 width adjustment shaft

NXTOPE116

4.12.2 Pair Module Production

A single M3(S) module can be used for a panel when the panel is 250 mm or less or when
the panel is less than 305 mm and all placements and fiducials are within the middle 250
mm range of the panel. For panels that are larger than 250 and do not match the above
condition, it is possible to use pairs of M3(S) modules to place parts on the panel.
When using the pair module production, optimize the job for production with a panel length
of 250.01 mm or greater. Paired module production is automatically enabled for the M3(S)
modules on the machine.
However, pair module production is not possible for M6(S) modules.
250.01 mm or greater
Panel
NXTOPE131
Panel
Pair module
NXTOPE129
a. Panels with a length (X-direction) of 250.01 mm or more are supported.
b. Dual lane production using lanes 1 and 2 can be performed for panels with a width
(Y-direction) of 280.00 mm or less.
c. Production can be performed for different jobs at lane 1 and lane 2.
d. Production can be performed for the same job at lane 1 and lane 2.

Conditions for pair module production

Machine conditions
a. Both standard panel flow (from left to right) and reverse panel flow (from right to left)
are supported.
b. The head types for paired modules must be the same. Collisions between nozzles
and previously placed parts are possible if production is started with different head
types in paired modules.
c. Paired production is possible only when the two modules are surrounded by
seamless covers and/or the side cover. Paired production is not possible between
M3(S) and M6 modules (only M3(S) module can be paired) or when the seamless
cover is between the two modules.
Job
a. The job must be optimized.
b. There must be placing sequences for each module in the pair. It is not possible to
start production if one of the paired modules has no placing sequences. If no
sequences are allocated to one of the modules when the job is optimized, refer to
item 3 of the "Cautions when creating the job" section on the next page.
c. When using NXT V4.53 or earlier and there are three or more fiducial marks set, it is
necessary to specify settings so that all fiducial marks at each module are referenced
during placing sequences.
Left module Right module Correct example

Part 3
Part 2
Mark 1
Part 1
o Marks 1 and 2 are read by the left module.

Mark 1 is referenced with parts 1 and 3. This is a good relationship.
Mark 2 is referenced with part 3. This is also a good relationship.
o Mark 3 is read by the right module.
Mark 3 is referenced with part 2. This is a good relationship.
Incorrect example
Part 3
Part 2
Mark 2 Mark 3
Part 1
o Marks 1 and 2 are read by the head of the left module.

Mark 1 is referenced with parts 1 and 3. This is a good relationship.
Mark 2 is not referenced with any placing sequences for the left
module. This is a bad relationship.
o Mark 3 is read by the head of the right module.
Mark 3 is referenced with part 2. This is a good relationship.
NXTOPE130a
Note: It is necessary to manually change the reference mark settings if the results of optimization
are similar to the incorrect example shown above. It is possible to perform production in this
case from NXT V5.00.

Unsupported functions
a. For paired module production, the panel loading retry function cannot be used when
a fiducial mark reading error occurs. If there is an error when reading fiducial marks,
an error stop occurs for the machine.
b. Advance unloading of panels is not performed.
c. Manual mode commands are not supported for paired modules. It is necessary to
operate both modules simultaneously.
Cautions when creating the job

1. Single module production at a M3(S) can be performed for panels with a width (X-
direction) of 305.00 mm or less when the placing area (including referenced fiducial
marks) is within 250.00 mm. To perform single module production for this type of panel,
specify the settings listed below and then optimize the job.
• [Configuration] - [General] - [Optimize for Single Module Production]
2. When performing dual production, it is necessary for the settings listed below to have
the same values for jobs in lane 1 and jobs in lane 2.If the values are different, delete
the job which was transmitted first but leave the job which was transmitted last.
a. Line configuration (module type, module number)
b. Head type
c. Stage type
d. Nozzle station nickname
e. Nozzle Available contents
f. Nozzle allocation in the nozzle changer
g. In Feeder Setup, the following settings should be the same:
• Part data for the same slot number
• Tray direction for the same part number
• Alternate feeder
h. Same barcode label for same part data
3. The job must have placing sequences for both paired modules. However, if no
sequences are allocated when the job is optimized, then part data for a dummy
sequence should be created. It is necessary for feeders to be set for the dummy
sequences, but no reels are needed for the feeders. Although no parts are placed for
dummy sequences, the machine performs the motion of pick up and placement, so there
is a negative effect on throughput. It is possible to prevent a negative effect on
throughput by skipping the feeder which is used for the dummy sequence. However, it
is necessary to skip the feeder every time that the job is changed. Procedures for
creating a dummy sequence are listed below.
• Use vision type 253, Element data is not required
• Specify a part height of several mm
• Assign coordinates for the dummy parts anywhere within the relevant module.

4.12.3 Skipping devices

If the supply for a part runs out during production, production can be completed without this
part being placed by using this function to skip placing this part from the specified feeder
position. Production of panels is completed with the specified parts being skipped (thus
they are not on the panel) when using this function. Be careful when using this function.
This function is designed for line management personnel use.
Specifying a device skip

Once parts run out on the slot for the device skip to be set and the operation panel displays
guidance for resupplying the part, the device skip can be made. Before starting, ensure
that the guidance is for the correct module and part for the device skip.
1. Push CYCLE STOP on the operation panel for the module in question.
2. Start MEdit and select [Device skip] from the [Tools] menu and then select the slot to be
skipped for the module.
3. Click [Set] to send the change back to the module.
4. Press START to restart production. The panels are then completed without the part in
question.
Clearing a device skip

First prepare and set the parts that are being skipped in the machine and then perform the
following procedures.
1. Push STOP at the module in question and wait for the panel to be unloaded. Otherwise,
cycle stop the previous module, wait for production to be completed and all panels to be
unloaded from the module and then push CYCLE STOP.
2. Start MEdit and select [Device skip] from the [Tools] menu and then clear the skip setting
for the selected slot.
3. Click [Set] to send the change back to the module.
4. Press START to restart production. The panels are then completed with the part for
which the device skip was removed.

4.12.4 Skipping holders

This function prevents use of a specified holder on H08, H04, H12(S) or H12HS heads to
avoid using a holder on which frequent errors occur during production.
Note: The holder skip function is supported from NXT V3.01 and later.
Skipped holder
NXTOPE162E
Cautions
a. Recovery processing occurs for parts that were supposed to be placed by the
skipped holder. Therefore, the skip function reduces throughput compared to normal
production.
b. When skipping a holder due to a holder failure, verify that the other holders are
operating normally.
c. The nozzle in the skipped holder is returned to the nozzle station. If the nozzle
cannot be returned to the station due to some failure, remove the nozzle by hand.
Procedure
1. If START has not yet been pushed and the main screen is displayed after turning on the
power, push START to turn on the power to the head.
2. Push CYCLE STOP to stop the module. Wait until the main screen is redisplayed.
3. Start MEdit and select [Skip Holder] from the [Tools] menu and then specify the holder
to be skipped.
NXTOPE161
4. Click [Set] to send the setting to the machine.

4.12.5 Blocking feeders

If a feeder needs maintenance during production when using Fujitrax Verifier, that feeder
will stop being used and guidance for exchanging the feeder displays on the operation
panel. By using this function, it is possible to reduce the number of feeder related errors.
In addition, a feeder which has not had maintenance performed cannot be used in
production even if verification of that feeder is performed.
Note: The Fujitrax option software, Advanced Maintenance, must be installed and used in order
to use this function. The feeder blocking function is supported from NXT V3.01 and later.
Procedure
1. Start Advanced Maintenance and select [Options] from the [Tools] menu and then select
the [Conditions] tab. Specify the desired conditions at which maintenance needs to be
performed for feeders.
2. Click the [Others] tab, and select the checkbox for the [Do not allow use of feeders that
require maintenance] option.
NXTOPE164
3. Click [OK] to enable the new settings.

Note: Refer to chapter 8 in the Fujitrax Operation Manual for more information on the feeder
blocking function.

Feeder exchange guidance displayed for blocked feeders

If a feeder exceeds any of the conditions specified in the [Conditions] tab for the Advanced
Maintenance [Options] dialog box during production, then that feeder will stop being used
by the machine and guidance for exchanging the feeder is displayed.
01SYS-0147
Exchange the feeder or remove the feeder, perform maintenance on it and then set it back
in the module.

4.12.6 Using only one nozzle on a H02 head

There are cases in which interference with parts and nozzles in the area between the two
holders is possible depending on the picked parts size and nozzle types. When this is
possible, the H02 head allocates just one nozzle to pick up parts to avoid the possibility of
interference between the two holders.
A B A B
Parts are picked up on holders A and B Operation with one nozzle only on holder A
01SYS-0279E
Procedure
Run the optimizer in Fuji Flexa to allocate parts to modules with H02 heads. The machine
will determine the appropriate nozzle configuration for production.
When using single nozzle operation, the nozzle that is not being used is moved to the
retract position. If there still is a possibility of interference even with the unused nozzle in
the retract position, then the unused nozzle is returned to the nozzle station.

4.12.7 Using only two nozzles on the H04 head

2 nozzle or even 1 nozzle use is now possible by allocating parts with a diagonal size of up
to 26 mm and a Y-size of up to 18 mm. The following table shows the supported part sizes
for each nozzle configuration.
Note: 2 nozzle operation for the H04 head is supported from NXT V3.11 and later.
Nozzles Part sizes
4 nozzle operation 1608 to 13 x 13 mm
2 x 2 nozzle Greater than 13 x 13 mm

operation Y-size: 14 mm or less
Diagonal size: 19.8 mm or less
Holders B and D support parts with dimensions up to 11
x 11 mm.
2 nozzle operation Y-size: from greater than 14 mm to 18 mm or less

Diagonal size: from greater than 19 mm to 26 mm or
less
2 nozzle operation 15 x 15 mm or lessY-size: from greater than 14 mm

(with parts presence Diagonal size: from greater than 19.8 mm to 21.5 mm
check sensor) or less
1 nozzle operation 38 x 38 mm or lessY-size: greater than 18 mm Diagonal

size: greater than 26 mm.
1 nozzle operation Greater than 15 x 15 mm to 24 x 24 mm or less.

(with parts presence Diagonal size: greater than 21.5 mm
check sensor) (a parts presence check cannot be performed when
using 1 nozzle operation)
Note:
1. When using 2 x 2 nozzle operation, large parts are allocated to holders A and C, and small
parts are allocated to holders B and D. This allows a maximum of 4 holders to be used
(based on the results of optimization, there are cases when 4 holders may not be used).
2. 2 nozzle operation is when parts which are slightly too large for 4 nozzle operation are
allocated to holders A and C only (the largest nozzles are used at these holders) and
production is started.
3. Part size is the vision processing size (body size + lead length).
4. The vision processing center and the area considered for vision processing are based on
the pickup position. Therefore, if a pickup offset for X and/or Y have been specified, these
values must be used in calculating the part size.
[Vision processing part size X(Y)] = [Part size X(Y)] + ([Pick offset X(Y)] x 2)
Procedure
Allocate parts within the above listed size range to a module with a H04 head installed, and
run the optimizer. The machine will determine the appropriate nozzle configuration based
on the part size.
Limitations
When 2 nozzle operation is being performed and nozzles with a diameter greater than or
equal to 10 mm are set onto holders B and D (holders B and D are not used during 2 nozzle
operation), interference may occur with parts picked up by the nozzles set on holders A and
C. In this case, the type of operation will change to 1 nozzle operation.

4.12.8 Using only four nozzles on the H08 head

4 nozzle operation is now possible when performing production with the H08 head. This
allows larger than standard part sizes to be picked up and placed.
Note: The Using only four nozzles on the H08 head can be used from NXT V3.70.
A
H B
G C
Holders B, D, F, and H are used
F D 01SYS-0193
E
Supported parts sizes when using 4 nozzle operation for the H08 head are listed below.
Operation Supported part size

4 nozzle operation larger than 7.5 x 7.5 mm to 12 x 12 mm
8 nozzle operation 0402 to 7.5 x 7.5 mm
A
H B
G C Parts placed using 4 nozzle operation
Parts placed using standard operation

F D (8 nozzle)
01SYS-0194
E
Procedure for using 4 nozzle operation

In Fuji Flexa, allocate supported parts to a module that uses a H08 head and perform
optimization. The machine will automatically determine that optimal configuration for
production.
Restrictions
Only holders B, D, F and H can be used for this function. Therefore, if all the usable holders
are skipped, production is not possible. Do not skip all the nozzles for B, D, F and H holders
during 4 nozzle operation with a H08 head.

4.12.9 Using only six nozzles on the H12(S) head

6 nozzle operation is now possible when performing production with the H12(S) and H12HS
head. This allows larger than standard part sizes to be picked up and placed.
Note: The Using only six nozzles on the H12(S) and head can be used from NXT V3.70.
L A
B
K C
J D
Holders A, C, E, G, I, and K are used
I E
H F 01SYS-0195
G
Supported parts sizes when using 6 nozzle operation for the H12(S) and H12HS head are
listed below.
Operation Supported part size

6 nozzle operation larger than 5 x 5 mm to 7.5 x 7.5 mm
12 nozzle operation 0402 to 5 x 5 mm
L A
B
K C
J D Parts placed using 6 nozzle operation
I E Parts placed using standard operation

H F (12 nozzle) 01SYS-0196
G
Procedure for using 6 nozzle operation

In Fuji Flexa, allocate supported parts to a module that uses a H12(S) and H12HS head
and perform optimization. The machine will automatically determine that optimal
configuration for production.
Restrictions
Only holders A, C, E, G, I, and K can be used for this function. Therefore, if all the usable
holders are skipped, production is not possible. Do not skip all the nozzles for A, C, E, G,
K, and I holders during six nozzle operation with a H12(S) head.

4.12.10 Using multiframe vision processing with the H01 head

When using the H01 head, multiframe images of large parts are acquired in order to be able
to vision process them. With support for 4 multiframe vision processing, the part sizes that
can now be placed using the H01 head are as follows.
Note: Multiframe vision processing with the H01 head is supported from NXT V3.11.
0<Py 32 32<Py 38 38<Py 45 45<Py 74 74<Py 90 90<Py 135 135<Py 180
0<Px 32 2 frames 3 frames 4 frames

32<Px 38 Single frame
38<Px 45
XY frame
45<Px 74
2 frames Placement is not
74<Px 90 possible
90<Px 135 3 frames

135<Px 180 4 frames
(Units: mm)
The part size indicated above is the vision processing size (body size + lead length).
Parts that are too long in the Y-direction are rotated 90 degrees and then vision processed
using multiframe imaging in the X-direction.
A maximum part length for M3 modules is 150 mm. NXTOPE166E
Note:
1. Multiframe imaging cannot be performed when using pair module production. For this
reason, the maximum part size that is supported for pair module production is 38 x 45 mm.
2. Prerotation is disabled for parts using multiframe imaging.
3. Part orientation checking is not performed for parts processed using multiframe imaging.
Parts supported by multiframe vision processing.
VT Part Type VT Part Type VT Part Type

100 IC leaded part 130 Black BGA 150 White connector
143 CCGA 131 White BGA 152 Black connector
148 CCGA 136 White BGA 157 Black connector
144 LGA 231 White BGA 232 TBGA
148 LGA 236 White BGA 237 TBGA
/ / 240 MPA 252 All
VT= Vision type

Note: From NXT V3.42, Q-rotation image acquisition is supported for Vision Type 240.

Cautions
When using a tray unit-L, be sure to note the following points.
a. Do not set trays with a thickness exceeding 22 mm in subslot 2 at a module with a

tray unit-L installed, as there is a possibility of interference between the tray and part.
b. Under certain circumstances, it is not possible to set some tray sizes in subslot 1.
(See the drawing below.)
Part being vision processed
Parts camera
Do not set trays with a thickness

Interference area
exceeding 22 mm inside the
interference area.
Drawer
252 mm
Trays that extend beyond the 252 mm limit will lie in the
interference area so the tray height has to be 22 mm or lower.
* Ensure that the tray is set in the correct direction.

(This size is the actual X-direction size of the tray as it is set
in the drawer, not the tray X-size specified in the package data.)
NXTOPE167E
c. From NXT V3.42, the limitation on the trays with a thickness exceeding 22 mm as
mentioned in the above points "a" and "b" does not apply.
d. Use the parts reject conveyor for rejecting parts that are large enough to require
multiframe processing, as these kinds of parts will not fit inside the parts reject box.

4.12.11 Automatic changeover function

The automatic changeover function supports changeover for production of boards which
use a large variety of parts in small lots. The machine performs job changeover based on
the panel which is conveyed or a pre-specified production plan.
Select one of the following three modes when operating with the automatic changeover
function.
• Barcode ID mode
• Production sequence mode
• Handy scanner mode
For details on using the automatic changeover function, refer to the Accessory Software
Operation Manual (Chapter 4, Automatic Changeover Function).
The following options are required in order to use the automatic changeover function.
• Accessory Software: Automatic changeover function software
• Fujitrax (V3.02 and later): Fujitrax Verifier and Fujitrax Profiler
Barcode ID mode
The barcode attached to the panel is read and the machine performs job changeover to the
job matching the barcode ID before beginning production.
The following equipment is required to operate using barcode ID mode.
• Conveyor
• Barcode reader
• Profiler FLP (CONTEC SB 20)
• Panel conveyance control box (FLP-C)
Procedures for setting automatic changeover (barcode ID mode)

1. Specify the automatic changeover mode settings from the [Automatic changeover
settings] category from [Machine Configuration] in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0258E
• [Automatic changeover] : [ON]
• [Automatic changeover mode] : [Barcode ID]

2. Creating a panel type list
a. From the Floor Monitor screen of Accessory Software, select [Progress Monitor] to
display the Progress Monitor screen. Select [Panel Type Editor] from the header area
at the upper right-hand side of the screen.
b. Create a panel type list. For details on creating the panel type list, refer to the
Accessory Software Operation Manual (Chapter 4, Section 4.5, Editing a Panel Type
List).
3. Log on to Fujitrax Web and click [Profiling Settings] from the [System Settings]. Select
the [Do not permit conveyance] option for [Panel conveyance when ID scanning error
occurs].
Using automatic changeover (barcode ID mode)

1. A panel is conveyed and the barcode is read. If a new job is specified by the barcode,
panel unloading begins for the panel which is currently being produced, and job
changeover is performed automatically.
2. If a changeover operation such as exchanging the head is required, guidance for the
operator is displayed at the operation panel of the machine. Follow the displayed
guidance and perform the necessary changeover.

Production sequence mode (From NXT V3.11)

Operator commands are used as the changeover trigger for the automatic changeover
function when using schedules. Jobs are reserved in order based on the production
schedule, and changeover is performed using operator commands.
Procedures for setting automatic changeover (production sequence mode)

01SYS-0259E
• [Automatic changeover mode] : [Production Order] .
2. From the [Production Schedule] screen add and edit the production schedule. Refer to
Chapter 2, Section 3 "Editing a Schedule" in the Accessory Software Operation manual
for details on making and editing schedules.
NXTOPE168E

Using automatic changeover (production sequence mode)

1. Push OK on the operation panel when the auto changeover pictogram background color
changes to green while producing or the feeder parts out guidance is being displayed.
01SYS-0149a
2. Use the arrow keys to select the job change pictogram and push OK.
01SYS-0150
3. Push the left arrow button to select the job changeover pictogram, and then push OK.
01SYS-0148
After completion of the final panel for the current job, job changeover is performed for each
module in sequential order starting from the first module.

Using automatic changeover with the handy scanner (From NXT V3.11)
Reading a barcode with a reader such as the handy scanner acts as the changeover trigger
for automatic changeover.
In order to use this function, the following optional items are required.
• Barcode reader (connected to a computer)
• Barcode that specifies the desired job (production command)
Procedures for setting automatic changeover (using the handy scanner)

01SYS-0260E
• [Automatic changeover mode] : [Handy Scanner]
2. Register the lines on which automatic changeover with a handy scanner is to be used.
Refer to [Chapter 4, 6.2 Registering the lines on which the automatic changeover
function with a handy scanner is to be used] (Accessory software operation manual) for
details.
3. Create a table for the relation between the factory setup (lines and machines) and the
barcode IDs. Refer to [Chapter 4, 6.4 Creating tables for the relationship between the
factory setup and the barcode IDs] (Accessory software operation manual) for more
details. However, this step is not required. If the table is not created, the factory setup
can be selected manually at the screen.
4. Create a table for the relationship between the jobs and the barcode IDs. Refer to
[Chapter 4, 6.5 Creating tables for the relationship between the jobs and the barcode
IDs] (Accessory software operation manual) for details.
Using automatic changeover (using the handy scanner)

1. Read the barcode for the next job when production of the final panel for the current job
begins.
2. The panel for the current job is completed and unloaded to the next module. Automatic
changeover occurs after unloading is completed.
3. If operator involvement is required during changeover, the appropriate guidance

messages display. Follow the guidance to complete the changeover process.

Automatic changeover usage precautions

There are three automatic changeover modes: production order, barcode ID, and handy
scanner. Exercise caution regarding the following items when using the automatic
changeover function.
1. The following is the recovery method if the machine power is turned off when automatic
changeover has been performed for only some of the modules.
Auto changeover completed Job previous to changeover
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
Unload panels from the next modules. NXTOPE218E
a. Starting from the next modules and unload the panels after rebooting.
Unload panels starting from the next modules after rebooting.
b. After unloading any panels from module M6(S), start unloading panels from M5.
c. After all of the panels have been unloaded from the modules, change the job using
the operation panel on the modules that have not completed changeover (M5 to M8
in the example).
2. If there is no job in the machine for the current production, then use Fuji Flexa to transmit
it to the machine.
3. Ensure that the machine configuration in the job and the actual machine configuration
match and then transmit the job.
4. When using the "barcode ID" mode, do not place a buffer conveyor between the
conveyor where the barcode reader is installed and the first module of the NXT.
5. Jobs cannot be transmitted to the background from Fuji Flexa when the automatic
changeover function is being used. Jobs are either automatically transmitted to the
background by the automatic changeover function, or they can be reserved by
performing settings in the Next Production screen in Production Monitor.
6. When the automatic changeover function is being used, background jobs cannot be
changed if the machine is waiting for an operation to be performed. Jobs can be
manually changed on the machine only on the first module when operating based on a
production schedule.
7. After a job has been specified to be used in automatic changeover, that job should not
be edited. When the automatic changeover function determines the next job is to be
used, reading of that job begins in the background. There is no indication at the machine
or in Accessory Software that reading of the next job is occurring.
8. If the current job is lost, it can be restored by using the following procedure:
a. Select the "OFF" option for [Automatic changeover] in the [Machine Configuration].
b. Transmit the current job from Fuji Flexa as the next job.

c. Switch to the background job at the machine using the operation panel.
d. Select the "ON" option for [Automatic changeover] in the [Machine Configuration].
9. After replacing the CPU box, the current job and next job are lost if not backed up in
diagnostic mode. The current job may also be lost if an error occurs during job
changeover. In this case, perform the procedure described above in the previous step
to recover.
10.Background jobs are cleared when automatic changeover is switched from OFF to ON.
If the job currently being used in the next module is different from the job for the panel
to be unloaded to that module, a job must be sent to the background and job changeover
must be performed at the next module before unloading the panel to that module.
11.When performing automatic changeover from single module to paired module

production, a job change is not possible when the following occurs:
1)One of the modules has been changed to a paired module production job.
2)Power is turned off for that module.
3)Production is restarted at another module.
In such a case, unload all the single module production panels, and then use the
recovery procedures listed in item 8 to change to the job for paired module production.
12.When using automatic changeover, it is not possible to change to another job if no

panels have been produced for the job in the foreground. In such cases, production of
all panels must be completed and the panels unloaded before the next job can be
changed.
13.Automatic changeover cannot be performed correctly for a line in which a module is in

conveyor only mode (breakdown operation). Do not use automatic changeover when a
module is in conveyor only mode (breakdown operation).
14.Automatic changeover is not supported when in idle mode.

4.12.12 Automatic backup pin function

This function uses a picker mounted in the placing head to pickup automatic backup pins
from the stocker and place them on the backup plate. In order to use this function, it is
necessary to have compatible placing heads, and conveyor items for the automatic backup
pins.
Note: The automatic backup pin function is supported from NXT V3.11.
Picker
NXTPHD043E
• Placing head equipped with a backup pin picker.
• A stocker and supporting equipment mounted on the conveyor.
• Compatible backup plates for the automatic backup pins.
In addition, it is recommended to use the panel position correction function with this
function.
Procedure
1. Edit the job. Specify the backup pin positions and that they are to be used in the
machine configuration of the job. Refer to the NXT Programming manual for details.
2. Specify the automatic backup pin settings from the [Auto backup pin settings] category
from [Module Configuration] in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0263E
• [Auto backup pins ON/OFF] : [ON]
• [Number of auto backup pins for a lane 1] : [1 to 20]
• [Number of auto backup pins for a lane 2] : [1 to 20]

Using automatic backup pins

1. Push START and the machine automatically positions the automatic backup pins.
2. Once a backup pin has been positioned, the backup pin mark is then read to confirm the
positioning of the pin. The actions that are performed next are different depending of
the deviation between the specified pin positioning and the actual pin positioning.
Deviation Action
0.3 mm or less Positioning is completed. The next backup pin is then
positioned.
0.3 to 0.6 mm Positioning recovery is performed. The set backup pin is
picked up again and then placed back on the backup plate.
(Recovery is performed one time only.) If still out of range
the second time, an error end occurs.
0.6 mm or more A positioning error occurs. A backup pin reading error is
displayed. Perform the actions based on the guidance
shown.
Note: Refer to the drawings below for information on the possible positions for automatic backup
pins.
18
Panel size -33 mm
Possible placing area

Panel size
automatic backup
for
pins
Panel size (Y) 㪘㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼

㪌㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫄㫆㫉㪼㩷㪈㪉㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㩷㪏㩷㫄㫄
㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫅㪈㪉㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㪉㪇㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㩷㪏㪏㩷㫄㫄
104.5 104.5 㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫅㩷㪉㪇㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㪉㪏㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㪈㪍㪏㩷㫄㫄
15
㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫅㩷㪉㪏㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㪊㪍㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㪉㪋㪏㩷㫄㫄㩷
20.5 209 20.5
㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫅㩷㪊㪍㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㪋㪋㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㩷㪊㪉㪏㩷㫄㫄㩷
250 (Max) Panel size 㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫅㩷㪋㪋㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㪌㪉㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㪋㪇㪏㩷㫄㫄㩷
㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫅㩷㪌㪉㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㪍㪈㪇㩷㫄㫄㩷㫆㫉㩷㫃㪼㫊㫊㪋㪏㪏㩷㫄㫄
M3(S)
214
53 58
214 32.5 37.5 214

18
Panel size (Y) mm
Possible placing area Possible placing area

for automatic backup for automatic backup
pins pins
A
Back-up Plates
15
2 20.5 20.5 2
284 41 284
534 (Max) Panel size
M3(S) Pair Module 01SYS-0266E

244.5 252
Panel Center
18
Panel size -33 mm
Panel size
Possible placing area
for automatic backup
pins
15
22.5 496.5 15
534(Max) Panel size
M6(S)
01SYS-0267E

About automatic backup pin errors

Check the following items for how to clear errors that occur when using automatic backup
pins.
When backup pins cannot be located or it is not possible to return them.

This error occurs when events such as the ones listed below occur.
• When pickup pins are returned to the stocker by hand.
• When backup pins cannot be found during position checks.
• When the number of backup pins specified in the module configuration is

changed to a number less than the actual number of backup pins that are
placed.
01SYS-0030a
a. Push OK and then pull forward the module.
b. Put all of the backup pins on the backup plate back into the stocker by hand and then
push back the module.
Caution: If the error guidance is cleared with leaving the backup pins on the backup plate,
interference may occur between the already placed backup pins and the new backup pins
when operation is restarted. All of the backup pins must be returned to the stocker.
When the picker remains closed

The error occurs when the picker remains closed when trying to pick a backup pin with the
picker.
01SYS-0031b
a. Put all of the backup pins on the backup plate back into the stocker by hand and then
b. Push up by hand on the picker to open it and then push back the module.

Error reading the backup pins in the stocker

In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins in the stocker, the marks on
the automatic backup pins in the stocker are read. The following displays when errors occur
during the reading of the backup pin marks for backup pins in the stocker.
Note: It is possible to push MONITOR to check the image used for vision processing.
01SYS-0032a
b. Correctly set the backup pins in the stocker and then push back the module.
Error reading backup pins marks for backup pins on the backup plate
In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins on the backup plate, the marks
on the automatic backup pins on the backup plate are read. The following displays when
errors occur during the reading of the backup pin marks for backup pins on the backup
plate.
These coordinates are the result of reading the backup pin mark. If the coordinates are
displayed in red, then the permissible value is exceeded (permissible value = 0.6 mm).
If a series of dashes is displayed (---), this means that the backup pin mark could not be found.
01SYS-0033Ea
b. Ensure that there are no problems with the pin positions and there are no items on
the bottom of the pins. Return all pins back to the stocker by hand. Then push back
the module.

Error reading the stocker 2D code

The following displays when errors occur during the reading of the 2D code for the stocker
if the 2D code is dirty.
01SYS-0034a
b. Ensure that the stocker 2D code is not dirty and is not in the wrong position. Then
Picker raising and lowering errors

When the machine starts, the picker moves to the upper position. Also, when backup pins
are grabbed, the picker moves up and down. Errors occur if these operations do not occur
properly.
01SYS-0336
b. Confirm that the sensor is operating properly.
c. After the picker moves to the upper position (or is pushed up manually), push back
the module.

Picker upper limit errors

The machine monitors the upper limit of the picker in case it drops. Errors occur if for some
reason a problem is detected with the upper limit.
01SYS-0337E
First, confirm the status of the [PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK] on the error screen.
The next actions depend on whether it is [ON] or [OFF].
If the X100 PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK is [ON]

b. It is possible that the sensor is temporarily off. Confirm the status of the I/O input.
• Check the position of the sensor and the dog.
• Check that the sensor board connectors are connected correctly and that no
pins are disconnected.
c. Turn the machine main switch off.
d. Remove the head and check the following.
• The up and down movement of the picker is smooth.
• The picker moves up to the position where the upper limit sensor is supposed to
detect it.
e. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine
again and continue production. If an error recurs, replace the head.
If the X100 PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK is [OFF]

Push OK, pull forward the module and check the position of the picker by eye. The next
actions depend on whether the picker is in the upper position or not.
- If the picker is not in the upper position
a. The picker may have dropped or fallen off for some reason. Check the following.
• The picker has not dropped or become deformed.
• The cylinder is down.
• The picker has not collided with the panel or other item.
b. After confirming that the Y100 CLAMPER DOWN is off, push the picker to confirm
that it will raise.

Note: If the Y100 CLAMPER DOWN is on, acquire trace data.
c. Turn the machine main switch off.
d. Remove the head and check the following.
detect it.
e. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine
- If the picker is in the upper position
a. It is necessary to check the status of the pin clamper upper limit sensor.
• Check the position of the sensor and the dog.
detect it.
b. Turn the machine main switch off.
c. Remove the head and check the following.
detect it.
d. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine
Clearing picker upper limit errors from Accessory Software

When picker upper limit error guidance is displayed, the error cannot be cleared by pushing
READY ON without pulling forward the module. Depending on the status of the stopped
machine, pulling the module forward may be difficult. In this case, picker upper limit errors
can be cleared forcibly in Accessory Software.
Refer to " 7.11.19 Forcibly clearing errors " for details on how to clear picker upper limit
errors from Accessory Software.

Cautions
1. When dual lane production is being performed and a panel exists in only one lane (either
lane 1 or lane 2), the backup pin cannot be positioned or returned at the lane without a
panel. It is necessary to remove panels from both lanes before positioning or returning
backup pins.
2. When the job is changed from paired module production to single module production,
backup pins which have been positioned in areas that are accessible only during paired
module production cannot be returned to the stocker. Therefore, it is necessary to return
the pins to the stocker or to change the backup plates before changing the job. Also,
backup pins are automatically returned to the stocker when the automatic job
changeover function is being used.
3. When the panel position correction function is being used, do not position backup pins
at the panel edge detection area when creating the job.
4. When using felt paper, do not position backup pins on the felt paper when creating the
job.

4.12.13 Panel position correction function

When employing the panel stopping position correction function using the panel edge, the
panel edge is vision processed when the panel is loaded at the machine, and the stopping
position is then corrected to ensure uniform positioning of panels. This function is
particularly effective when using panels for which the stopping position may be unstable
due to the weight or shape of the panel.
Note: The panel position correctuin function is supported from NXT V3.11.
The following panel length (X-direction) limitations apply when using this function.
Panel stopping position function

compatible panel size
M3(S) single module production X-direction 250 mm or less
M3(S) pair module production X-direction 534 mm or less
M6(S) X-direction 534 mm or less
Larger panel sizes are supported from NXT V4.42. When using this function, the panel
edge check position must be within the possible placement area.
Panel size Large panel size (*1)

M3(S) single module production X-direction 250 mm or X-direction 305 mm or
less less
M3(S) pair module production X-direction 534 mm or -
less
M6(S) X-direction 534 mm or X-direction 610 mm or
less less
(*1)
When the panel X-size is in this size range, use the formula below for the module
type to be used to determine if the panel edge check position in the job can be used.
panel size X
M3(S) : -125 ( + panel stopping offset) - panel edge check position X 125
2
panel size X
M6(S) : -267 ( + panel stopping offset) - panel edge check position X 267
2
Possible placement area Panel edge check position
Support possible Support not possible 01SYS-0218E

Procedure for making panel positioning correction settings

1. Create a job with the settings to be used for the panel position correction function. Refer
to the NXT Programming Manual for details.
2. Specify the panel positioning correction settings from the [Loader Settings] category
from [Machine Configuration] in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0262E
• [Panel position correction function settings] : Select [Machine] or [Module].
• [Panel position correction] : Select [ON(F MARK] or [ON(PANEL EDGE)].

Attaching felt paper

When using the panel position correction function, the fiducial marks and the panel edge in
the module are vision processed. In order to detect the panel edge position, it is necessary
to attach felt paper for the conditions below.
• The background for the panel edge sequence extends beyond the edge of the
backup plate.
• Vision errors occur due to reflected light from items such as oil on the backup
plates.
• Vision errors occur because the brightness difference between the panel and
the backup plate is not stable due to the panel color.
For automatic backup pin compatible backup plates

M3(S): AA2WX00 M6(S): AA2WY00
AA2NS02 AA2MZ02
AA2MZ02
AA2NS02
AA2SG02
For manual backup pin compatible backup plates

M3(S): AA2WT01 M6(S): AA2WW01
AA2NS02
AA2SX01
AA2SW01 AA2SW01
AA2NS02
AA2SG02
The items noted above are for one lane. If two lanes are present
NXTBAS223E
then two sets of the above items will be required.
Note: Due to the attachment of felt paper to the backup plate, the dead space on the lower surface
of the panel becomes larger.
Lower surface 5 mm
dead space
Conveyance
direction
20 mm
(32 mm*)
NXTBAS224E
*The dead space for manual backup pin compatible backup plates is 32 mm.
Attach the felt paper to the backup plates according to the drawings below.

Attaching felt paper to the conveyor reference rails
AA2SG00 AA2NS02 AA2NS02
M3(S) module lane 1, 2 reference rails M6(S) module lane 1, 2 reference rails
Insert underneath the unclamp hook
Allen bolt M3x8

Spring washer 3M/M
Washer 1W-3
NXTBAS225E
Attaching felt paper to the automatic backup pin compatible backup plates
The underside of the felt paper brackets have magnets that allow the brackets to be
mounted to the backup plate.
Backup plate
Backup plate
AA2MZ02 AA2MZ02 AA2MZ02

M3(S) M6(S), M6SP NXTBAS226E

Attaching felt paper to the manual backup pin compatible backup plates
The taps for the manual backup pins are used to attach the felt paper brackets to the
backup plate.
Backup plate Backup plate
AA2SW01 AA2SW01 AA2SX01
M3(S) M6(S) NXTBAS227E
Area that automatic backup pins cannot be placed when using felt
paper.
When felt paper is affixed, it is not possible to place backup pins in the felt paper area. The
area that backup pins cannot be placed around the felt paper is shown below.
Area that backup pins

cannot be set.
(mm) 9
10
Felt paper
9
9 265 9
NXTBAS228aE

About related errors to the panel position correction function

Follow the procedures below when an error occurs for the panel position correction
function.
When the panel edge cannot be located.

The following guidance is displayed on the operation panel when the panel edge cannot be
located.
01SYS-0035a
b. Clean the felt paper for the specified lane and then push back the module.
Push MONITOR and check the image displayed. If the contrast between the panel and the
felt paper (background) is small, then modify the following and try again.
a. Change the contrast between the light and dark sections.
b. Narrow the scan area specified in the job.
Panel Background Panel Background
When the scan area is within the dotted lines,

the panel edge cannot be detected because
there is low contrast between the upper and
lower areas.
NXTOPE239E

When panel stopping position correction cannot correct the stopping position.
The module error stops and displays the error seek number 8E56 when the panel edge
position exceeds +/- 0.5 mm from the correct position after the panel stopping position
function has tried to correct the position two times. Follow the flowchart below to correct
the issue.
A panel stopping position

error occurs.
Is the panel edge displayed clearly Clean the conveyor belt and/or
in the image? adjust the conveyor belt tension.
Yes
No
Is some object in the background Is the bright object a backup pin?

brightly lit?
Yes
No
Is the panel edge in the Y-direction Yes

not straight?
Change the coordinates for the panel
Yes edge check position to a location in
which there are no backup pins located.
Change the coordinates for the panel
edge check position in the Y-direction
to a location that the panel edge in the No
No Y-direction is straight.
Acquire the image from the machine Clean the backup plate and ensure
and send it to your Fuji representative. that the felt paper is in the location
that is being checked.
01SYS-0175E

4.12.14 Checking for cracked nozzles

As parts pickup is unstable if the nozzle tip is cracked, the nozzle tip can now be checked
for cracks by using vision processing. If the nozzle tip is found to be cracked, the nozzle is
returned to the nozzle station and guidance displays.
Only the dia. 1.0 mm nozzle can be checked by this function.

Note: Checking for cracked nozzles is supported from NXT V3.11 to V4.30.
Procedure for when a cracked nozzle is detected

1. When a cracked nozzle is detected, guidance for pulling forward the module displays on
the operation panel.
01SYS-0036
2. Push OK and pull forward the module. The guidance on the screen changes.
3. Remove the nozzle station and check the nozzle. If the tip of the nozzle is cracked,
exchange the nozzle and set the new nozzle in the nozzle station. Return the nozzle
station and then push back the module.

4.12.15 Using a tray unit-LT/LTC

There are two magazines (an upper and lower) for setting trays in a tray unit-LT/LTC. There
are four basic production patterns that can be used depending on the job settings and tray
resupply mode, the number of tray parts being used and whether parts are supplied during
production.
Note: Refer to the NXT Programming Manual for information on making the job settings.
Joint magazine mode

With this mode, the two magazines are used as one magazine and it is possible to supply
up to 48 different tray parts. Operators resupply parts on trays by following the guidance
that is displayed when parts on a tray run out.
A B
C D
E F
A B G H
Magazine A C D I J
E F K L
G H
Magazine B I J
K L
1 2
Part A is being used Part G is being used
The upper and lower magazines are used to supply parts.

The magazine with the part to be used is moved and the part is supplied.
It is possible to set parts in 24 slots (48 subslots).
Tray parts are replenished to the magazine which ran out of parts.
01SYS-0327E
Alternate magazine mode

The same parts are set in both magazines and when parts run out in one magazine, the
parts from the other magazine are used. Operators resupply parts on trays by following the
guidance that is displayed when parts on a tray run out.
A B
C D
E F
A B A B A' B'
Magazine A C D C D C' D'
E F E F E' F'
A' B' A' B'

Magazine B C' D' C' D'
E' F' E' F'
1 2 3
Part A runs out Part A runs out Part A' from the other magazine is used
The same parts are set in both magazine A and B. Either magazine can be used to supply
parts. When parts run out, the magazine used is switched and production is continued.
At this time, replenish parts to the magazine which ran out of parts.
01SYS-0328Ea

Supplying parts from supply magazine mode

The same parts are set in both magazines and parts are picked up from upper magazine
and parts are resupplied from the lower magazine. Operators remove the drawer with the
empty trays from the drawer removal slot and then resupply parts on trays in a drawer by
following the guidance.
A A A A A' A'
Magazine A B B B B B B
A' A' A' A'

Magazine B B' B' B' B' B' B' Drawer
1 2 3 A A
removal slot
Part A is being used Part A runs out Part A' from magazine B is
moved
The same parts are set in both magazine A and B. Parts are only picked up from
magazine A for production. When parts run out, the drawer with the empty trays is
moved to the drawer removal slot in magazine B. Then the drawer with the matching
part types in magazine B is moved to magazine A and production is continued.
At this time, replenish parts to magazine B.
01SYS-0329E
Note: The diagrams show the supply from B magazine mode. It is also possible to use magazine
A as the supply magazine instead (and magazine B as the production magazine), by
specifying setting in the machine configuration settings with Accessory Software.
Changeover magazine mode

With this mode, the two magazines are used for different jobs. The magazine not being
used for the current job is prepared for the next job while producing the current job. This
makes it possible to shorten changeover time.
A B
Magazine A C D
E F
Magazine A A B G H
(Job 1) C D Magazine B A B
E F (Job 2) C D
Magazine B G H
(Job 2) A B
1 C D 2
It is possible to set trays in magazine B It is possible to set trays in magazine B
while magazine A is being used while magazine A is being used
During production, it is possible to perform changeover on the magazine not currently

being used. When jobs are changed, the other magazine is used and production is started.
During this time, it is possible to set up for production for the next job on the magazine
not being used.
01SYS-0330E

4.12.16 Supplying from supply magazine mode (Tray unit-LT/LTC)

Supply from supply magazine mode is one of the operation modes for the tray unit-LT/LTC.
For the other modes, when parts run out, the parts are replenished to the magazine on
which they ran out. With this mode, parts are usually replenished to the supply magazine
during production.
Specifying to use supply from supply magazine mode

1. Specify the following machine configuration settings in Accessory Software for the
machine to use this mode and to specify which magazine is the supply magazine.
a. [Fujitrax setting] category: Specify [OFF] for one of the following settings.
• [Use Verifier]
• [Tray unit-L/LT/LTC verification ON/OFF setting]
b. [Tray unit settings] category
• [Tray unit-LT/LTC resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine B] or [Part resupply

from magazine A]
c. [Alternate feeder (Alternate tray) change condition settings] category
• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]
2. Edit the job.
a. Change the status of the following feeder positions in both magazines (TULT /
TULTC) to [Reserve] in the machine configuration.
• For tray unit-LTs: 10-1 to 12-2
• For tray unit-LTCs: 11 to 12
b. Set the original trays in the production magazine (the one to be picked up from).
c. Optimize and then set the alternate trays in the supply magazine.
Note: Refer to the NXT Programming Manual for details.

Supplying tray parts

Refer to " 4.7 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LT " or " 4.8 Replenishing Trays on a Tray
Unit-LTC " for information on the guidance displayed and the procedures when supplying
trays parts using the supply from supply magazine mode. This section has explanations
about tray allocation in drawers.
Tray allocation (for tray unit-LT)

It is recommended to set the same tray parts in the subslots 1 and 2 of the same drawer in
order to decrease the occurrence of partial trays as much as possible.
Tray A Tray A
Magazine B, Slot 1
Tray A Tray A Magazine A, Slot 1
01SYS-0325E
Note: If different part trays are allocated to the same tray drawer, the tray drawer is replaced with
the tray drawer in magazine B when one of the part trays runs out. This results in the other
part tray being a partial tray.
Handling errors when using the supply from supply magazine mode
The section contains explanations and remedies for some errors that occur when using the
supply from B magazine mode.
When a drawer is present in the 'Reserved' slot of the magazine used for resupply
When tray parts are resupplied to the magazine used for resupply, the machine performs a
tray height check. During this time, error guidance displays when a drawer is detected at
any of the following slots.
• For tray unit-LTs: Slot 10, 11
• For tray unit-LTCs: Slot 11
01SYS 0326
a. Open the door for the magazine used for resupply and remove the drawer from the
slot indicated in the error screen.
b. If necessary, insert the removed tray drawer into the correct slot.
c. Close the door and then push READY ON to clear the error.

Caution points when using the supply from supply magazine mode
1. When a partial tray is present in an unloaded tray drawer at slot 12 of the supply
magazine and the tray drawer is inserted into the supply magazine after loading trays
for the parts that ran out, the pickup position must be specified for the partial tray. If the
pickup position for the partial tray is not specified, then pickup begins at the first (1,1)
position of the tray and a pickup error results.
2. When guidance is displayed to unload the empty tray drawer in the supply magazine, it
is not possible to push the supply complete button for the supply magazine. Remove
the tray drawer from slot 12 and then push OK. Then follow the guidance that is
displayed.
3. If a recovery limit is reached at the production magazine while trays are being supplied
to the supply magazine, tray resupply guidance for the production magazine is
displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen to resupply parts to the production
magazine to continue production.
4. If at least one slot at the supply magazine is not setup for production, the supply
complete button cannot be pushed.
5. When a device offset is specified for a slot in the production magazine, the specified
value is still used after changing the tray drawer. Furthermore, when a device offset is
specified for a slot in the supply magazine, the specified value is ignored.

4.12.17 About non stop parts resupply (Tray unit-L)

This function is used to minimize the production downtime due to resupplying trays to the
tray unit-L. When using this function, a parts out warning is issued for a drawer position
and replenishment parts are prepared and supplied (in the parts supply drawer) and when
the original parts run out, the parts are exchanged without stopping production.
In order to use the non stop parts supply function the optional items, Fujitrax Verifier (a
compatible version) and Kit Handy are required. Refer to the NXT Programming Manual
for details.
Note: Non stop parts resupply is supported from NXT V3.11.
Making machine configuration settings for non-stop parts supply

1. Specify non stop parts supply function from the [Fujitrax settings] category from [Module
Configuration] in Accessory Software.
• Select the [ON] option for [Use Verifier] .
• Select the [ON] option for [Perform tray verification].
• Select the [Use tray removal area] option for [Tray Supply] in the [Tray settings]
category or [Use supply drawer].
Using non stop tray resupply

For the procedures on resupplying trays for the tray unit-L and the guidance displayed, refer
to " 4.9 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-L ". The following is information about arranging
trays on drawers.
About tray arrangement

Fuji recommends arranging trays in a 1-tray-per-drawer format in order to ensure that trays
are used in an efficient manner (so trays that are still in use are not unloaded), and to
ensure that accurate part replenishment guidance messages are sent for resupplying parts.
Slot 1
Slot 2 Tray
Slot 3 A
B
C
Drawers
NXTOPE187E
Note: Although the figure above shows a 3-drawer tray arrangement, one more drawer is required
in actual operation in order to supply a tray to the part supply area when a parts out warning
(part supply guidance) occurs.
However, in the cases described on the next page, it is also possible to place 2 trays on a
single drawer. In this case, both trays (one in each subslot) must be verified by using a Kit
Handy when supplying the trays in the parts supply drawer.

When different tray parts are placed in a single drawer

When 2 different tray parts are placed in a single drawer, the tray that is still in use is
unloaded together with the tray for which the parts ran out. In this case, Kit Handy must be
used to specify the pickup position for the "still-in-use" tray when the drawer is set in the
parts supply drawer.
Tray Tray Drawer

A B
NXTOPE188E
When one of the trays in the drawer is an alternate tray

When one of the trays in the drawer is an alternate tray, the pickup operation shifts to that
tray when parts run out at the original tray without the drawer being changed. In addition,
a parts out warning is not displayed until the remaining count for parts in both of the trays
added together becomes low. When the low parts warning is displayed on Kit Handy,
prepare parts to resupply trays to both sides of the drawer at the same time.
Tray Tray Drawer

A A
NXTOPE189E

Regarding errors when using non stop tray resupply

This section contains explanations and remedies for some errors that occur during non-stop
tray resupply.
When there is an error for the supplied tray

Trays parts are set in the unit and a check is performed of the supplied parts. If there is a
mistake, guidance like the ones shown below are displayed. Check the error guidance and
correct the error for the set tray.
This displays when there is an error when This displays when the height of the set trays
checking the set parts (such as the wrong is outside of the possible range.
parts are set).
Check the following points.
Is the tray height higher than the possible range?
Does the tray height match that specified in the job?
Have the tray parts been properly set in the tray?
01SYS-0037E
Check the contents of the guidance and set the correct tray.
When a slot that a drawer is being returned to is occupied by another drawer.

Error guidance like that shown in the picture below is displayed when the intended slot for
parts supplied from the parts supply drawer is already occupied by another drawer.
There is a drawer in slot 1.
01SYS-0038E
a. Remove the supplied drawer from the parts supply drawer.
b. Open the door and check the parts in the drawer of the target position. If necessary,
correct the tray parts.
c. Close the door and push READY ON.

When there is an unknown drawer set in the parts supply drawer

Error guidance like that shown in the picture below is displayed when the used tray is to be
moved to the parts supply drawer but an unknown drawer is in the parts supply drawer.
01SYS-0039
a. Remove the drawer in the parts supply drawer.
b. Push READY ON.
Cautions
1. When changing to a different job while a drawer is present in Slot 21, use the panel
removal command from manual mode to unload the slot 21 drawer to the parts supply
drawer where it should then be removed.
Note: From NXT V3.51, it is no longer necessary to use the panel removal command to unload a
drawer in slot 21. This drawer is automatically unloaded when START is pushed.
2. If a height check error occurs for parts replenished to the parts supply drawer, the
drawer is returned to the parts supply drawer, but "SetOK" remains displayed on Kit
Handy. Check the tray height, and verify the parts again with Kit Handy.
3. A status mismatch may occur between the machine and Kit Handy if the following types
of job changes occur. When the main screen displays following a job change, perform
a verification check in accordance with the Kit Handy guidance messages to establish a
"Set OK" status.
Before Change After Change Return To Original Status

Job JOB A slot 1-1 JOB B slot 1-1 JOB A slot 1-1 used
used not used
NXT SET OK Not used Device comment mismatch
Kit Handy SET OK Not used Not checked
4. If the machine power is turned off after placing a verified drawer in the supply area, and
a drawer is present in Slot 21, both the verified drawer and the slot 21 drawer status are
cleared from the memory. In this case, use the panel removal command from manual
mode to unload the slot 21 drawer.
Note: From NXT V3.51, it is no longer necessary to use the panel removal command to unload a
drawer in slot 21. This drawer is automatically unloaded when START is pushed.
5. When the non-stop part supply function is used together with the feeder skip function,
do not skip tray parts in Slot 21. If a skip setting is accidentally specified for Slot 21, the
non-stop part supply function is disabled. In this case, use the panel removal command
from manual mode to unload the slot 21 drawer.

4.12.18 Device statistical warnings and error stop is supported

This displays warnings for positions that have an error rate that exceeds a specified value.
In addition, operation is stopped if the errors exceed another specified error value.
Note: Device statistical warnings and error stop is supported from NXT V3.21.
Procedure for making statistical warning and error settings

1. Specify the statistical warning and error settings in [Success Rate] from the header of
the Warnings screen.
01SYS-0261E
• Specify the desired success rate. It is possible to make settings for all lines,
individual lines, machines, modules, and slots. Refer to the Accessory Software
Operation Manual for details.
Displays when using statistical warnings and errors

When the error rate exceeds the specified value for the statistical warning rate, a warning
is displayed on the operation panel of the module in question. Furthermore, if the error rate
drops below the success warning rate value then the warning is automatically cleared.
Example
11
Feeder in slot 11
11
Indicates the slot for which the warning
was issued.
3-2
Tray unit-L, LT
Slot 3 - subslot 2
B-3
Tray unit-M
Position B - slot 3 01SYS-0145E
Note: The warning is cleared when a feeder is removed and reinserted as this is interpreted as
feeder maintenance having been performed.

The statistical error display

When the error rate exceeds the specified statistical error rate, the machine cycle stops.
When this occurs, error information is displayed on the operation panel like that shown
below. For the example below, check the feeder and perform actions on it to correct the
issue such as maintenance and set it back in the feeder pallet. After the error has been
cleared, the machine can restart production.
01SYS-0042E
Information
This displays the feeder position
and error rate.
Note: The warning is cleared when a feeder is removed and reinserted as this is interpreted as
feeder maintenance having been performed.

4.12.19 Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings

When using this function and the error rate for a nozzle exceeds a specified value then that
nozzle is skipped and not used in production. The nozzle specified to be skipped is then
scheduled to be changed for a good nozzle by the machine when panels are unloading and
loading, and production is continued. If there is no alternative nozzle, then the machine
stops with an error.
Note: Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings is supported from NXT V3.21.
Procedure for making settings to use the nozzle statistical skip

1. Specify the nozzle statistical warning settings from the [Statistical Nozzle error settings]
category from [Module Configuration] in Accessory Software.
• Select the [ON] option for [Change nozzle when an error occurs] to enable that
setting.
• Specify the number of times that an error is to occur for a statistical skip to be
decided in the [Error count to decide statistical nozzle errors] text box.
2. Set the spare nozzles in the nozzle station.
Operation when changing nozzles due to nozzle statistical warnings

When the setting to change nozzles due to nozzle statistical warnings is enabled, the
changeover display area changes as shown in the picture below.
Nozzle changes due to statistical warnings enabled

(This pictogram is also used when the simple periodic nozzle
changeover function is enabled.) 01SYS-0217E
Note: The operation panel does not change when using NXT application software V4.30 and
earlier.
After production is started, the machine calculates the nozzle check conditions. If there is
a nozzle that has reached or passed the specified nozzle error count, then that nozzle is
exchanged with a spare nozzle set in the nozzle station.
When this occurs, the background color of the pictogram in the changeover display area
changes to yellow. This informs the operator that there are nozzles in the nozzle station
that require maintenance.

Background color: yellow 01SYS-0208E
Note: The operation panel does not change when using NXT application software V4.30 and
earlier.
If there are any remaining spare nozzles in the nozzle station, then production is continued.
If there are nozzles with errors in the nozzle station, then stop the machine and perform the
following steps.
1. Remove the nozzles by using the eject nozzles manual command.

Note: Refer to 6.6.2 Ejecting nozzles for information on removing nozzles by using manual
commands.
2. Clean the nozzles.

Note: Refer to chapter 6. Preventive Maintenance in the NXT Mechanical Reference Manual for
information on cleaning nozzles.
Note: The background color turns yellow for nozzles requiring maintenance for the exchanged
nozzle code in changeover guidance and nozzle nickname in the manual command
information display. When cleaning, refer to this information.
R07-013-070
R07-013-070
Background color: yellow
3. Set the cleaned nozzles back in the nozzle station.
4. Set the nozzle station back in the module and push back the module.
5. Push START to restart production.

Clearing error stops

If there are no spare nozzles set in the nozzle station for the skipped nozzle to be
exchanged with, then the machine stops and displays an error like that shown below.
Perform maintenance on the nozzles or exchange the nozzles and then restart production.
01SYS-004


This allows trace data to be saved on the machine temporarily. When trouble occurs, it is
possible to reserve the trace data for the problem so it can be acquired later.
Note: Temporarily saving trace data on the machine is supported from NXT V3.21.
Procedure
This cannot be done during production. Perform the following procedures when the main
screen, waiting for a command screen, or an error screen is displayed.
1. Push and hold the CYCLE STOP button and push the STOP button on the operation
panel of the module in question.
01SYS-0047
Note: When trace data is being saved, the screen below is displayed and operations cannot be
performed on the module in question until the data is saved.
01SYS-0048a
2. When the screen changes back from the busy screen, the trace data has been saved.
Use Accessory Software to receive the trace data from the machine. Refer to "7.11.4
Acquiring trace data" in this manual for details.

4.12.21 Module conveyor support

A module conveyor is a module that is placed on a base and is used to convey panels. The
module conveyor is used to adjust lines when there are multiple lines or when the number
of modules in a line is changed to meet production needs and the line balance is changed.
Note: Module conveyors can be used from NXT V3.42.
Module conveyor Module conveyor

<M3(S)> <M6(S)>
NXTBAS248aE
The following items are required to use a module conveyor.
• Fuji Flexa V2.4.1 or higher (the "Fuji Flexa Module Conveyor Patch Disk for
NXT" is required)
• Fujitrax V3.05 or higher
• Module changing units
Setting a module conveyor in a line

Perform the following procedures to set a module conveyor in a line.
1. Use the nozzle exchange command from the manual mode exchange command to
return any nozzles set in the head of the module to be replaced to the nozzle station.
2. Use Fuji Flexa to delete any current jobs and any next jobs in the NXT.
3. Use the cleaning command from manual mode to unclamp the module to be replaced.
4. Turn off the main switch for the base with the module to be replaced.
5. Use a MCU (module change unit) to remove the module from the base and then set the
module conveyor on the base in the open position. Refer to the "NXT Module Conveyor
Instruction Manual" manual for details on how to perform this if required.
6. Turn on the main power switch for the base.
7. Change the default machine configuration in the line configuration (Line Editor) for the
line in which the module conveyor was set.
• When changing the default machine configuration, it is recommended to not

change the line name. If the line name is changed, refer to the "Caution points
when changing to a different line name" section for information.

• When using models names and the machine on which the module conveyor is
set has the same model name as a machine with no module conveyor. In this
case, it is necessary to change the model name used for the machine with the
module conveyor. To change the model name, change the status of the line
with the NXT to be changed from a "Real line" to a "Virtual line" and then delete
the machine with the module conveyor and then make a new machine using a
different model name and change the configuration for that machine to include
the module conveyor. Afterwards change the line status back to a "Real line".
(This is not necessary if there are no other machines sharing the same model
name.)
NXTOPE231E
• Click [Factory Lines] in Director and open the line with the machine to be
changed. Double-click the machine to be changed and then click [Model Default
Values] in the dialog box that is displayed.
NXTOPE232E
• Select the [Module] tab and then select the module to be changed into a module
conveyor and click the [...] button for that module and select the "M6-Conveyor"
option. If two M3(S) modules have been removed for an M6-conveyor, then
delete the extra M3(S) module that was removed. The default configuration
should now match that of the actual machine in modules.
Cancel
NXTOPE233E

8. Set the module conveyor in the line configuration in Fujitrax.
a. Start KIT Line Configuration, change the [Module Type] to [M6-Conveyor] at the
position where the module conveyor is installed.
NXTOPE234E
Note: When changing 2 M3(S) modules to an M6-Conveyor, right-click the extra module and then
delete it by selecting [Delete] to decrease the number of modules by one to match the actual
module configuration.
NXTOPE235E
b. After making the changes, reboot the Fuji Central Server computer.
9. Use the [Clamp module] command from [Remote operation] in Accessory Software to
clamp the module conveyor.
10.Turn the main switch off and then on for the base which has the module conveyor
installed.

11.Change the line configuration in the job to match the machine setup and then optimize
the job.
• Select the [Module] tab in the machine configuration and then select the module
to be changed into a module conveyor and click the [...] button for that module
and select the "M6-Conveyor" option. If two M3(S) modules have been
removed for an M6-conveyor, then delete the extra M3(S) module that was
removed. The configuration in the job should now match that of the actual
machine.
Cancel
NXTOPE233E
• After changing the machine configuration, optimize the job.
12.Transmit the job to the machine using Fuji Flexa.
13.Adjust the conveyor width of the module conveyor. (Use the handle to manually adjust
the width). For details refer to the "NXT Module Conveyor Instruction Manual".

Removing a module conveyor from a machine

Use the following procedure to remove a module conveyor from a machine on a line.
1. Use Fuji Flexa to delete any current jobs and any next jobs in the NXT.
2. Ensure that there are no panels inside the machine, especially the module conveyor.
3. Turn off the main power circuit protector on the module conveyor.
4. Use the [Unclamp module] command from [Remote operation] in Accessory Software to
unclamp the module conveyor.
Note: In Accessory Software, an error message (6808: seating sensor error) appears but ignore
this because this is not a problem.
5. Turn off the main power switch for the base.
6. Change the default machine configuration in the line configuration (Line Editor) for the
line from which the module conveyor was removed.
• Click [Factory Lines] in Director and open the line with the machine to be
changed. Double-click the machine to be changed and then click [Model Default
Values] in the dialog box that is displayed.
NXTOPE232E
• Select the [Module] tab and then select the module to be changed from a
module conveyor and click the [...] button for that module and select the
appropriate module option for the actual module to be set in that position. If two
M3(S) modules are to be used to replace an M6-conveyor, then add the extra
M3(S) module. The default configuration should now match that of the actual
machine in modules.

7. Remove the module conveyor and set the modules in the line configuration in Fujitrax.
a. Start KIT Line Configuration, change the [Module Type] from the [M6-Conveyor] to
the type of module that is installed.
Note: When changing an M6-Conveyor to 2 M3(S) modules, right-click on the module and then
add an extra module by selecting [Add Module] to increase the number of modules by one
to match the actual module configuration.
NXTOPE236E
b. Check the [Feeder Verification] settings.

Note: When changing the [Module Type] to a [M6-Conveyor], the setting for [Feeder Verification]
is automatically turned off. However, the setting for [Feeder Verification] remains off if this
setting is changed to a M3(S) or M6(S).
c. After making the changes, reboot the Fuji Central Server computer.
8. Use a MCU (module change unit) to remove the module conveyor from the base and
then set the placing module(s) on the base in the open position. Refer to the "NXT
Mechanical Reference Manual" manual for details if required.
9. Turn on the main power switch for the base.
10.Change the line configuration in the job to match the machine setup and then optimize
the job.
• Select the [Module] tab in the machine configuration in the job and then select
the module to be changed from a module conveyor and click the [...] button for
that module and select the appropriate module option for the actual module set
in that position. If two M3(S) modules are used to replace an M6-conveyor, then
add the extra M3(S) module. The machine configuration of the job should now
match that of the actual machine.
Cancel
NXTOPE237E
• After changing the machine configuration, optimize the job.
11.Transmit the job to the machine using Fuji Flexa.

Caution points when changing to a different line name

When adding or removing a module conveyor, it is necessary to change the default line
configuration. It is important to note the following points when using a different line name
and changing the status of a line from a real line to a virtual line.
1. Before changing a line to a virtual line from a real line, which was being used, production
data reports in line reporter should be created. Reports cannot be created after
changing the line into a virtual line.
2. If the line name in Fuji Flexa is different from the line name set in Fujitrax Kit Line
Configuration, the following functions cannot be used.
• External changeover
• Fujitrax Profiler reference designator collection

Placing a module conveyor between modules

Module conveyors must be positioned at the front or end of the machine. If a module
conveyor is placed between modules, the NXT machine must be divided into two machines
in the line and the module conveyor must be placed at the front or end of a machine.
Module conveyor
Base Base
Machine 1 Machine 2 NXTBAS249E
A module conveyor cannot be set between modules on the same base.
Cautions
1. When peripheral conveyors are set for the previous and next stage positions, the
peripheral conveyor on the side that the module conveyor is set must be an independent
type.
Peripheral conveyor (independent)

Peripheral conveyor
Module conveyor (independent or dependent)
NXTBAS250E
2. The following panel sizes can be conveyed.
• M6 conveyor : 534 mm or less in the X-direction.
• M3 conveyor : 305 mm or less in the X-direction.
3. When using the board skip function at the first module of a line with a module conveyor
at the front, a dialog box displays cautioning the user. However, if OK is pushed on the
operation panel, the screen changes to the screen at which board skip settings can be
entered.

4.12.22 Support for the automatic tray remover

When performing production with using stacked trays, empty trays are automatically
removed by the remover. This increases production efficiency because the machine is not
stopped to use parts from the next tray in the stack.
Note: The function to support automatic empty tray removal can be used from NXT V3.61.
Tray
Drawer
NXTMTU085E
The following items are required to automatically remove empty trays during production.
• Fuji Flexa V2.0.1 or later
• Fujitrax V3.08 or later (when using Fujitrax)
• A tray unit-L with the remover attached (option)
Remover
NXTMTU095E
Note:
1. It is necessary to remove empty trays by hand when not using a remover.
2. The remover can only be used with H01, H02 and OF heads.

Making settings
1. Open the job in Job Builder. Open the package data for the tray parts to be stacked.
Specify the correct setting for [Tray Type].
Remover
Setting Supply type Tray type Pickup cavity
used
Does not move
to next cavity
Matrix-Dump Stack Yes Matrix tray if pickup miss
occurs
Moves to next
cavity even Support
No Matrix-Dump Single/stack Yes Matrix tray if pickup miss pending
occurs
Moves to next
cavity even
RefNo
Cavity
Matrix
Info - Single/stack No Matrix tray if pickup miss
occurs
Does not move
Ref Cavity Info - to next cavity
Stack Yes Non-matrix tray
Dump if pickup miss
occurs
Moves to next
cavity even
Ref Cavity Info Single/stack No Non-matrix tray if pickup miss
occurs NXTMTU086E
2. Specify the tray remover settings from the [Operation settings for the tray remover]
category from [Machine Configuration] in Accessory Software.
NXTMTU087E
• Select the [Use] option for [Operation settings for the tray remover (stage 1)]
setting.

Correcting tray remover related errors

The following are instructions on tray remover errors that may occur and how to correct the
error.
When a remover fails to be picked up/returned or the remover drops.

Error guidance like the one shown below is displayed on the operation panel when the
remover is dropped from the head.
01SYS-0049
a. Open the side cover of the module and check the position of the remover. Ensure
that the remover and air hose is positioned so that there will be no damage when the
tray unit is pulled out of the module.
Warming
Before pulling out the tray unit from the module, open the side
cover to the module and check the position of the remover. Air
hose and cable damage can occur if the tray unit is pulled out of the
module with the remover still in the module area.
b. Push OK and the tray unit is unclamped.
c. Gently pull out the tray unit from the module.
d. Push the lever to open the claws that are used to hold the remover.
Lever
NXTMTU093E

e. Set the remover back in the unit. Move the lever back in order to have the claws lock
the remover in place.
Remover
Claws NXTMTU112E
f. Set the air hose for the remover to run down the middle of the remover station to
ensure that it does not interfere with anything.
Remover station
Air hose
NXTMTU103E
g. Remove any dropped trays by hand.
h. Push READY ON.
i. Reattach the tray unit by following the displayed guidance for reattaching the tray
unit.
j. The main screen is displayed once the tray unit is reattached.

When an empty tray fails to be picked up or is dropped

Error guidance like the one shown below is displayed on the operation panel when an
empty tray is dropped or cannot be picked up for some reason.
01SYS-0050
Warning
Damage can occur to the remover, air hose and cables if the tray
unit is removed with the remover still attached to the head. Be sure
to remove the remover from the head before pulling out the tray
unit.
a. Open the side cover of the module and remove the remover from the placing head.
The remover is attached to the head by vacuum.
When removing the remover, be sure to pull

Remover
the remover straight down while keeping it level.
If this is not done, then damage to the Head clamp
pins can occur. NXTMTU094
Caution: The remover is attached to the OF head by clampers. Evenly open the clampers by hand
and remove the remover.
Clamper
Remover
NXTMTU108E
b. Set the remover in a position on the tray unit so that there will be no damage when
the tray unit is pulled out of the module. In addition, be sure that the air hose is in a
safe position.

c. Push OK and the tray unit is unclamped.
d. Gently pull out the tray unit from the module.
e. Push the lever to open the claws that are used to hold the remover.
Lever
NXTMTU093E
f. Set the remover back in the unit. Move the lever back in order to have the claws lock
Remover
Claws NXTMTU112E
g. Set the air hose for the remover to run down the middle of the remover station to
Remover station
Air hose
NXTMTU103E
h. Remove any dropped trays by hand.
i. Push READY ON.
j. Reattach the tray unit by following the displayed guidance for reattaching the tray
unit.
k. The main screen is displayed once the tray unit is reattached.

If the remover cannot be located

Error guidance like the one shown below is displayed on the operation panel when the
remover cannot be located.
01SYS-0051
Warning
Before pulling out the tray unit from the module, open the side
cover to the module and check the position of the remover. Air
hose and cable damage can occur if the tray unit is pulled out of the
module with the remover still in the module area.
a. Open the side cover of the module and check the position of the remover. Ensure
that the remover and air hose is positioned so that there will be no damage when the
tray unit is pulled out of the module.
b. Push OK and the tray unit is unclamped.
c. Gently pull out the tray unit from the module.
d. Push the lever to open the claws that are used to hold the remover.
Lever
NXTMTU093E

e. Set the remover back in the unit. Move the lever back in order to have the claws lock
Remover
Claws NXTMTU112E
f. Set the air hose for the remover to run down the middle of the remover station to
Remover station
Air hose
NXTMTU103E
g. Remove any dropped trays by hand.
h. Push READY ON.
i. Reattach the tray unit by following the displayed guidance for reattaching the tray
unit.
j. The main screen is displayed once the tray unit is reattached.

Cautions
1. Empty trays are not removed by the tray remover when "Pickup Tray” is specified for the
parts reject location regardless of the setting for the tray in question.
2. Set any tray that is not completely full as the top tray in the tray stack.
3. When adding new full trays, add the new trays to the bottom of the tray stack.
4. When the last tray in the stack is emptied, the operator must remove this tray.
5. Do not remove empty trays from the machine when EMERGENCY STOP or a similar
operation has been performed and the drawer containing the empty trays has stopped
in an advanced position. The machine cannot detect that the tray has been removed
using this method. If this method is used and a full tray is placed back in the drawer, the
full tray will be unloaded. If trays must be removed using this method, remove the tray
unit from the machine and then remove the trays.
6. There are three types of removers, type 0, type 1, and type 2. Confirm the remover type
being used by checking the manual command information screen.
Type 0 Type 1 Type 2
Head
Type 0 H01, OF
Type 1 H01, OF
Type 2 H01, H02, OF
01SYS-0278bE

4.12.23 Performing dual production with different width panels

On machines equipped with double conveyors, it is possible to perform dual lane production
and single lane production depending on the size of the panel. It is also possible to perform
dual lane production with different panel sizes for lane 1 and lane 2. Specify the lane width
for the target lanes and then perform production.
Note: It is possible to perform dual lane production with different width panels from NXT V3.70.
Lane 2 Panel B
Lane 1 Panel A
A+B is 560 mm or less
01SYS-0167E
Note: It is necessary that the total width of the backup frame sizes for lane 1 and lane 2 are 560
mm or less. The panel sizes that can be produced then are restricted based upon this
limitation.
This function is recommended for use when the conditions below are present.
a. Dual lane production is performed but it is desired to occasionally produce panels

wider than 281 mm.
b. Panels wider than 281 mm are being produced (single lane production) but it is
desired to produce small panels in the extra lane.
Procedure
1. Specify the panel conveyance settings in Accessory Software.
NXTOPE264E
• Specify the maximum width for the panels for lane 1 in the [Maximum panel
width for lane 1] setting.
• Specify the maximum width for the panels for lane 2 in the [Maximum panel
width for lane 2] setting.
2. Transmit the jobs to the machine from Fuji Flexa. Lanes 1 and 2 require jobs.
Exchange backup plates

It is necessary to exchange the backup frames and plates to match that required for the
jobs. Refer to sections " 5.9.2 Removing and attaching backup plates " for details.

4.12.24 Support for specifying the conveyor lane pitch

During dual production, lane 2 is normally brought forward for panel conveyance. However,
it is possible to specify an optional position for the reference rail for lane 2 if it is desired to
not move it forward due to circumstances at the previous and next stages.
Note: The conveyor pitch setting can be used from NXT V3.70.
Lane 2
Lane 1 Lane pitch
01SYS-0168E
Note: It is not possible to perform single lane production using just lane 2.
Specifying the lane pitch

1. Specify the panel conveyance settings from the [Loader settings] category from [Module
NXTOPE267E
• Select the [Use the Lane Pitch Value] option for the [Lane Pitch Setting].
• In the newly displayed [Lane Pitch Value] setting, specify the distance between
the reference rail for lane 1 to the reference rail for lane 2.
Note:
1. Do not specify anything in the [Custom Pitch Setting].
2. Specify a value larger than the [Maximum panel width for lane 1] setting + 47 mm. In
addition, the [Lane Pitch Value] setting + [Maximum panel width for lane 2] setting must
be 607 mm or less.

4.12.25 Duplicate IP address detection function

An error screen is displayed when the IP address for the NXT is the same as the IP address
for another machine on the network. If the NXT is currently performing production, a cycle
stop will occur. The following information is displayed on the error screen.
Note: The duplicate IP address function can be used from NXT V3.90.
The duplicate IP address of the machine is displayed.
M/C: Displays the MAC address of this machine.

???: Displays the MAC address of the duplicate IP address. 01SYS-0180Ea
Perform the following actions if the duplicate IP address error screen displays.
a. Call a network administrator.
b. Refer to the information on the screen and change either the IP address for the NXT
or the IP address at the other machine.
c. After clearing the error, turn the machine on and off using the main switch located at
the front of the base.

4.12.26 Free allocation function

The free allocation function is a function in which production can be started after feeders
have been inserted in slots other than the slots specified in the job. However, the feeder
must still be inserted in the same module as that specified in the job. This function reduces
the amount of time required when exchanging feeders.
Note: The free allocation function can be used from NXT V4.10.
The items listed below are required to use the free allocation function.
• Fujitrax V3.30 and later: Fujitrax Verifier, License for the free allocation function.
Procedure for making free allocation function settings

Enable the free allocation function in Kit Line Configuration setting. For details, refer to
section "19. Feeder Free Allocation Function" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
In the Machine Configuration section of Accessory Software, select [Fujitrax Setting] from
the category list, and specify [V3.30] for [Use Version].
Restrictions
The free allocation function cannot be used together with the dynamic alternate feeder
function.

4.12.27 Panel unloading order

When performing dual lane production, it is now possible to select the order in which panels
are unloaded to the next machine from lane 1 and lane 2. The two orders that can be
selected are shown below.
• Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced
• Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded
The default setting is [Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced]. Panels loaded
to each lane are unloaded in the order they complete production. If production stops at one
lane due to parts out or a similar reason, production will continue in the other lane without
maintaining line balance.
Specifying [Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded] for this setting maintains line
balance between lane 1 and lane 2 because panels are unloaded in the same order as they
entered the machine.
Specify the panel unloading order that best suits your production line.
Note: This function is supported from NXT V4.20 and using this function for paired module
production is supported from NXT V4.30.
2 4
Panel B Lane 2
1 3
Panel A Lane 1
Example: Specifying the setting [Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded]
Panel A is loaded to lane 1, completes production and is then unloaded
before panel B. Even if parts run out and production stops at lane 1 and
moves to lane 2, panel A is still unloaded before panel B because production
resumes at lane 1 after parts are resupplied to lane 1. (Panel B waits to be
unloaded from lane 2 even when it has completed production). 01SYS-0197E
Procedure for specifying the panel unloading order

1. Specify the panel conveyance settings from the [Loader settings] category from [Module
01SYS-0198E
• [Panel unloading order] : Select the panel unloading order.

Note: The default setting is [Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced]. The setting
[Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded] can also be used at modules using pass
mode or breakdown mode.

Operation features
The different features of each of setting is shown in the following table.
Specified value
Operation Panels are unloaded in the Panels are unloaded in the order
order they are produced they are loaded
Lane change When panel A enters the When panel A enters the machine
between PP machine at lane 1 and parts run at lane 1 and parts run out for that
(pick and out for that panel, production panel, production switches to lane
place) cycles switches to lane 2. 2.
After parts are resupplied at After parts are resupplied at lane 1,
lane 1, production does not production stops at panel B in lane
switch back to lane 1 until parts 2 between PP cycles and then
run out or production is switches back to panel A in lane 1.
complete at panel B in lane 2.
Wait for first-in, Panels are unloaded in the Panels are unloaded in the same
first-out order they are produced. order they enter the machine.
unloading
Even if panel B is completed, it can
not be unloaded until panel A is
unloaded first.
Available Dual lane production with the Dual lane production with different
production same job names. job names.
types
To produce using only one lane

Load panels only into the lane which is being used for production.
The setting [Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced] is not for conveying panels
simultaneously or alternately for lanes 1 and 2. When this setting is selected, the panel
which is first to be loaded is also first to be unloaded.
Accordingly, if a panels are loaded into lane 1 only, then production can only be performed
at lane 1.
When the inventory is exhausted for a part being used by one of the
lanes during production
When the parts inventory has been completly used for one of the lanes during production,
production cannot be continued. Furthermore, production will also stop at the other lane.
When this situation occurs, use one of the methods listed below to restart production.
Remove panels from the lane at which parts inventory is exhausted

1. Use the panel removal command from manual mode to remove all panels in the line
from the lane at which parts inventory is exhausted.
2. Restart production. Production continues only at the lane which has the parts necessary
for production.
Skip the feeder supplying the parts for which inventory is exhausted
1. Use MEdit to skip the feeder supplying the parts for which inventory is exhausted.
2. Restart production. Production continues, but the parts for which inventory is exhausted
are not placed.

3. After the inventory of parts has been replenished, place the parts which were skipped
by hand or other appropriate method.

4.12.28 Interval stop function

When using this function, the number of panels to be produced in one interval is specified
before production is started. After production is started, a cycle stop occurs automatically
when the number of panels produced reaches the specified number. This function is useful
to ensure regular maintenance of equipment such as the dip flux unit or GL head.
Note: The Interval stop function can be used from NXT V4.30.
Setting the interval stop

1. Specify the interval stop settings from the [Interval stop] category from [Module
Note:
1. The panel count that exists before specifying interval stop settings is cleared when the
procedures above are performed.
2. When performing paired production, specify interval settings only for the first module in
the pair. (The first module in the pair differs depending on the direction of panel flow.)
01SYS-0199E
• [Panel Quantity] item: "0" to "9999"
• [Stop Message] item: Use alpha-numeric characters when entering the stop
message.
Note: The following characters can be used: A to Z, 0 to 9, "_" (Underscore), "." (Period), "-"
(Hyphen). From 1 to 30 characters can be input for the message.
Guidance for starting and stopping the interval stop function

When settings for interval stop have been performed, the main screen is displayed at the
machine operation panels as shown below.
0 / 5
Panel count / interval stop panel quantity 01SYS-0200E

When production is started, the displayed panel count increases each time a panel is
loaded into the machine.
The machine automatically stops when the specified interval stop panel quantity has been
reached and the last panel is unloaded from the machine. At this point, the interval stop
guidance shown below is displayed at the operation panel of the machine.
The [Stop Message] specified at the module

configuration settings screen.
(Use this area to display the purpose of the
interval stop. For example, a message could
be displayed telling the operator to clean the
dip flux unit or perform other maintenance.)
01SYS-0201E
After the interval stop, perform the necessary maintenance or action, and then push
READY ON. The main screen is displayed and the panel count is displayed as "0".
Note: It is possible to use manual mode to clear the panel count before the interval stop panel
quantity is reached. For details, refer to section " 6.3.3 Clearing the number of panels
loaded ".
Cautions
1. When the interval stop function and the automatic changeover function are being used
together and the stop timing for the two functions occurs at the same time, priority is
given to automatic changeover (automatic changeover guidance is displayed first). After
START is pushed to restart production, an interval stop occurs.
2. When STOP is pushed at the same time that the interval stop panel quantity is reached,
priority is given to the STOP command (the main screen is displayed). After START is
pushed to restart production, an interval stop occurs.
3. If, in addition to the cases listed above in 1 and 2, an error also simultaneously occurs,
priority is give to the error (error guidance is displayed first). After production is restarted,
an interval stop occurs. Then, when production is restarted for a second time, guidance
for automatic changeover or for when after STOP is pushed.
4. When producing using paired modules and an interval stop occurs in a situation like one
of the three cases listed above, there are cases when one of the modules in the pair
does not stop. In this case, push CYCLE STOP.
5. When producing using dual lanes, the interval stop occurs after panels have been
unloaded from both lanes.
6. When producing using dual lanes and two panels are conveyed simultaneously at both
of the lanes, there are cases when the number of panels produced is one greater than
the number specified for the interval stop panel count.

4.12.29 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function

This function automatically changes the nozzles being used after the number of panels
being produced reaches a value that was specified before starting production. The nozzles
are exchanged automatically during production with the same type of nozzles that were set
in the nozzle station prior to starting production.
The production and maintenance rate is improved because this function helps prevent the
use of dirty nozzles.
Note: The Simple Periodic Nozzle Changeover Function can be used from NXT V4.43.
Procedure for making settings to use simple periodic nozzle

changeover
1. Specify the simple periodic nozzle changeover settings for modules in Accessory
Software.
01SYS-0206E
• [Number of panels at which to perform changeover] : The possible range is from

0 to 99,999 panels.
2. Set several sets of the nozzles to be used in the nozzle station.

Note: The H08 , H12(S) and H12HS head nozzle station can hold up to a maximum of 32 nozzles.
Based on this, 4 sets of nozzles can be prepared in advance for the H08 head, and 2 sets
for the H12(S) and H12HS head.
Operation when using simple periodic nozzle changeover

When using the simple periodic nozzle changeover function, the changeover display area
changes as shown in the picture below.
Simple periodic nozzle changeover enabled

(This pictogram is also used when the nozzle statistical
warning function is enabled.) 01SYS-0207E
When the machine has produced the number of panels specified for this setting, the
nozzles on the head are exchanged with the spare nozzles set in the nozzle station.

When this occurs, the background color of the pictogram in the changeover display area
changes to yellow. This informs the operator that there are nozzles in the nozzle station
that require maintenance.
If there are any remaining spare nozzles in the nozzle station, then production is continued.
When you want to clean the nozzles, stop the machine and perform the following steps.
1. Remove the nozzles by using the eject nozzles manual command.

Note: Refer to " 6.6.2 Ejecting nozzles " for information on removing nozzles by using manual
commands.
2. Clean the nozzles.

Note: Refer to chapter 6. Preventive Maintenance in the NXT Mechanical Reference Manual for
information on cleaning nozzles.
Note: The background color turns yellow for nozzles requiring maintenance for the exchanged
nozzle code in changeover guidance and nozzle nickname in the manual command
information display. When cleaning, refer to this information.
R07-013-070
R07-013-070
Background color: yellow
3. Set the nozzle station back in the module and push back the module.

4. After cleaning the nozzles, use the remote operation command [Complete nozzle
maintenance] in Accessory Software for the modules on which the nozzles were
cleaned.
01SYS-0209aE
5. Push START to restart production.

Note: When this command is performed, the current quantity of produced panels being tracked
for this function is changed to "0".
Cautions
1. There are cases in which simple periodic nozzle exchange cannot be performed based
on the production pattern being used even though this setting is enabled. Consider the
following items when specifying machine settings.
Production Pattern Caution

Production in which different Do not enable this function.
nozzles are used on each lane
Only the nozzles currently attached to heads
are exchanged when the simple periodic
nozzle changeover quantity is reached.
Production in which nozzle Do not enable this function.
changeover is performed during
production of a single panel Only the nozzles currently attached to heads
are exchanged when the simple periodic
nozzle changeover quantity is reached.
Production in which jobs are The production quantity count is continued
changed frequently and the nozzle even when jobs are changed. However, do
sizes change each time not use this function on modules on which the
nozzles are changed if the job is changed.
Combined use with nozzle When using the nozzle statistical error
statistical error function function, the machine switches to spare
nozzles upon the occurrence of a statistical
nozzle error. As a result, there may be
insufficient nozzles for simple periodic nozzle
changeover. When this happens, an
insufficient replacement nozzles error occurs.
2. The [Complete nozzle maintenance] remote command is only for the nozzles in the
nozzle station. It is not for nozzles that are currently on the head.
3. A nozzle bend (chipping, dirt) check is performed for nozzles 1.0 mm and smaller when
changing nozzles. If a vision processing error occurs at this time, an error stop occurs
without replacing any error nozzles.

4.12.30 Backup pin allocation check function

This function is used by the operator to check the positioning of backup pins. When a
module is in backup pin allocation check mode, the panel is loaded and clamped by the
machine and then guidance for checking the backup pin positioning is displayed.
From this point, the operator pulls forward the module to check the backup pin positions.
Note: The Backup Pin Allocation Check Function can be used from NXT V4.52.
When using this function a plate (transparent or semi-transparent) that is the same size as
the panel is required.
Procedure to change to backup pin allocation check mode

1. Change to backup pin allocation mode from [Remote operation] in Accessory Software.
a. Click [Check backup pin position].
01SYS-0224E
b. Select the lane and then click [Start].
01SYS-0225E
Note: If you desire to change back to normal operation mode after changing the mode without
checking the backup pin positions, select [Production mode] in [Remote Operation] and the
click [Operation Mode] and then click [Start].

Using backup pin allocation check mode

In advance prepare a plate (transparent or semi-transparent) that is the same size as the
panel. Put the plate on the panel so you can see the layout of the panel and then mark the
backup pin positions on the plate. When the module is in backup pin allocation check
mode, the plate is to be clamped to check the positioning of the backup pins.
Plate
01SYS-0252E
When the module is changed to backup pin allocation check mode, the operation panel
changes to display guidance to push START with the backup pin allocation pictogram. In
addition, the panel loaded indicator area background color changes to yellow for the
specified lanes.
Panel loaded area (yellow)

In backup pin allocation check mode 01SYS-0219E
Check the display and then perform the follow steps.
1. Push START.
Note: When checking modules other than the first module, use manual commands to load the
plate before pushing START.
2. The module becomes ready to load a panel. Load the prepared plate.
Note: When using dual lane conveyance, first load the plate for lane 1 and then load for lane 2.

3. The plate is loaded and clamped and then module stops and displays guidance for
checking the backup pin positions. Push OK and then gently pull forward the module.
01SYS-0220Ea
4. Check the positions of the backup pins. Correct the positioning of any backup pins for
which the backup pin position does not match the mark on the plate.
5. Once the positioning of the backup pins is completed, push back the module on the
base.
6. Guidance for unloading the panel is displayed on the operation panel. Push START.
Note: If the next module cannot be changed to backup pin allocation mode, then use the manual
commands to remove the plate from the module before pushing START.
01SYS-0221E
7. The next module changes to backup pin allocation mode. Push START on this module.
01SYS-0222E

8. The plate is loaded in the next module and then backup pin allocation check guidance
is displayed. Push OK and pull forward the module.
Note: The backup pin allocation mode for the module the plate was unloaded from is
automatically cleared.
01SYS-0223Ea
9. Check the positioning of the backup pins. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedures
from this point until the last module is reached.
10.The plate is not unloaded from the last module and the module stops. Use manual
commands to remove the plate from the module.
Cautions
1. If the [Operation Mode] is set to any setting other than [Production mode] in Accessory
Software, then the backup pin position check cannot be used.
2. Turning off the machine does not clear the backup pin allocation check mode. To clear
this mode, select [Production mode] in [Remote Operation] and then click [Operation
Mode] and then click [Start] in Accessory Software.
3. During paired module production, push START at the first paired module. Then after the
mode has been set for the second paired module, push START at the second paired
module.
4. When using the panel stopping position correction function based on fiducial marks or
the panel edge to correct the position at which the panel stops, prepare the plate so that
it can be used with this function.
5. When using a Profiler FLP unit, do not load the plate using the conveyor before the first
module. Use manual commands to load the plate.
6. When using vacuum backup pins, turn the vacuum backup pin function off temporarily
or turn off the vacuum through I/O Monitor.
7. When the tray unit is removed from a module with a single conveyor S and
EMERGENCY STOP is pushed during operation, the conveyor clamp lowers. Ensure
that the panel does not move out of position at this time.
8. When using seamless production during times such as automatic changeover, the next
module may not have the same job as the current module. If this happens, change the
job at the next module so that it matches.

4.12.31 Nozzle changeover error detection function

This function displays guidance for clearing errors that occur when problems are detected
during nozzle changeover.
When an error occurs during nozzle changeover, the head may stop in a position where it
collides with the nozzle station. The error cannot be cleared until maintenance personnel
checks inside the machine.
Note: The function to detect errors during nozzle changeover is supported from NXT 5.11.
Clearing nozzle changeover errors

The guidance applies to the following errors.
Error code Contents

93F40000 Z, Q, R-axis error during nozzle changeover.
93FF0000 Nozzle station shutter open/close timeout
8F540000 After returning the nozzle, it remained on the head.
8F590000 After picking up the nozzle, no nozzle was detected.
Clearing errors when using H01 and H02 heads
01SYS-0338E
a. Push OK and pull forward the module.
b. Check the contents and countermeasure for the error in Accessory Software and
perform the necessary actions.
c. Confirm that no nozzles fell inside the machine. If any nozzles fell, remove the nozzle
station and set them in it.
d. Push back the module.

Clearing errors when using H04, H08, H12(S) and H12HS heads
01SYS-0339E
Note: The guidance is the same for G04 and OF heads.
a. Push OK and pull forward the module.
b. Check the contents and countermeasure for the error in Accessory Software and
perform the necessary actions.
c. Check the Z-axis of the head. If the Z-axis is down, raise it by hand.
d. Remove the nozzle station. If any nozzles fell, set them in the nozzle station.
e. Set the nozzle station.
f. Push back the module.
Clearing nozzle changeover errors in Accessory Software

When nozzle changeover error guidance is displayed, errors cannot be cleared by pushing
READY ON without pulling forward the module. Depending on the status of the stopped
machine, pulling the module forward may be difficult. In this case, nozzle changeover
errors can be cleared forcibly in Accessory Software.
Refer to " 7.11.19 Forcibly clearing errors " for details on how to clear picker upper limit
errors from Accessory Software.
Caution points
1. Upon restarting the machine, [A nozzle that cannot be returned to the nozzle station is
mounted on the holder] or [Dropped nozzle error] errors may occur.
2. If power to the machine is turned off while nozzle changeover error guidance is being
displayed, after the machine is restarted, be sure to inspect inside the machine and
confirm that the head and nozzle station will not collide.

QD006-25 5. Performing Changeover
5. Performing Changeover
5.1 Changeover Items
The machine automatically determines whether or not changeover operations necessary
for production are required and whether they have been performed yet. When the machine
is turned on and START is pushed, calibration will begin. If changeover is necessary, the
changeover guidance screen will display.
Head exchange
Backup plate exchange
Nozzle exchange
Feeder pallet exchange
Feeder parts exchange
Tray parts exchange (tray unit-L)
Tray parts exchange (tray unit-LT)
Tray parts exchange (tray unit-LTC㧕
Tray parts exchange (tray unit-M)
01SYS-0105Ec
Perform changeover by following the procedures displayed. When more than one
changeover operations is required, the guidance screen for the next changeover operation
is displayed once procedures for the current changeover operation are complete.
When all changeover operations have been completed, the machine returns to the main
screen.

5. Performing Changeover QD006-25
5.2 Selecting Changeover Items

If changeover is necessary, the changeover guidance screen is automatically displayed
after calibration is performed. However, it is also possible for the operator to manually
display the changeover guidance screen and select changeover operations.
In this case, the changeover guidance screen can be displayed by pushing OK when the
machine is at the main screen. Push CANCEL at the changeover guidance screen to return
to the main screen.
Main screen (waiting for START to be pushed) Changeover guidance screen
OK
CANCEL
01SYS-0104E
5.2.1 Changeover guidance screen

Feeder pallet replacement Backup plate replacement
Job changeover Head replacement
Nozzle replacement Tray replacement

Feeder replacement 01SYS-0103E
Note:
1. Menu items which cannot be selected are displayed with a dark grey background.
2. Job changeover can only be performed when selected at the changeover guidance
screen.

5.2.2 Using the Changeover Guidance Screen

1. At the main screen, push OK to display the changeover guidance screen.
2. Use the arrow keys to select menu items. The currently selected item is displayed with
a green background.
Menu
Arrow keys
01SYS-0106E
Note: Menu items which cannot be selected are displayed with a dark grey background.
3. Push OK. If changeover is required for the currently selected menu item, guidance is
displayed for that item. If changeover is not required for the currently selected menu
item, an information screen showing the current status of that item is displayed.
Changeover guidance screen Information screen

2
01SYS-0107E
Note:
1. The example screens shown above are for the nozzle replacement menu item.
2. Push CANCEL to return to the main screen.

5.3 Changing the Job

In order to change the current job, another job must have already been sent to the
background of the machine. For details on sending a job to the machine, refer to the NXT
Programming Manual.
5.3.1 Job changeover guidance
Job changeover
and cancel pictograms
Name of the background job
01SYS-0108E
• Use the arrow keys to select the job changeover pictogram or cancel pictogram.
• The name of the background job for lane 1 is displayed in the lower row. The
name of the background job for lane 2 is displayed in the upper row.
5.3.2 Job changeover procedures

1. At the main screen, push OK to display the changeover guidance screen at the
operation panel.
2. Select the job changeover pictogram and push OK.
01SYS-0109

3. Job changeover guidance is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the job changeover
pictogram and push OK.
01SYS-0110
4. The job in the background is changed to the foreground.
2006_NXT_M336_H0881_TrayL T Test 0
2006_NXT_M336_H0881_TrayL T Test
01SYS-0111

5.4 Replacing Feeders

5.4.1 Feeder replacement guidance screen
It is possible to switch the display between the feeder setup guidance and the feeder
allocation list by pressing [OK].
Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
Feeder setup guidance 01SYS-0054E
Slot information
Slot number
Pitch
Tape width
Device comment
Feeder allocation list 01SYS-0055E
Slot information shows the slot numbers at which feeders must be set and other information
such as device comment.
Priority is given to the following items for feeder setup guidance.
• Feeders for which production is not possible are given priority as the next group.
• Original feeders are given priority over alternate feeders.
• Guidance is given for feeders in ascending slot number order for feeders with
the same conditions.
The feeder allocation list enables the operator to determine where to set the prepared
feeders. All feeders used in production can be referenced. Use the up and down keys to
scroll through the feeder list.
Note: Perform feeder replacement while checking the guidance screen. Feeders can also be
replaced during production. In addition, the instructions provided here are for removing
tape feeders but the procedure for removing stick feeders is basically the same.

5.4.2 Removing and attaching feeders

When using Fujitrax Verifier, it is necessary to create a relationship between the feeder and
the parts reel. For details, refer to section “7.4 Creating Relationships Between Feeders
and Reels” in the NXT Programming Manual.
1. The feeders that need to be replaced or checked are located in the slot positions where
the LEDs on the front cover are red. Locate the feeder with a red LED and if the feeder
needs to be replaced, pull up on the clamp lever as shown in the picture below to raise
the feeder clamper and disconnect the feeder power.
Note: For feeders that do not need to be replaced because they already have the correct part and
are positioned correctly, just push the set button for that position to clear the red LED for
that slot.
2. With the clamper raised and keeping the feeder level, slide the feeder backwards to
remove.
Slot No.
LED
Clamp lever
NXTOPE025Eb
Note: When removing feeders, it is essential that the clamp lever is raised all of the way and kept
be damaged.
3. Firmly grip the handle of the pulled back feeder and pull it out of the machine to remove
it.
Caution: Be sure to firmly grip the handle to prevent the feeder from being dropped.
NXTOPE157b

4. Put the correct part on the feeder or use a new feeder already loaded with the correct
part. Place the feeder guide into the slot on the feeder pallet.
NXTOPE022b
CAUTION
Ensure that the guide at the base of the feeder is inserted into the
slot. If it is not inserted correctly, there is the danger of the feeder
colliding with the placing head.
Guide
Slot 01NST-0379
5. Slide the feeder forward in the slot on the feeder pallet.
NXTOPE023a

6. Pull the clamp lever up as shown in the picture below to raise the clamper and then slide
the feeder fully into position until the connector at the tip of the feeder is inserted in the
connector on the feeder pallet
Connector
(Machine side)
Connector
Clamper (Feeder side)
Clamp lever
NXTOPE024Ea
7. Lower the clamp lever when the feeder is fully inserted to lower the clamper and lock the
feeder. When the lever is lowered the feeder power should come on and the “PWR”
LED on the operation panel for the feeder is turned on.
Clamper
Clamp lever
NXTOPE026Ea
Note: If the feeder is fully inserted but not properly locked, the sensor on the clamper will not allow
power to be restored and the PWR LED will not come on. In this condition, the feeder
cannot be used.

8. When using W8 feeders with 7 inch reel holders, ensure that the reel holders of every
second feeder are extended downwards. It does not matter whether the reel holders of
odd-numbered slots or even-numbered slots are extended downwards.
W8 feeder
W8 feeder
01NST-0290
Reel holder
9. When the feeder is set in position, press the set button for the number of that slot and if
the feeder is the correct type with the right pitch and set properly, the set LED will turn
green.
Slot no. 14 15 16
Set button
NXTOPE011
Note: The operation above is not necessary when Fujitrax Verifier is used.
After the feeder has been set and the set button has been pushed, information for the
feeder is displayed at the feeder set guidance. If the set button is pushed again, information
for the feeder is cleared.
Set information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Tape width
Device comment
01SYS-0112E

5.4.3 Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC

On a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC, if parts for feeders and trays must be supplied at the
same time, the guidance for supplying tray parts is displayed first.
When tray parts supply is completed or if the left arrow button is pushed, the guidance for
supplying feeder parts is displayed.
Tray parts supply guidance Feeder set guidance
Replenishment for both magazines completed

or left arrow button pushed. 01SYS-0312E
If tray supply is completed for one magazine and production can be performed, a pictogram
to indicate that feeder supply should be performed first is displayed. Push the left arrow
button to display the feeder supply guidance.
Guidance pictogram to supply feeder parts first Feeder set guidance
Push the left arrow button. 01SYS-0313E
If the left arrow button is pushed when the feeder supply guidance is displayed, the
guidance for supplying trays is displayed again.
The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the
feeders into the feeder slots for the tray unit-LT/LTC.
Note: After setting feeders, if the tray unit-LT/LTC is removed from the module, feeders are also
removed from the module at the same time because they are attached to the tray unit-LT/
LTC. Due to this, it is necessary to push the feeder set OK buttons for the feeders set on
the module after the tray unit-LT/LTC is set back into the module (when verification is not
being used).

5.4.4 Operation when using the free allocation function

This section contains information about removing and inserting feeders when using the free
allocation function.
Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens
listed below. Check the parts out condition at the screen which is most convenient (this will
vary depending on whether or not Kit Handy is used and the location of the computer).
a. the machine operation panel
b. Kit Handy
c. Kit Manager
Note: Check the machine operation panel if it is not necessary to perform quick verification (for
example, when a feeder for which parts reel information has been created is already
prepared). Check the screen at Kit Handy or Kit Manager if it is necessary to perform quick
verification while setting the feeder.
The feeder exchange guidance displayed at the machine operation panel is the same as
when the free allocation function is not being used. For details, refer to section " 5.4.1
Feeder replacement guidance screen ". Also, if a feeder is already set in the slot which is
specified in the job, then an asterisk (*) is displayed in the [Slot] column.
01SYS-0191J
Note: If a feeder is not already set in the slot which is specified in the job, then a slot number is
displayed. In the screen shown above, slot 9 is displayed, but the feeder can be set in any
slot.
When using Kit Handy, check the [Status] column at the part status list screen (shown
below). An asterisk (*) is displayed in the location column of the slots which require feeders
to be set. When using Kit Manager, check for an asterisk (*) at the list view.
Slot without feeder
1-1-11-0
Slot number
01SYS-0192E
Note: In the screen shown above, guidance for setting the feeder which is specified for slot 11 in
the job is displayed.

Procedure for inserting and removing feeders

1. If any of the units used below are used in production, they must be set in the slot which
is specified in the job.
a. Reject parts conveyor
b. Flux unit
c. Glue check unit
2. Check the appropriate screen at either Kit Handy or Kit Manager. Select the slot(s) for
which [No Feeder] is displayed and perform quick verification. If quick verification has
already been performed, check the machine operation panel.
3. Set the new feeder into any slot. For details on setting the feeder, refer to section " 5.4.2
Removing and attaching feeders ".
Note: If no empty slots exist, remove a feeder that is not used in production. Feeders which are
not being used can be identified by checking the LED above the feeders on the front cover
of the module. The LED is not lit for slots at which feeders are not being used.
4. Ensure that the LED on the front cover of the machine is green for the feeder which was
set.
5. Repeat the procedures above until all necessary feeders have been set.
Note: Due to the difference in the number of slots occupied by different feeders, there are cases
when it is not possible to set all feeders depending on the allocation. When using a job that
requires several different feeder types, set the narrowest feeders (the feeders occupying
the fewest number of slots) in the lowest possible slot numbers (slot 1, 2, ....).

5.5 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-LT

5.5.1 Tray setting guidance screens
Operation guidance
Slot
Push the up and down arrow keys to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12). The background
color of the selected slot changes to green.
If position "A-12" is selected and the down arrow key is pushed, position "B-1" is selected.
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance


Set tray parts
Set feeder parts 01SYS-0230E

5.5.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

Check the tray supply guidance.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0236
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237

Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
DID (tray).
User Manual.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239

01SYS-0231
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0240
COMPLETE button
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0241

5.5.3 Setting trays (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)

Check the tray set guidance
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0236
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237
4. Remove the tray drawer from the appropriate slot. If there is no tray drawer currently in
this position, then skip this step.

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
7. If it is necessary to specify the first pickup point, then specify it at this time. Refer to "
4.7.6 Setting the pickup position " for details.
01SYS-0231

Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0240
COMPLETE button
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0241

5.5.4 Changing magazines

It is possible to remove the upper and lower magazines in the tray unit-LT. It is possible to
reduce changeover time by changing the previous job magazines with magazines that
already have the trays set in them during changeover on the tray unit-LT. The procedures
to change magazines are provided below.
Magazine
01SYS-0412E
CAUTION
When changing magazines, be very careful to not drop a magazine.
Personal injury and machine damage could result if a magazine is
dropped.
When handling a magazine with trays loaded in it, handle it gently
so the tray parts are not scattered.
1. Push the MAGAZINE CLAMP button. There are two magazines, a top magazine and a
bottom magazine. Push the button for the magazine you want to change.
Note: The magazine clamp in the tray unit-LT is released.
MAGAZINE CLAMP button (top)
MAGAZINE CLAMP button (bottom)
01SYS-0242

2. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT. Open the door to the magazine you want to
change.
Front door
Front door
3. Remove the magazine from the tray unit-LT by following the sub steps below.
a. Slide the magazine stopper over.
Magazine stopper 01SYS-0243
b. Slowly pull forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position.
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0244
c. Slide the magazine forward a short distance, and then remove it from the tray unit-
LT.
Magazine
01SYS-0245

4. Load the magazine that has the trays set in it in the tray unit-LT by following the sub
steps below.
a. Confirm that the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons are not lit.
MAGAZINE CLAMP
button (upper)
MAGAZINE CLAMP
button (lower)
01SYS-0354E
Note: With the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons lit, even if a magazine is set, clamping will not operate
correctly.
Also, if magazines are set with power to the tray unit-LT off, it is necessary to check by eye
the position of the magazine side clamper.
Confirm that the side clamper sticks out.
01SYS-0355E
b. Set the magazine on the plate and slide it back until the magazine position is set by
the positioning pins.
Positioning pins
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0247

c. Move the lever to unlock the plate and gently push in the magazine.
Magazine
Lever
01SYS-0248
d. Slide back the magazine stopper to lock the magazine.
Magazine stopper 01SYS-0249
5. Check all the parts that are set in the magazine to ensure that they are correct by
following the sub steps below.
a. Check the tray parts for the slot that has the lit LED, and if the parts are correct, then
push OK on the operation panel.
LED 01SYS-0246
b. While checking the operation panel, repeat steps a for all slots that require trays.
c. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when all of the trays have been checked.

01SYS-0231
6. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. When exchanging the other
magazine, repeat these procedures up to this step.
COMPLETE button
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0241

5.5.5 Setting the tray push amount

A certain amount of tray flexion exists due to inconsistencies in trays set in the tray units.
A push amount of 1 mm (down in the Z-axis direction) is therefore factored in to the Z-axis
movement, however there are cases in which this was not good due to the flexion variation
from one tray unit to another.
It is now possible to specify a push amount for a tray unit-LT from -2.00 to 2.00 mm in the
[Tray pickup pressure setting] category for the module configuration in Accessory Software.
Procedure
1. Double-click the [Internet Explorer] icon on the desktop.
2. Enter the address (URL) "http://<NXT accessory software server name>/fujiweb" and
then press Enter. If the server computer is located and the server is running, a loading
page is displayed. Once the necessary items have been loaded, the [Home] page is
displayed. This page provides basic information on the NXT machines.
3. From Floor Monitor, click the machine name or module number for the NXT for which
module configuration is to be set. The Machine Accessories log on page is displayed.
4. Select a user ID from the drop-down list.
5. Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. If the log on is successful, the
machine accessories page is displayed with the selected machine/module already
selected. In the lower left side, the menu for possible actions displays. In the lower
right side, the details for the selected item are displayed.
6. Click [Module Configuration] from [Menu]. Accessory Software connects to the module
and receives the setting information. When completed, the settings page displays.
7. Select [Tray pickup pressure setting] from the [Category] drop-down list. Once the
category has been selected, the settings shown under the list automatically change to
the selected category.
8. Specify the new value in the available text box (range: -2.00 to 2.00 mm).
9. Once the desired setting has been specified, click [Send to Machine]. When sending
the new setting is complete, a page displays with that message.
10.Click [Close].
5.5.6 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LT

• The tray drawer has direction. When setting trays in the drawer and loading the
drawers in the Tray unit-LT, be careful to use the correct direction.
• The yellow lines on the drawer indicate the positions checked by the tray height
sensors. Be careful not to place any tall items such as magnets on these yellow
lines.
• Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner.
• Gently open and close the doors so not to jar parts. For safety reasons, the
doors are automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the
doors when they are locked.

5.5.7 Tray height error guidance

When a tray height error occurs for a set tray, tray height error guidance is displayed at the
machine.
01SYS-0331E
Remove the tray based on the provided guidance and then push OK on the operation panel
to clear the error.

5.6 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-LTC

Operation guidance
Slot
Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the pickup
point
01SYS-0385E


1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTC. There are two front doors on the tray unit-LTC.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0285E
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0286E
4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot that parts are to be supplied.

Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
DID (tray).
User Manual.
6. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, specify it at this time. Refer to section
" 4.8.6 Setting the pickup position " for details.
Tray
Caution: Gently set the tray drawer into the magazine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.

01SYS-0405
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0290E
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E


1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTC. There are two front doors on the tray unit-LTC.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0285E
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0286E

Tray
Caution: Gently set the tray drawer into the magazine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.
7. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, specify it at this time. Refer to section
" 4.8.6 Setting the pickup position " for details.
01SYS-0405

Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0290E
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E

5.6.4 Changing magazines

It is possible to remove the upper and lower magazines in the tray unit-LTC. It is possible
to reduce changeover time by changing the previous job magazines with magazines that
already have the trays set in them during changeover on the tray unit-LTC. The procedures
to change magazines are provided below.
Magazine
01SYS-0298E
Caution
When changing magazines, be very careful to not drop a magazine.
Personal injury and machine damage could result if a magazine is
dropped.
When handling a magazine with trays loaded in it, handle it gently
so the tray parts are not dislodged.
1. Push the MAGAZINE CLAMP button. There are two magazines, a top magazine and a
bottom magazine. Push the button for the magazine you want to change.
Note: The magazine clamp in the tray unit-LTC is released.
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(upper level)
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(lower level) 01SYS-0299E

2. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTC. Open the door to the magazine you want to
change.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0285E
3. Remove the magazine from the tray unit-LTC by following the sub steps below.
a. Turn the lever and then pull it out. Then flip forward the magazine stopper.
01SYS-0300E
Lever Magazine stopper
b. Slowly pull forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position.
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0301E
c. Slide the magazine forward a short distance, and then remove it from the tray unit-
LTC.
Magazine
01SYS-0302E

4. Load the magazine that has the trays set in it in the tray unit-LTC by following the sub
steps below.
a. Confirm that the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons are not lit.
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(upper level)
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(lower level) 01SYS-0299E
Note: With the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons lit, even if a magazine is set, clamping will not operate
correctly.
Also, if magazines are set with power to the tray unit-LTC off, it is necessary to check by
eye the position of the magazine side clamper.
Check that the side clamp

is protruding.
01SYS-0414E
b. Set the magazine on the plate. Slide it back until the magazine position is set by the
positioning pins.
Positioning pins
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0303E

c. Move the lever to unlock the plate and gently push in the magazine.
Magazine
Lever
01SYS-0304E
d. Push the magazine stopper from below so that it is vertical against the magazine.
Push the lever towards the tray unit and then turn clock-wise to lock the magazine.
Lever Magazine stopper
01SYS-0305E
5. Check all the parts that are set in the magazine to ensure that they are correct by
following the sub steps below.
a. Check the tray parts for the slot that has the flashing LED, and if the parts are correct,
then push OK on the operation panel.
LED 01SYS-0246
b. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, specify it at this time. Refer to
section " 4.8.6 Setting the pickup position " for details.
c. While checking the operation panel, repeat steps a and b for all slots that require
trays.

d. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when checking the trays is complete.
01SYS-0231
6. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. When exchanging the other
magazine, repeat these procedures up to this step.
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E


It is now possible to specify a push amount for a tray unit-LTC from -2.00 to 2.00 mm in the
Procedure
7. Select [Tray unit settings] from the [Category] drop-down list. Once the category has
been selected, the settings shown under the list automatically change to the selected
category.
10.Click [Close].
5.6.6 Cautions when inserting trays into the tray unit

drawers in the tray unit-LTC, be sure to use the correct direction.
lines.
• Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner in the tray unit.
• Gently open and close the doors on the tray unit so as not to dislodge parts. If
parts are dislodged, they may come out of their pockets. For safety reasons,
the doors are automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open
the doors when they are locked.

5.7 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-L

Operation guidance
Slot
Push the up and down arrow keys to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 21). The background color
Original device
Slot from which pickup Alternate device
is currently being performed Red : Tray supply required
Blue : Tray supply completed
Yellow : Parts out warning
Device information
The device comment, pickup direction, and starting pickup position (1,1) are displayed for the
currently selected slot.
If Fujitrax is being used, the parts out advance warning time (minutes) is displayed
Operation guidance
01SYS-OO56E


Front door
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NXTOPE125
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
b. Use Kit Handy to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray verification with position
check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the DID (tray).
Note: For details on tray verification, refer to section “14. Tray Verify Operation” in the Fujitrax
Tray Tray drawer
bslot 1

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Tray NXTOPE126
NXTOPE127
9. When using tray verification with position check, the tray unit reads the FIDL of the tray


Front door
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NXTOPE125
Tray Tray drawer
bslot 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Tray NXTOPE126
4.9.4 Setting the pickup position " in this manual.

NXTOPE127


It is now possible to specify a push amount for a tray unit-L from -2.00 to 2.00 mm in the
Procedure
10.Click [Close].

5.7.5 Trays that can be used with Tray unit-L

• Hard type trays that comply with JEDEC or EIAJ standards
• Use trays that are a color which the tray height sensors can detect in a
consistent manner.
• The part must fulfill the following tray cavity requirements.
C
Part
Part
C C
P
P (Height above tray) <= 0.5 mm C

C (Gap) <= 0.15 mm NXTMTU029E
• If the empty tray weight is within the specifications for automatic tray removal,
set the middle of the tray as the pickup point for the tray remover.
• When the empty tray is picked up by the remover, ensure that there are no
vacuum leaks in a 30 mm diameter area around the center of the remover pad.
• There are limitations to the tray sizes that can be used. Refer to the NXT
specifications for details. Furthermore, refer to this for maximum tray height
information on warpage, and bend.
Avoid using the following trays.
• Do not use trays such as plastic injection molded trays and soft trays, because
these trays can stick together when stacked and there is no guarantee that the
tray is level when set.
5.7.6 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-L

drawers in the Tray unit-L, be careful to use the correct direction.
lines.
• Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner.
• Gently open and close the doors so not to jar parts. For safety reasons, the
doors are automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the
doors when they are locked.
• The upper door is for the tray drawer removal area. Do not insert tray drawers
into this area. If tray drawers are inserted into this area, it is possible that a
collision will occur. Be sure to remove any tray drawers from this area once the
removal area door is opened. If the tray drawer is not removed and the door is
closed, it is possible that a collision will occur when Tray unit-L operation is
resumed.

5.7.7 Tray part setting conditions for H04 heads

Trays set in a Tray unit-L in a module that is using the H04 head must fulfill the following
conditions in order to be able to be used.
Tray height: 29.5 mm or less
9.0 mm or more Tray
Parts height:
9.5 mm or less
Drawer Parts NXTMTU030
a. The top of the part when set in the tray must be 9.0 mm or higher than the top surface
of the drawer. It is not possible to pickup parts that are less than this height.
b. The tray height and parts height must be within the acceptable ranges shown in the
picture above. Interference is possible when picking parts if these ranges are
exceeded.
If the upper surface of the part is less than the 9.0 mm limit, place an empty tray under the
current tray to raise the top of the part. However, do not exceed the maximum tray height.
Note: When using a H04 head, the two drawer positions above drawers must be empty and are
reserved for the drawer with trays.

5.7.8 Tray height error guidance

This guidance displays when a slot on which a tray height error has occurred, is selected.
The background displays in red when the permissible

tray height is exceeded.
01SYS-0114E
Check the following points and set the tray correctly to clear the error.
a. Is the set tray height out of the permissible height range?
b. Does the value for the tray height set in the job match the measured results?
c. Are the tray parts set correctly in the tray cavities?
5.7.9 Remaining tray quantity error guidance

This guidance displays when a slot on which a remaining tray quantity error has occurred,
is selected.
Remaining parts quantity error

This guidance displays when the "remaining parts quantity" value managed
by Fujitrax Verifier is larger than the number of cavities specified in the job.
01SYS-0120E
If this occurs, either revise the job or the "remaining parts quantity" value in Fujitrax Verifier
so that the Fujitrax Verifier and job values match.

5.7.10 About production starting conditions when using alternate feeders

It is possible to start production even though not all trays have been set as long as at least
one tray (original or alternate) of each required tray has been set. When it is possible to
start production with the currently supplied trays, the SUPPLY COPLT pictogram
background color turns green.
Select a slot at which a tray has already been set.
Operation guidance
Select a slot at which no tray has been set.
Operation guidance
It is possible to start production in either of the cases shown above.

Push SUPPLY COPLT at the tray unit-L.
01SYS-0131E

5.8 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-M

5.8.1 Tray setting guidance screen
Operation guidance
Slot
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance


Set tray parts


1. Open the tray unit-M door.
Front door
NXTOPE220a
Tray stopper
NXTOPE221
3. Use Kit Handy to perform tray verification for the new tray.
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
b. Use Kit Handy to scan the part barcode or the DID.

Note:
1. For details on tray verification, refer to section “14. Tray Verify Operation” in the Fujitrax
2. After scanning the part barcode or the DID, the first pickup position for the tray parts can
be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy. For details, refer to section "
Specifying the pickup position from Kit Handy " in this manual.

4. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed at the machine
operation panel.
Tray
NXTOPE222E
Note: Gently set the tray into the tray unit to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.
5. If there is guidance for setting trays for more slots, repeat steps 3 and 4 until all trays
have been set. When all required trays have been supplied, guidance to push SUPPLY
COPLT is displayed.
01SYS-0184
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224E

7. Gently close the tray unit door and then push COMPLETE.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225E


1. Open the tray unit-M door.
Front door
NXTOPE220a
Tray stopper
NXTOPE221
3. Check the slot indicated in the guidance and then gently set the tray in the slot indicated.
Tray
NXTOPE222E
Note: Gently set the tray into the tray unit to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.
4. If the tray pickup point needs to be specified, set it at this time. Refer to " 4.10.3 Setting
the pickup position " for details on making this setting.
5. At the machine operation panel, select the slot for which parts were supplied and push
[OK].

6. If there is guidance for setting trays for more slots, repeat steps 3 and 5 until all trays
have been set. When all required trays have been supplied, guidance to push SUPPLY
COPLT is displayed.
01SYS-0185
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224E
8. Gently close the tray unit door and then push COMPLETE.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225E


A certain amount of tray flexion exists due to inconsistencies in trays set in tray units. A
push amount of 1 mm (down in the Z-axis direction) is therefore factored into the Z-axis
movement. However, there are cases in which this amount is inappropriate due to the
flexion variation from one tray to another.
It is possible to specify the push amount for a tray unit-M from -2.00 to 2.00 mm in the [Tray
pickup pressure setting] category for the module configuration in Accessory Software.
Procedure
2. Enter the address (URL) "http://<NXT Accessory Software server name>/fujiweb" and
the module configuration is to be set. The Machine Accessories log on page is
displayed.
selected. In the lower left side, the menu for possible actions are displayed. In the lower
6. Click [Module Configuration] from [Menu]. Accessory Software connects to the selected
module and receives the setting information. When completed, the settings page is
displayed.
10.Click [Close].

5.8.5 Trays that can be used with a tray unit-M
Direction X-direction (mm) Y-direction (mm) Height (mm) Notes
135.9 0.25 115.5 to 322.6 0.25 4.0 to 13.0 Based on JEDEC standards.
O and 180
degrees 50.0 to 102.0 50.0 to 204.0 Tray drawer 3 mm +
Up to 10.0 Tray height = 13 mm (Max.)
NXTMTU052E
Possible loading and tray direction conditions

136.0 mm (X-direction)
The following example used in the explanation
uses the data shown below in Job Builder.
Tray Length (X) 136.00
Tray Width (Y) 322.00 322.0 mm
Tray Thickness 7.50 (Y-direction)
Tray unit-M
Comments
Direction Comments (lengths 135.9 0.25 mm and smaller are possible)
0 Degrees Can be This can be loaded into the tray unit because the
loaded X-direction of the tray at 0 degrees is 136 mm.
The tray cannot be loaded into the tray unit in this

Cannot be
90 Degrees direction because the X-direction of the tray at 90
loaded
degrees (322 mm) exceeds 137 mm.
180 Degrees Can be This can be loaded into the tray unit because the
loaded X-direction of the tray at 180 degrees is 136 mm.
The tray cannot be loaded into the tray unit in this

Cannot be
270 Degrees direction because the X-direction of the tray at 270
loaded
degrees (322 mm) exceeds 137 mm. NXTMTU053E

Possible tray height conditions

JEDEC standard tray
OK OK No good No good 0.8 mm

Z0 Height
12.2 mm 13 mm
Tray unit-M
Non-JEDEC standard trays

(Using a tray drawer)
OK OK No good No good
Z0 Height
10 mm
13 mm
Tray drawer 3 mm
Tray unit-M
NXTMTU054E
5.8.6 Cautions when inserting trays

• The tray has direction. When setting trays in the tray unit-M, be careful to use
the correct direction.
• Gently open and close the door so not to jar parts. If parts are jarred, they can
become dislodged from the tray cavities. For safety reasons, the door is
automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the door when
it is locked.
• Do not use trays that have cutouts in the upper right corner.
Cutout
NXTMTU070E

5.9 Replacing Backup Plates

5.9.1 Backup plate replacement Guidance Screen
Exchange guidance
Operation procedures
Exchange guidance
The type of backup plate required for exchange is displayed.
Indicates backup plates which support automatic backup pin allocation.
The backup plate exchange guidance screen shown above is displayed when dual lane production
is being performed. When single lane production is being performed, only lane 1 is displayed.
01SYS-0062Ea
Note: There are times when backup plate replacement is required when changing from single to
dual lane use or vice versa, or when changing the conveyor width. Conveyor width
adjustment is performed automatically by the machine based on the panel width in the next
job.
When exchanging backup plates for a M6S module, wait until the linear motor shaft cools
to room temperature and then attach the protective cover to the shaft.
Linear motor coil
Linear motor shaft
Protective covers
NXTBAS275E
WARNING
• Be careful of the magnetic attraction when using tools near the
linear motor of the M6S.
• Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches and other precision machines
away from the linear motor of a M6S module.

WARNING
• Do not touch the Y-axis linear motor in a M6S module immediately
after production is stopped. Contact with the shaft or coil section
could cause burns.
• People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis. A
heart pacemaker could malfunction due to the strong magnetic
field generated by the linear motor for the Y-axis in M6S a module.
5.9.2 Removing and attaching backup plates

Note: Guidance for removing the tray unit is displayed at modules which have a tray unit attached.
Follow the guidance to remove the tray unit.
1. Pull the module forward.
a. Ensure that when the module moves forward that nothing will be struck or pinched
by the module. When it is safe to unclamp the module, push OK on the operation
panel. The module is automatically unclamped and moves a short distance forward.
b. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently
pull the module forward until the module hits the stopper.
2. Lift the plates straight up from the lanes as shown in the diagram below to remove the
current backup plates.
Backup plate
NXTBAS147E
3. If only changing to a different backup plate name (same plate type), then proceed to step
10. If changing the backup plate type, push OK. The module needs to be returned so
the conveyor can adjust to the width for the new backup plate.
4. Return the module.
a. Ensure that the XS-axis (on M3 modules) or any other items are not protruding from
the module before returning the module. If the axis is protruding, move the axis to a
safe position before returning the module.
push the module back.
c. Stop pushing when the module cannot be pushed back more. At this point, the
machine will automatically clamp the module. If no error occurs and the module is
not automatically clamped, gently pull the module forward a short distance and then
push back into position.
5. The Conveyor width is automatically changed and pulling forward the module is again
required.

6. Align the new backup plate used in the next job with the latch as shown below and insert
into position.
Backup plate
NXTBAS177E
7. Set the necessary backup pins on the backup plates. If using the automatic backup pin
allocation function, then set the auto backup pins in the stocker.
Stocker
Backup pin
01SYS-0280E
9. If the head or nozzles need to be changed, then do these operations at this time.
10.Return the module.
Note: Guidance for attaching the tray unit is displayed at modules which had a tray unit removed.
Follow the guidance to attach the tray unit.

5.9.3 Cautions when using the optional soft backup pins

Note the following three points when using the soft backup pins.
a. Deviations in the panel position
b. Restrictions for pre-mounted parts
c. Possible positioning range
Deviations in the panel position

If the height of a pre-mounted part on the panel is large, there are instances when the panel
position can deviate when it comes into contact with the ascending soft backup pins before
the panel is clamped. (Depending on the shape of the part and the weight of the panel,
different conditions occur.)
The panel is lifted up, causing

Pre-mounted part a deviation in the position.
Clamp direction
Soft backup pins NXTBAS233E
Change the position of the backup pin so that it doesn't come into contact with the pre-
mounted part. Another option is to cut off the pin that comes into contact with the pre-
mounted part.
Cut pin
Block moved
NXTBAS234E
Restrictions for pre-mounted parts

The height of a pre-mounted part on the lower surface of the panel must be less than 13
mm. When a pre-mounted part exceeds 13 mm in height, it is longer than the soft backup
pins, thus the part collides with the base of the backup pin block and the panel cannot be
clamped.
Panel
Position with the panel clamped
Pre-mounted part
13 mm or less
Block
NXTBAS235E

Possible positioning range

There are two different sizes for the soft backup pins. By using these for different positions,
it is possible to support many sizes of panels.
W=33 mm
W=45 mm
If the panel width is less than 65 mm,

then use the 33 mm wide soft backup pins.
01SYS-0250E
The possible positioning range for the soft backup pins for the backup plates is provided
below.
M3(S) module 112.5 112.5 Possible positioning range

13
Possible positioning range = A
Rail interval range = C

Panel width (w) = B
Backup plate size
(mm)
Backup plate All sizes
size A B C
200 180 200 201
280 260 280 281
360 340 360 361
7
Plate size = 225 510 490 510 511

Panel length = 250 625 590 610 611
Possible positioning range = 252
Possible positioning
M6(S) module 252.5 252.5 range
13
Possible positioning range = A
Rail interval range = C

Panel width (w) = B
Backup plate size
Plate size = 512.5

14 Panel length = 506 14
Possible positioning range = 534 01SYS-0251E

5.9.4 Procedure for exchanging backup frames

Exchanging the backup frame is required when the backup frame size is different in cases
such as shown below.
a. When changing to single lane production from dual lane production
b. When changing to dual lane production from single lane production
c. When performing dual lane production with different width panels for each lane
1. Use the exchange backup plate commands from manual mode to remove the current
backup frames from the module. Refer to section "5.9 Exchanging Backup Plates" in
the NXT Mechanical Reference manual for details.
2. Change the machine configuration settings through Accessory Software for the [Loader
Settings] so they match the size of the new backup frames to be used. Refer to section
"2.8 Changing the conveyor settings in Chapter 6" Machine Accessories of the Fuji
Accessory Software Operation Manual for details.
3. Transmit the new jobs to be used for production from Fuji Flexa.
4. Set the new backup frames to be used. Refer to section "5.9 Exchanging Backup
Plates" in the NXT Mechanical Reference manual for details.
5. Push START on the modules to begin production.
6. Guidance for changing the backup plates is displayed on the modules. Set the backup
plates according to the displayed guidance.
7. Once the backup plate exchange is completed, push START and the modules
automatically adjust the conveyor width based on the jobs.

5.10 Replacing Nozzles

5.10.1 Nozzle Replacement Guidance Screen
Exchange guidance Nozzle status Nozzle list
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The type of nozzle station required for exchange is displayed.
If nozzle station changeover is not necessary, only the currently set nozzle station type displays.
Nozzle status
The status of the nozzle set in each nozzle cavity is displayed.
The background color varies depending on the status of the nozzle.
1 White: Nozzle changeover is necessary.
1 Red: An error occurred during 2D barcode reading. Clean the 2D barcode or exchange
the nozzle with another nozzle of the same type.
1 Yellow: A statistical error occurred for the nozzle. Clean the 2D barcode or exchange
the nozzle with another nozzle of the same type.
1 Green: The nozzle can be used in production.
30 Black: No nozzle exists in the cavity.
Nozzle list
The nicknames of all nozzles that should be set are displayed.
The colored circle is used to distinguish between nozzle types. The same colored circle appears
on the flange surface of the nozzle.
Push the down arrow key to scroll the nozzle list. 01SYS-0063Ea
Note: If all nozzles required for production are not set in the nozzle station, nozzle types that need
to be set are displayed at the nozzle exchange guidance screen. Follow the guidance and
set the required nozzle types into the nozzle station.

5.10.2 Removing and Attaching Nozzles

2. Remove the nozzle station by pulling the level towards the front of the module and lifting
the front half of the nozzle station upwards.
Nozzle station
Lever
NXTNZC002Ea
3. Prepare the nozzle station to set in the module.
4. Slide the plate over as shown below and insert the required nozzles as shown on the
guidance screen.
Plate
Nozzle
NXTNZS004
CAUTION
When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the
nozzle with the alignment pin in the nozzle station and make sure
that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.

Socket
Pin NXTNZC024E
Cutout
5. Return the station by moving the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station towards
the front of the module and then insert the rear part of the station first and then push
down on the front end of the station.
Nozzle station
Lever 2
NXTNZC003Ea
CAUTION
6. Return the lever back to its original position.
7. Confirm that the nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.
8. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.

5.10.3 Nozzle List

Useable nozzles are listed below. Nozzles can be distinguished by a color circle on the
flange surface.
Color circle
Color circle
NXTNZC022
Nozzle size H08 / H12(S)/ H01/H02

Color H04 nozzle
(mm) H12HS nozzle nozzle
Dia. 0.3 Gray AA1ATxx - -
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA056xx - -
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA057xx - -
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA058xx AA06Wxx AA0ASxx
Dia. 1.3 Green AA20Axx AA06Xxx AA0AXxx
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA064xx - AA0MZxx
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA20Bxx AA06Yxx AA0HSxx
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA19Gxx - AA11Rxx
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA20Cxx AA06Zxx AA0HTxx
Dia. 2. 5 MELF Orange AA065xx - AA0MLxx
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA0WTxx AA07Fxx AA084xx
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA20Dxx AA07Axx AA0HWxx
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA18Cxx AA07Gxx AA085xx
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA20Exx AA07Bxx AA0HKxx
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA063xx AA07Hxx AA072xx
Dia. 7.0 Medium purple - AA07Cxx AA080xx
Dia. 7.0 G Dark red - AA07Kxx AA073xx
Dia. 10.0 Medium purple - AA07Dxx AA081xx
Dia. 10.0 G Navy - AA07Lxx AA074xx
Dia. 15.0 Medium purple - AA07Exx AA082xx
Dia. 15.0 G White - AA07Mxx AA075xx
Dia. 20.0 Medium purple - - AA083xx
Dia. 20.0 G Gray - - AA076xx
Jig (J01, J02, J03) AA06Axx AA0EXxx AA05Zxx
Note: Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (for example, 2.5G or 5.0G) when using a head with a
parts presence check sensor attached. The presence of parts cannot be checked when
using nozzles with rubber pads.

5.10.4 Nozzle station list

The useable nozzle stations are listed below.
Identification
code
01SYS-0269E
Identification
code Applicable modules Applicable heads
(cavity quantity)
NC03B (3) M3(S), M6(S)
NC08B (8) M6(S)
NC8LB (8) M3(S), M6(S), Tray unit-L, Tray unit-LT
NCPTA (16) M6(S), Tray unit-LT, No coplanarity H01/H02
NCFTA (6) M6(S), Tray unit-LT, With coplanarity
NCKTA (11) M6(S), Tray unit-LT, No coplanarity
NCETA (5) M6(S), Tray unit-LT, With coplanarity
NE18A (18) M3(S), M6(S)
NE12A (12) M3(S), M6(S), Tray unit-L, Tray unit-LT
H04
NEXTA (24) M6(S), Tray unit-LT, No coplanarity
NERTA (18) M6(S), Tray unit-LT, With coplanarity
ND32C (32) M3(S), M6(S) H08/H12(S)/H12HS
H08Q/H12SQ/H12HSQ
NF08A (12) M6(S), Tray unit-M x1
NF07A (24) M6(S), Tray unit-L, Tray unit-LT OF
NF05A (18) M6(S), Tray unit-M x2

5.11 Replacing Feeder Pallets

Replace feeder pallets to perform a batch feeder change. If spare feeder pallets are
available, these can be loaded with the feeders for the next job and then switched with the
current feeder pallets by using the PCU. This helps minimize changeover time.
5.11.1 Feeder pallet replacement guidance screen
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The guidance displayed shows the use of a PCU (pallet change unit).
01SYS-0065E
Note: The feeder pallet is replaced when performing batch feeder replacement. A dedicated PCU
(Pallet Change Unit) is required for replacement.
<PCU for bucket type feeders> <PCU for standard feeders>
01SYS-0116E

5.11.2 Removing the feeder pallet

Note: The instructions provided here are for an M6(S) module but the procedure for M3(S)
modules is the same.
1. Prepare the PCU by adjusting the height of the PCU to match that of the machine.
Rotate the handle on the PCU until the indicator on the PCU matches the conveyance
height of the machine.
<For standard feeder pallets> <For bucket type feeder pallets>
Handle
Handle
Match the panel conveyance

height.
NXTOPE013Ef
2. Position the front of the PCU near the base. Gently slide the PCU forward so the PCU
guides are inserted into the holes on the base. When the guides are inserted correctly
into the base holes, the guides are automatically locked into position.
Slide
NXT base
Guide
Alignment hole
NXTOPE190Ea
Note: Due to conditions such as the flooring, there are cases in which the guides do not align with
the alignment holes in the base. Before pushing the PCU into the base, ensure that the
guides height match that of the base alignment holes and if needed, rotate the handle to
adjust the height until they match.

3. Squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently slide the PCU body forward toward the
feeder pallet.
Note: The lock is only released when the slide lock release lever is squeezed.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE191E
4. Push OK to unclamp the feeder pallet.
01SYS-0117
5. Raise the pallet lock release lever and then gently pull the feeder pallet onto the PCU.
Feeder pallet
Pallet lock
release lever
NXTOPE192E
Note: When the feeder pallet is fully pulled onto the PCU, it is automatically locked.

6. Squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently slide the PCU body with the feeder pallet
away from the NXT.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE193E
7. Squeeze the guide lock release lever and gently pull the PCU away from the NXT.
Guide lock release lever

NXTOPE194E

5.11.3 Loading a feeder pallet

Note: The instructions provided here are for an M6(S) module but the procedure for M3(S)
modules is the same.
1. Prepare the PCU with the feeder pallet by adjusting the height of the PCU to match that
of the machine. Rotate the handle on the PCU until the indicator on the PCU matches
the conveyance height of the machine.
PCU
Match the panel conveyance

Handle height.
NXTOPE016Eb
2. Position the front of the PCU near the base. Gently slide the PCU forward so the PCU
guides are inserted into the holes on the base. When the guides are inserted correctly
into the base holes, the guides are automatically locked into position.
Slide
NXT base
Guide
Alignment hole
NXTOPE190Ea
Note: Due to conditions such as the flooring, there are cases in which the guides do not align with
the alignment holes in the base. Before pushing the PCU into the base, ensure that the
guides height match that of the base alignment holes and if needed, rotate the handle to
adjust the height until they match.

3. Squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently slide the PCU body with the feeder pallet
forward into the NXT.
Note: The lock is only released when the slide lock release lever is squeezed.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE0195E
4. Raise the pallet lock release lever and then gently push the feeder pallet fully onto the
feeder pallet base.
Pallet lock
release lever
NXTOPE0196E
Note: When the feeder pallet is fully pushed into the module, it is automatically locked.
5. After the feeder pallet has been locked, squeeze the slide lock release lever and gently
slide the PCU body away from the NXT.
Slide lock
release lever
NXTOPE197E

6. Squeeze the guide lock release lever and gently pull the PCU away from the NXT.
Guide lock release lever
NXTOPE198E
7. Push the set button for the slot at which the feeder was set.
Slot no. 14 15 16
Set button
NXTOPE011
Note: This procedure is unnecessary when Fujitrax Verifier is being used.

5.12 Replacing the Placing Head

5.12.1 Head replacement guidance screen
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The head type which is needed for exchange is displayed.
Indicates heads which are equipped with a backup pin picker.
Indicates heads which are equipped with a parts presence check sensor. 01SYS-0066Ec
Note: It is necessary to change the head type (single nozzle to 8 nozzle head or vice versa)
depending on the job. Usually it is also necessary to change the nozzle station due to the
head type change.
5.12.2 Removing and attaching the placing head

Note:
1. Guidance for removing the tray unit is displayed at modules which have a tray unit
attached. Follow the guidance to remove the tray unit.
2. When the head is being removed, the head moves into a position to allow for easy
changeover and then power to the head is turned off.
Note: When heads with the part side recognition function are attached (such as H08Q, H12SQ),
there are cases in which it is necessary to move the head position before removing. For
details, refer to the Heads with Part Side Recognition Instruction Manual.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the head.
Connectors

3. Raise the lever and push to the left. Holding the handle, gently remove the head as
shown in the illustration below. Be sure to not hit anything with the head.
Lever
Placing head
NXTPHD003Eb
Note: After removal, always ensure to set the head in the optional head maintenance stand or
place the head down on its side in order to avoid damage to the nozzles.
CAUTION
The head or shaft could be damaged by the magnetic field
generated by the linear motor in the Y-axis. Keep the head away
from the shaft of the Y-axis when using the M6S module. Also, the
head should always be in the exchange position (away from the
linear motor) when attaching or removing the head.
Linear motor coil section
Linear motor shaft
M6S
NXTBAS267E

4. With the new head, insert the clamp joints on the head into the grooves on the XY-robot
as shown, and while holding the lever down to the left, push the head into position and
release the lever.
Lever
Placing head
NXTPHD004Ea
5. Reconnect the connectors.
Connectors
NXTPHD005Eb
Caution: If the handle for the head is a strap-type, ensure that the strap is flat against the head.
Interference or damage to the machine will occur if the strap is not flat against the head
when the head is attached.
Strap-type handle
01SYS-0187J

6. Set the appropriate nozzle jigs in a nozzle station and set the station in the module.
Refer to section " 5.12.3 Setting nozzle jigs " for more details.
Note: Nozzle jigs are required when the head is exchanged because it is necessary to perform
autocalibration. Set the nozzle jigs at the same time as putting on the head. Even if the
same head type is put on the machine autocalibration is still required because the serial
number is different. The only time it is not necessary to set nozzle jigs is if the same head
is put back on the module.
7. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.

5.12.3 Setting nozzle jigs

First, prepare a compatible nozzle station for the head requested by the module. Gather
the same number of nozzle jigs as there is holders on the requested head. Follow the
procedure below to set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station.
1. Remove the current nozzle station from the module.
2. Slide the plate for the new nozzle station over as shown below and set the nozzle jigs in
the nozzle station. It does not matter in which position the nozzle jigs are set but it is
essential that the same number of nozzle jigs is set in the station as there are holders
on the new head.
Nozzle jig
Socket
Plate
For H08/H12(S) For H04 heads For H01/H02 heads

/H12HS heads
Nozzle jig ID J01 J02 J03

NXTNZC023c
CAUTION
When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the
nozzle with the alignment pin in the nozzle station and make sure
that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.
Socket
Pin NXTNZC024E
Cutout

3. Set the nozzle station by moving the red lever on the left side of the nozzle changer
towards the front of the module and then insert the rear part of the station first and then
push down on the front end of the station.
Nozzle station
Lever 2
NXTNZC003Ea
CAUTION

4. Return the lever back to its original position.
5. Ensure that the new nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.

5.13 Other Changeover

This section lists other types of changeover. If the units listed in this section have not been
properly prepared, changeover guidance will be displayed when the NXT is turned on.
5.13.1 Device type changeover
Exchange guidance
Exchange guidance
The example shown above displays guidance for exchanging a feeder pallet
with a tray unit-L. Other types of exchanges are listed below.
Feeder pallet Tray unit-M (1)
Tray unit-L Feeder pallet
Tray unit-L Tray unit-L (option type)
Tray unit-L Tray unit-M (2)
Tray unit-L Tray unit-LT
The pictograms for the different units are shown below.
Tray unit-L Tray unit-LT Tray unit-M
The pictograms shown below show optional items for the tray unit-L.
Equipped with barcode reader Equipped with remover

01SYS-0118Eb
For details on exchanging the feeder pallet, tray unit-L, and tray unit-M, refer to section "5.
Basic Operation" of the NXT Mechanical Reference.

5.13.2 Parts camera type changeover
Exchange guidance
Exchange guidance
The type of the parts camera required for exchange is displayed.
The example above shows guidance for exchanging a standard camera with a sidelight camera.
01SYS-0119E
For details on exchanging the parts camera, refer to section "8. Replacing Parts" of the NXT
Mechanical Reference.

MEMO:

QD006-25 6. Manual Mode Commands
6. Manual Mode Commands

Manual mode is entered by pushing MANUAL on the operation panel.
01SYS-0068
The commands available in this mode are designed to let the maintenance person perform
maintenance or other special actions. The available commands are shown below.
Pictogram Explanation Pictogram Explanation
This is the cleaning This is the head positioning

command. This command command. This is used to
will unclamp the module. position the head in different
locations to make working
on the module easier such
as lubrication.
This is the job test command. This is the diagnosis

This is used to confirm the command and is used when
pickup position and upgrading control software
determine pickup offsets as or direct loading.
well as clearing the 01SYS 0124
production quantity.
This is the panel removal This is the exchange

command. This will lower the command and is used when
board lifters and unclamp the exchanging the head,
module. feeder pallet, or ejecting the
nozzles.
This is used when a GL head This is the information

(glue head) or feeder type command and is used to
brush unit is mounted in the display information about
module. the module and base.
To exit manual mode and re-enter autopilot, push MANUAL again.

Note: Normally, modules that are performing paired production are attached together. When
commands such as pulling forward a module are performed for either of these modules, the
command is performed for both modules.

6. Manual Mode Commands QD006-25
6.1 Cleaning Command
This command is designed to be used when cleaning is to be performed on the module.

When this command is selected and OK is pushed, the module is unclamped to allow it to
be pulled forward. This allows cleaning to be performed easier on the module.
It is essential that before this command is used that no one or nothing will be hurt when the
module is unclamped. When unclamped, the module moves forward a short distance and
can pinch or severe any items between the module and the base.
6.1.1 Procedure
1. With the module not operating, push MANUAL to display the manual commands.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the cleaning pictogram, then push OK.
Note: If a tray unit is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display guidance
for removing the tray unit at this point. Follow the directions provided to remove the tray
unit and then continue on to the next step.
3. Ensure that when the module moves forward that nothing will be struck or pinched by
the module. When safe to unclamp the module, push OK and the module is
automatically unclamped. When the module is unclamped it moves a short distance
forward.
CAUTION
Do not insert fingers or other body parts into the gap between the
machine side cover and base, because they could be injured when
the module is pulled out or unclamped.
Note:
1. If the module is not unclamped, check the cause based on the error message that displays.
M3(S) modules will not be unclamped if the XS-axis for that module or the neighboring
modules are in an unsafe position (i.e., protuding into another module).
2. When performing this on paired modules, perform steps 1 to 3 on both modules. When either
of the OK buttons is pushed on the paired modules in step 3, both modules are unclamped.
4. Grip the handle for the module and squeezee to release the module brake and gently
WARNING
safely at the same time. (Maximum: Four M3(S) modules on an 8M
base, or two M3(S) modules on a 4M base.)
If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the
front, possibly resulting in serious physical harm.
Note: Do not move the XS-axis so that it protudes from the module while the module is pulled
forward. When the module is returned in this condition, the XY-robot will strike the other
module.

5. Perform the necessary cleaning actions.
WARNING
• When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is
behind the module, to prevent injuries.
• When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or
other body parts in between modules. If caught between modules,
fingers or other body parts could be cut or severed.
6. Ensure that the XS-axis or any other items are not protuding from the module before
returning the module. If the axis is protuding, move the axis to a safe position before
returning the module.
8. Stop pushing when the module reaches the end of the possible movement and it cannot
be pushed back more. At this point, the machine will automatically clamp the module.
If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the module
forward a short distance and then push back into position.
Note: If a tray unit was removed, guidance for reinserting the tray unit is displayed. Insert the tray
unit gently in the module and the unit is automatically clamped.
9. Push MANUAL and the main screen is displayed on the operation panel.
Note: The operation panel for the paired module on which the OK button was not pushed displays
the module removal guidance. Push MANUAL to return to autopilot.

6.2 Head Positioning Command
Use this command to move the head to different positions in the module to enable easier
access to perform actions such as cleaning and lubrication. There are three possible
locations to position the head with this command.
• In the middle rear of the module: This makes it easy to remove panels.
• In the left front of the module: This makes it easy to access the head from the
left side.
• In the right front of the module: This makes it easy to access the head from the
right side.
Caution: When this command is performed, any parts on the head are not rejected.
6.2.1 Procedure
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the head positioning pictogram, and push OK.
Head positioning
01SYS-0069E
3. Use the arrow keys to select the pictogram that displays the desired head position, then
push OK.
In the right front of the module

In the left front of the module
In the middle rear of the module
01SYS-0070E

4. Push START and the head is moved to the specified position.
01SYS-0071
5. The guidance changes to redisplay the different head positions. Push MANUAL and the
main screen is displayed on the operation panel.

6.3 Job Test Command
Use this command to check and adjust the pickup position, clear the current production
quantity, and clear the number of panels loaded. When this command is selected and OK
is pushed, the pictograms for the following job test commands are displayed. Use the arrow
keys to select the desired job test command.
• Pickup position check
• Clear the quantity of produced panels
• Clear the number of panels loaded (this clears the count for the interval stop
panel quantity)
6.3.1 Checking the pickup position

This command is designed to check and change the pickup position for feeders and trays.
When this command is used, the mark camera takes a picture of the pickup position and
displays the image in the image monitor on the operation panel. This allows the pickup
position condition to be checked and any required pickup offsets to be determined and
entered.
This command supports parts supplied from feeders and the tray unit.
Note: Pickup offsets can be specified for the following positions.
• Slots that are able to be used in the job (the feeder is set ok, parts out warning has
been issued).
• Slots at which pickup, parts out, or vision errors have occurred.
• Slots at which the splicing limit has been reached.
Caution:
1. When the pickup offset has been specified for a position at the machine, the pickup offset
is cleared for that position if a feeder with a different part comment is set in that position.
2. Pickup offsets cannot be specified for positions that are not used in production.
3. Specify the pickup offset for parts in the shape data if pickup cannot be performed due to
a reason such as pickup from the middle of the cavity is not possible due to the shape of
the part.
㪧㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㪧㫆㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅
NXTMMS021E

Procedure
1. Set the feeders in the machine in accordance with the feeder configuration specified in
the job.
Note: Usually parts do not need to be present at the pickup position (during production, the feeder
is advanced before pickup). When the pickup position is to be checked, set the feeders in
the machine and then advance a part to be in the pickup position.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the job test pictogram, then push OK.
Job test
01SYS-0072E
4. Select the pickup position confirmation pictogram and push OK.
Checking the pickup position
01SYS-0073E
5. Use the arrow buttons to select the unit and slot (subslot for the tray unit) for which to check
the pickup position. It is only possible to check positions that are in the current job.
01SYS-0074
Note:
1. If it is required to advance the tape a specific amount in order to perform this command,
this information is displayed. Manually advance the tape the number of times indicated
plus one extra time. Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for information on
advancing feeders.
2. It is not necessary to specify the stage for the NXT machine. The [SUB] setting (for
subslot) is only valid for parts from a tray unit.
3. When using the free allocation function, the data displayed for [Device Comment] and
[SLOT] is for the actual position selected.

6. Ensure that the feeder (or tray) is set in the specified slot and push START. The
machine performs calibration and then checks the pickup position.
7. Once the check is completed, the operation panel displays the image in image monitor.
Check the pickup position using the gradations in the image from the mark camera.
NXTMMS014
Note: The image is displayed with left and right sides reversed.
8. Push MONITOR to display the check position selection screen.

Push OK and the screen changes to display the settings for the pickup offset for the
specified position.
9. Use the right and left arrow keys to change the offset value for the currently selected
setting. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the selected setting.
01SYS-0075
Note: These offsets are not saved in the job. If it is desired to save the determined offsets in the
job, then follow the procedures in “Setting pickup offsets in a job”.
10.Push OK after specifying the desired offset to register the new values. If CANCEL is
pushed, then no changes are registered for the offset values.
11.If it is desired to check the new pickup position, push START. The machine rechecks
the pickup position using the new pickup offset value entered at the machine.
01SYS-0076a

12.Push MONITOR to display the check position selection screen. For slots at which
indexing has already been performed, the required reverse index times displays in the
screen. Manually reverse index the parts tape the specified number of times plus one
extra time.
Note: Always return the parts tape to its original position before commencing production. Failure
to do may result in damage to parts. When a part is present in the pickup position of a set
feeder, the part is not returned from the pickup position even if the feeder is indexed back
by the specified pitch. If production is started in this condition, the part in the pickup position
is scrapped.
Due to this, index the feeder one extra time more than the specified pitch.

Setting pickup offsets in a Job

Based on the results from checking the pickup position, specify any required pickup offsets
in the job. In the following procedures, the example offsets for the image below are used.
2 1 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
-1 Target pickup position

x = -1
-2 y = -0.5
-3
NXTMMS015
Furthermore, based on the following conditions the setting calculation method is different.
a. When the part data (tray) direction is 0.
b. When the part data (tray) direction is not 0.
When the part data (tray) direction is 0

1. Open the shape data for the part in Job Builder.
2. Select the [Shape Process] tab and then [Process] tab. The [Offset X] and [Offset Y]
fields under the [Pick] category display the current offset values.
NXTMMS016E
3. Using the gradations in the image monitor, determine the offsets for X and Y. (In the
example, X, Y = -1, -0.5)
4. Add the determined X and Y offsets to any current offset values and then enter the new
values in the shape data.

When the part data (tray) direction is not 0.

1. Calculate the offset values considering the direction settings specified in the job. The
calculation methods are shown below. If there are part data direction and tray direction
settings, calculate the amount considering each direction.
2
y When direction is 90.
-2 -1 2
x 2
Target pickup position

x
-1
x = -1 2 1 -2
y = -0.5 y
-2
x = -0.5 -1
Note: The image shown here is reversed vertically y=1
because the image shown in the image monitor
on the machine is inverted. -2
When direction is 180. When direction is 270.
-2 -2
2 1 -2 -2 -1 2
x
x=1 1 x = 0.5
y
y = 0.5 1
y = -1
y 2 2
x
NXTMMS017
2. Open the shape data for the part in Job Builder.
3. Select the [Shape Process] tab and then [Process] tab. The [Offset X] and [Offset Y]
fields under the [Pick] category display the current offset values.
4. Using the values determined in step 1, add the determined X and Y offsets to any current
offset values and then enter the new values in the shape data.

Clearing pickup offsets made at the machine

Pickup offsets specified on the machine are cleared under the following conditions.
• A feeder with a part with a different part comment is set in the slot.
• A part is changed through splicing (the part comment for a spliced part is
different (when using AVL)).
• The pickup offsets are manually cleared.
The procedure for manually clearing the pickup offsets for a feeder is provided below.
1. From the pickup offset screen, select the Clear pictogram and then push OK. The
offsets change to zero (0).
3216R-03
1 1
Feeder -
0.0
0.0
Clear
01SYS-0129
Note: If CANCEL is pushed instead of OK then any previously registered values are not cleared.
2. Push OK again to display the check position selection screen.

6.3.2 Clearing the quantity of produced panels

Use this command to clear the number of panels that have been produced to enable
management of the quantity of panels produced.
This command only clears the display of the quantity of panels produced on that module for
the current module. This does not affect production or Profiler information.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the job test pictogram and then push OK.
Job test
01SYS-0077E
3. Use the arrow keys to select the production quantity clear pictogram and then push OK.
Production quantity clear
01SYS-0078E
4. Select the clear pictogram and push OK, then the quantity of panels produced for the
current job is cleared.
Panel quantity
01SYS-0079
Note:
1. If the quantity is to not to be cleared, select the return pictogram or push CANCEL on the
operation panel.
2. If there is a panel on the conveyor in the module, the lane icon for that lane is red. Wait
until production for that panel is completed and then unload the panel.

6.3.3 Clearing the number of panels loaded

This command is only enabled when the interval stop function is being used. Use this
command to clear the count for the interval stop panel quantity. The count is displayed at
the operation panel when using the interval stop function.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the job test pictogram and then push OK.
Job test
3 /5
01SYS-0203E
3. Use the arrow keys to select the pictogram for clearing the number of panels loaded and
then push OK.
Clear the number of panels loaded
01SYS-0202E
4. Select the clear pictogram and then push OK. The number of panels loaded is cleared.
Number of
panels loaded
01SYS-0204E
Note: If the quantity is not to be cleared, select the return pictogram or push CANCEL on the
operation panel.

6.4 Diagnosis Command
This command is designed to be used when upgrading control software, directly loading
matrix software and so on.
6.4.1 Procedure
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the diagnosis pictogram, and push OK.
Note: Do not perform any operations on the module or through Accessory Software until the
processing pictogram is replaced with the engineering panel pictogram.

6.5 Panel Removal Command
01SYS-0125
This command is designed to be used when removing a panel from the module. When this
command is selected and OK is pushed, the board lifter for both lanes releases any panels
and the module is unclamped to allow it to be pulled forward. The panel can then be
removed from the module.
It is essential that before this command is used that no one or anything will be hurt when
the module is unclamped. When unclamped, the module moves forward a short distance
and can pinch or severe any items between the module and the base.
6.5.1 Procedure
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the panel removal pictogram, and push OK. The panel
removal screen displays.
3. Push START to automatically lower the panel lifters and move the head to the rear of
the module.
Note: If a tray unit is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display guidance
4. Ensure that when the module moves forward that nothing will be struck or pinched by
the module. When safe to unclamp the module, push OK and the module is unclamped.
When the module is unclamped it moves a short distance forward.
CAUTION
Note:
1. If the module is not unclamped, check the cause based on the error message that
displays. M3(S) modules will not be unclamped if the XS-axis for that module or the
neighboring modules are in an unsafe position (i.e., protuding into another module).
2. When performing this on paired modules, perform steps 1 to 3 on both modules. When
either of the OK buttons is pushed on the paired modules in step 4, both modules are
unclamped.
Note: Do not move the XS-axis so that it protudes from the module while the module is pulled
forward. When the module is returned in this condition, the XY-robot will strike the other
module.

6. Remove the panels from the lanes.

Note:
1. When the module is paired with another modules and OK is pushed in step 4, the paired
module is also unclamped and guidance displays in the operation panels for removing any
panels. Remove any panels from both modules.
2. The top plate for the front rail of the lane can be slid back to allow easy removal of the
panel. After removing the panel, be sure to slide this plate back into the original position.
NXTBAS194
7. Ensure that the XS-axis or any other items are not protuding from the module before
returning the module. If the axis is protuding, move the axis to a safe position before
returning the module.
WARNING

9. Stop pushing when the module reaches the end of the possible movement and it cannot
be pushed back more. At this point, the machine will automatically clamp the module.
If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the module
forward a short distance and then push back into position.
Note: If a tray unit was removed, guidance for reinserting the tray unit is displayed. Insert the tray
unit gently in the module and the unit is automatically clamped.
10.Push MANUAL and the main screen is displayed on the operation panel.
Note: The operation panel for the paired module on which the OK button was not pushed displays
the module removal guidance. Push MANUAL to return to autopilot.

6.6 Exchange Command
This command is designed to be used when exchanging heads, feeder pallets, backup
plates, or to automatically remove the nozzles from the head on the module. When this
command is selected and OK is pushed, a selection screen displaying five types of
exchange operation pictograms is displayed as shown below. Use the arrow keys to select
the desired exchange operation pictogram.
• Exchanging feeder pallets
• Ejecting nozzles
• Exchanging heads
• Exchanging backup plates (exchange both lanes at the same time)
• Exchanging backup plates (moving lane 2 forward)
6.6.1 Exchanging feeder pallets

Pallet exchange
01SYS-0169E
When this command is performed, the feeder pallet which is attached to the machine is
unclamped. Before unclamping the feeder pallet, ensure that the PCU (pallet change unit)
has been inserted into the base of the machine.
The clamping and unclamping mechanism used for the feeder pallet is the same as the
mechanism used for the tray unit, so this command can also be used to remove the tray
unit.
Refer to section "Removing/Inserting a Feeder Pallet" and "Removing a Tray Unit-L" in the
NXT Mechanical Reference manual for procedures and details on exchanging a feeder
pallet or tray unit.

6.6.2 Ejecting nozzles

Nozzle exchange
01SYS-0170J
When this command is used, the nozzles on the head are ejected back to the nozzle station.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the exchange pictogram.
3. Push OK and the selection screen is displayed.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the pictogram displaying the nozzle is changed, and
push OK.
5. Push START and the nozzles on the head are placed back into the nozzle station.
Note:
1. If a tray unit is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display guidance
2. If an error occurs, the operator is requested to push OK to unclamp the module and then
remove the nozzles by hand and put into the nozzle station. Then the module is returned.
When performing these actions, be sure to follow all safety precautions regarding pulling
forward and returning modules.
6. The guidance screen changes to display the steps for removing the nozzle station.
Remove the nozzle station if necessary.
6.6.3 Exchanging Heads

Head exchange
01SYS-0171J
When this command is used the head is moved to the removal location and the power is
cut for the head.
It is important that the head is not removed from the XY-robot unless this command is used,
the head exchange changeover command is used, or the NXT is completely turned off.
Refer to section "Removing / Attaching a Placing Head" in the NXT Mechanical Reference
manual for procedures and details on exchanging backup plates.

6.6.4 Exchanging backup plates

Exchanging backup plates
01SYS-0172E
When this command is used, the conveyors change to the maximum width and the head
moves to the rear of the module. If the module is not pulled forward, then guidance for
pulling forward the module is displayed. Follow the displayed guidance to pull forward the
module and exchange backup plates.
Refer to section "Exchanging Backup Plates" in the NXT Mechanical Reference manual for
procedures and details on exchanging backup plates.
6.6.5 Exchanging backup plates (moving lane 2 forward)
Exchanging backup plates (moving lane 2 forward) 01SYS-0173E
This command is designed to be used with machines that have dual conveyors. When this
command is used, the backup plates for lane 1 are first removed, and then lane 2 moves
forward. Then the backup plates for lane 2 are exchanged. Finally, lane 2 is moved back
and then the new backup plates can be set in lane 1. This can be used for dual lane and
single lane production.
Refer to section "Exchanging Backup Plates" in the NXT Mechanical Reference manual for
procedures and details on exchanging backup plates.

6.7 Head Adjustment Command
This command is used when GL heads are being used or when a feeder type brush unit is set
in the module. When this command is selected and OK is pushed, a selection screen
displaying five pictograms for different operations is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select
the desired operation pictogram.
• Removing air from the needle

• Measuring needle offsets
• Checking the glue applied
• Cleaning the nozzles on the head
• Cleaning all of the nozzles
6.7.1 Removing air from the needle

Air removal
01SYS-0212E
This command is used on a module that has a GL head. Use this command to remove air
bubbles from the needle tip of a syringe loaded with glue.
For details on this command refer to the GL Head Instruction Manual.
6.7.2 Measuring needle offsets

Needle offset measurement
01SYS-0213E
This command is used on a module that has a GL head. Use this command to measure
the needle center of rotation. In order to measure this data, the job currently being used
must have glue check sequences set.

6.7.3 Checking the applied glue

Glue dispensing check
01SYS-0214E
This command is used on a module that has a GL head. Use this command to measure
the glue dot area applied on a glue check unit. In order to measure this data, the job
currently being used must have glue check sequences set.
6.7.4 Cleaning the nozzles on the head
Clean head nozzles 01SYS-0215E
This command is used on a module that has a feeder type brush unit set in it. Use this
command to clean all of the nozzles currently on the head and the thermal compensation
marks on the head.
For details on this command refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual.
6.7.5 Cleaning all of the nozzles
Clean all nozzles 01SYS-0216E
This command is used on a module that has a feeder type brush unit set in it. Use this
command to clean all of the nozzles on the head and in the nozzle station as well as the
thermal compensation marks on the head.
For details on this command refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual.

6.8 Information Command
01SYS-0128
This command is used to display the following information about the module and base.
Unit Information Displayed

Module Type
Serial number
Application version number
Recovery count
Base IP address of the base
Conveyor Conveyor type
Software version
Motor bank version (M1 to M5)
Panel transport interface board version (Displayed only
for the two end modules on the base)
Tray Unit-L (if mounted) Type
Software version
Tray Unit-LT (if mounted) Type
Software version
Tray Unit-LTC (if mounted) Type
Software version
Tray Unit-M (if mounted) ID number
Software version
Feeder Pallet (if mounted) ID number
Software version
Device tilt measurement data (Calibration [um])
Feeder (feeders on the Slot number set
feeder pallet) ID number
Software version
Part Camera and Mark ID number, camera type
Camera Serial number
Software version
Head ID number, head option
Serial number
Software version
Nozzle Station ID number
Serial number
Nozzles Socket number
2D code number
Calibration table Software version, calibration values, filter values, so on

6.8.1 Procedure
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the information pictogram, and push OK.
3. Push the arrow keys and the module/base information is displayed.
01SYS-0268
Note: Information is blank for an item if the machine has not yet checked that item during
calibration. To do this, start production and wait until the module has completed calibration
and then stop production and redisplay the information.

QD006-25 7. Accessory Software
7. Accessory Software
7.1 Introduction
This software is used to perform the special non-production commands on the NXT.
The machine interface has been simplified in order to make it easier for the operator to use.
Many of the commands not directly related to production have been moved to Accessory
Software. This program is designed to get data from the machine such as pictures and
trace data, make special settings, and perform special commands as well as being used to
help monitor the progress of the machine.
CP-7/QP-3-series NXT
Commands on the machine Commands on the machine
- Production commands - Production commands
- Vision image display - Vision image display
- Trace data
- Calibration settings
- Configuration settings Accessory Software
- Inching Functions
- Servo counter - Base Configuration settings
- Servo parameters - Module Configuration settings
- I/O - Acquire data from machine
- Remote commands
- Progress monitor
I/O Monitor Motion Tool

Functions Functions
- Displaying I/O conditions - Servo counter
- Changing output I/O - Servo parameters
NXTASO040E
The Accessory Software system uses a server/client system with one server being installed
on a computer. Accessory Software clients then connect to this one server. This server is
responsible for the communication between all the NXT machines and the clients.
The client computers connect to the Accessory Software server through Internet Explorer
5.5 (service pack 2 or higher) or higher. Due to this, software management of this software
is much easier because no special software is installed on the client computers. Only the
server computer needs to be changed when upgrading.
Server
NXT
Accessory software
Client computer Client computer Client computer

IE 5.5(SP2) IE 5.5(SP2) IE 5.5(SP2) NXTAS0041E
The server computer gets the information about the available NXT machines from the line
settings made in Fuji Flexa. Once the NXT machines have been registered in Fuji Flexa,
Accessory Software is able to connect to them.
Fuji Flexa must be installed on the server computer in order to allow the server to connect
to Flexa. A full Fuji Flexa installation is not required. It is sufficient if a "Fuji Flexa External
Components" installation is performed on the computer.

7. Accessory Software QD006-25
7.2 Starting Accessory Software

The server is basically always running whenever the computer is running. What is meant
by this title is starting a client to connect to the server.
page displays. Once the necessary items have been loaded, the [Home] page displays.
This page provides basic information on the NXT machines.

7.3 Floor Monitor

The [Home] page displays the Floor Monitor. Floor Monitor displays status of all the lines
and machines in the factory. Each line is on a separate row with the name of the line at the
front.
7.3.1 Floor Monitor fields and their meanings

Click [Floor Monitor] to display Floor Monitor as shown below. The screen is refreshed
every 15 seconds in order to always give the latest information.
The module statuses display in either; Production (Blue), Stopped (Red), Waiting
Command (Orange), Waiting(Green), Other(Grey).
NXTAS0026Ea
Below is an explanation of the Floor Monitor items.
Number Name Description

1 Line Name This displays the line name.
2 Link Icon Area This displays icons for available links. By clicking
the various icons, it is possible to jump to the screen
for that item for the machine.
3 Equipment Name This displays the machine name and module
number. Click the machine or module to open the
machine accessories screen.
4 Module Status This displays the status for the selected module. If
the module is in an error status, the cause also
displays. Click the error cause to open the Error
Details screen.
5 Job Name This displays the current job name. Click the job
name to open the Trend screen.
6 Line Configuration This displays the line module configuration. Click a
module to check the current status of that module.
7 Service List This displays the service list. Click here if the line
configuration displayed in the floor monitor does not
match the actual line configuration.

7.4 Vision processing error analysis

When a vision processing error occurs during production, the related image is acquired
from the machine and displayed. Furthermore, by using VPDplus, shape data can also be
edited. This function allows prompt rectification of vision processing errors.
7.4.1 Information displayed in the vision processing error analysis

screen
Click the right icon in the [Link Icon Area] of the Floor Monitor to open the vision processing
error analysis screen. The vision processing error analysis screen displays the image,
date, slot, part number, shape name and error code for the specified module.
NXTAS0043E
Below is an explanation of the screen items.

1 Image Displays the image acquired when the vision
processing error occurred. The image can be
clicked to edit the image.
2 Enlarge Enlarge the image.
3 Date Displays the date and time the vision processing
error occurred.
4 Slot Displays the slot the parts for which the vision
processing error occurred came from.
5 Part number Displays the part number used by the part for which
the error occurred.
6 Shape name Displays the shape name used by the part for which
the error occurred.
7 Error code This displays the error code that displayed at the
time of the vision processing error. Click the error
code to display the error details.
8 Exit monitoring Exit vision processing error monitoring. The images
acquired will not be deleted. Refer to Starting vision
processing monitoring for details on how to restart
vision processing error monitoring.
9 Redo monitoring Redo vision processing error monitoring. This
deletes all images acquired, and starts without any
error status.
10 Vision processing Specify whether to start vision processing error
settings monitoring. Click to display the vision processing
error analysis screen.

7.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings
NXTAS0044E

1 Monitor check Check this when monitoring vision processing
errors.
2 Slot Displays the slot for which vision processing errors
will be monitored.
3 Part number Displays the part number of the part in the slot.
4 Shape name Displays the shape data name of the part in the slot.
5 Detailed settings Displays the detailed settings of the vision
processing error monitor.
6 Apply Click this when data settings are complete. The
settings are reflected and monitoring starts.
7 Cancel Delete and settings and return to the Vision
processing error analysis screen.
Press the [Detailed settings] button in the vision processing error monitoring screen to
change to the detailed settings screen. Accept pickup error and error code settings can be
made. Click apply to start vision processing error monitoring.

NXTAS0045E

1 Accept missed Specify whether to recognise missed picks as vision
pickup processing errors. Check this when images are to
be acquired for pickup miss errors. This can prevent
the 10 image storage area from becoming full of
pickup miss images.
2 Error code This is for monitoring error codes on vision
processing error. If the specified error code occurs,
it is recognised as a vision processing error.

7.5 Production Progress Displays

Click [Progress Monitor] in the Menu to display the production status of the NXT machines.
7.5.1 Progress Monitor items

This displays basic progress information for the NXT lines.
NXTAS0008Eb
Below is an explanation of the items in the window.

1 Form This displays whether the results for each 10 minutes of
production is on target. An upwards pointing arrow in blue
indicates production is doing better than expected. A sideways
pointing arrow in green indicates production approximately
meets expectations. A downwards pointing arrow in red
indicates production is not meeting expectations. If a graph
displays instead of an arrow icon, this indicates that a production
target has not been specified for the current job.
2 Expected Finish This displays the expected finish time and the difference to
actual schedule. The text changes color to indicate the
condition.
Red: Production is behind schedule.
Green: Production is on schedule
Blue: Production is ahead of schedule
3 Job Name (current) Displays the name of the current job being produced.
4 Job Name (next) Displays the name of the next scheduled job.
5 Current QTY Displays the quantity of panels produced up-to-date.
6 Throughput Displays the production throughput (time to produce one panel)
from the start of compilation. At customizing the Progress
monitor screen, [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum] can be
selected as the display method for throughput.The compilation
start time is updated when production is changed and when
[Throughput] is reset using [Reset] in Progress monitor. The
compilation start time appears when selected.
7 Placements Displays the number of placements per hour of production from
the start of compilation.The compilation start time is updated
when production is changed and when [Placements] is reset
using [Reset] in Progress monitor. The compilation start time
appears when selected.
8 Success rate Displays the success rate from the start of compilation.The
compilation start time is updated when production is changed
and when [Success rate] is reset using [Reset] in Progress
monitor. The compilation start time appears when selected.
If one of the icons under [Form] is clicked, trend information about that line displays.

7.5.2 Detailed production information

The line production status for the last 24 hours can be checked for the line on which the
arrow icon was clicked. There are three types of information available. By default, the
[Trend] page for the selected line is opened when the arrow icon under [Form] is clicked.
NXTAS0009E
The label for the current type of information displays in light blue. Links to the pages for
other types of information display in the dark blue section below the title bar. Select one of
these names to display the page with that information.
NXTAS0010E
The following three types of information can be displayed.
General This displays general information such as the job name, line
name and the schedule information.
Trend This displays as the initial screen. The graph at the top of
this page displays the production quantity. Data about each
module displays in the bottom.
Parts out This displays the times the modules stopped due to parts
Stoppage out errors sorted by time.

Below each table or graph is a set of arrows. These arrows are used to change the time of
the displayed period.
Button Description
Moves to the first available time period.
Moves one period before the current period.
Moves one period after the current period.
Moves six periods before the current period.
Moves six periods after the current period.
Moves to the latest available time period.
This icon is only available for the trend chart. Click this icon to toggle
the displayed periods between 10 minute intervals and hourly
intervals.
Trend information
The [Trend] page displays a chart at the top of the page and information about the modules
for the selected period from the chart displays at the bottom.
NXTAS0011E
The chart at the top of the page displays the total amount of panels produced broken down
by time and the amount of panels produced based on the target amount for each time
period.
Number Description
1 The numbers on the left side are used to help determine the total quantity of
panels produced.
2 The numbers on the right side are for the number of panels produced for the
time periods.

Number Description
3 The blue line indicates the total number of panels that must be produced
based on the target cycle time.
4 The orange line indicates the actual total amount of panels produced.
5 The vertical green bars indicate the amount of panels produced during that
time period from the target amount. The green color is used for amounts that
are close to the target quantity.
6 The vertical blue bars indicate the amount of panels produced during that
time period from the target amount. The blue color is used when many more
panels than the target quantity were produced.
7 The vertical red bars indicate the amount of panels produced during that time
period from the target amount. The red color is used when panel production
was much less than the target quantity.
8 The selected time period is indicated by the vanilla colored background.
The lower half of the [Trend] page displays detailed module information. There are three
possible views for this area, table view, bar graph view, and utilization view. By default, the
utilization view displays when trend is first opened.
Utilization view This displays a bar graph with different bars for each module. The
different colors on the bar represent the operating status of the module.
The arrow to the side of each bar indicates the targeted cycle time
based on how many panels were produced. If this graph is clicked,
detailed information about the production and non-production time
displays.
Table view This displays cycle time values for each module. The average,
shortest, and longest cycle time display for each module. The
background for the module with the longest cycle time is orange.
Bar graph view This displays cycle time values for each module in a bar graph format.
The average, shortest, and longest cycle time display for each module.
The blue arrow for each module indicates the target cycle time.
General information
The [General] page displays basic information about the current job. At the top, the
targeted quantity and finish time displays. In addition the target cycle time displays in this
area. The bottom of the page displays the number of panels completed, expected
completion time, the throughput time, and the percentage of panels completed.
NXTAS0013E

Parts out stoppage

This displays the times the modules stopped due to parts out errors. The values in the
brackets represent the actual time spent stopped in seconds.
NXTAS0014E

7.5.3 Production and non-production time views

The production time view displays for the selected module and time period when the
utilization chart is clicked.
Production time view
NXTAS0015E
Recovery error information for slots or nozzles displays depending on the display setting.
Number Description
1 This is the location that the display setting is specified.
2 This is a listing of all the recovery errors that occured.
3 This is the error count by cause chart that breaks down the errors
that occurred by cause.
4 This is the listing of the codes for the errors that occurred along
with the description and quantity.
5 This chart displays the error counts for the nozzle if the [By slot]
mode is selected. If the [By nozzle] mode is selected, the error
counts for the selected nozzle at the different slots display.

Non-production time view
NXTAS0016E
When this is selected, detailed information about the modules when not producing displays.
There are four groups of data displayed.
Number Description
1 This displays the total stopped time for the select time period
broken down into four categories.
2 This is a listing of the codes for errors that caused a stop along with
a description, stop time, count, and average stop time per
occurrence.
3 This displays the loader wait time broken down into three
categories.
4 This displays the time the module was stopped while waiting for
commands from an operator broken down into two categories.

7.5.4 Changing the target cycle time

Click [Cycle Time] in the header of either the [Progress Monitor] or [Trend] screens to
display the cycle time settings screen.
NXTAS0036E
From this page, it is possible to manually specify or use the estimate time for the target
cycle time.
Target cycle time is the cycle time when the module (machine) is operating optimally. This
time displays in the Table view and the Bar graph view. When all desired settings have
been specified, click [Apply] to use the new settings.

1 Line name Select the line name for the target cycle time.
2 Job name Select the job for the target cycle time.
3 Machine name This list displays the machine name (modules) for the
target cycle time setting.
4 Estimated This displays the estimated time for each module
performed for the specified job.
5 Specified Specify the target cycle time for each module in this
area. The default value is the estimated time.
6 Apply Click this after making settings to use the new settings.
When this is clicked, the settings are sent to the
Accessory Software system to be used.
7 Use defaults When this is clicked, all of the module settings are
changed to the estimated time. If [Apply] is then clicked,
the estimated time settings are then used.

7.5.5 Changing the operation rate

Click [Operation Rate] in the header of either the [Progress Monitor], [Trend], or [Cycle Time
Settings] screens to display the [Operation Rate Settings] screen.
NXTAS0037E
The Operation Rate is the percentage of the cycle time that must be reached.
The specified rate effects the standard cycle time. As the standard cycle time becomes the
line throughput, if the operation rate is changed, the amount of panels that must be
produced is changed.
Example) If the standard cycle time is 20 seconds and the Operation Rate is 100%,
production must be completed in 20 seconds. If the Operation Rate is set to 80%, an
operation loss of 20% is acceptable, this means that a cycle time of 24 seconds is
permissible.
Below is an explanation of the items in the screen.

1 Drop-down list This is used to specify whether settings are for all lines
or per line. When [All lines] is selected only [Set all
lines] displays. However, when [Set per line] is
selected, a list of the lines displays and the operation
rate can be specified for each line.
2 Operation Rate The operation rate is set as a percentage(%). The
setting can be between 1% and 100%.
3 Apply Click this after making settings to use the new settings.
The data is not enabled unless this is clicked.

7.6 Warnings
If the success rate of the product being assembled drops, a warning is sent to the machines,
which can be viewed by operators. If the productivity then goes back above the specified
success rate, the warning condition is removed.
This allows users to act on drops in productivity in real-time.
7.6.1 Displaying warnings

Click [Warnings] from the Menu to display the current warnings.
7.6.2 Warning information

The warning screen is updated every 15 seconds to display the current status. The
selection box for the production line displays at the top of the screen.
Select the name of the production line of which to monitor the warning status. The default
is [All]. To display warnings for a single line only, select that line name from the drop-down
list.
NXTAS00E27E
The description of the items from the screen above are provided in the following table.

1 Line name This displays the name of the line for which warnings are
currently displayed.
2 Machine name This displays the name of the machine for which warnings
are currently displayed.
3 Slot This displays the name of the slot for which warnings are
currently displayed.
4 First warning This indicates the time the warning status first occurred.
The warning has continued as is from this time.
5 Latest time This indicates the most recent time for the warning status.


6 Error count by Warnings display separately in order of highest incidence.
code The error code, error description, and count display. This
allows users to efficiently prioritize countermeasure
actions.
7 Error graph This displays a graph showing the transition of errors over
time. Determine time periods of high errors using this
graph. For example, a strong upward trend (to the right)
indicates a high priority to take action, or continuing errors
indicates the negligence of a problem.
7.6.3 Displaying current warnings

Click [List] in the header menu to display the current warnings in the order of occurrence.
The warnings monitor screen is updated automatically when a warning occurs. From this
display, it is possible to see at which production lines or modules the warnings are
occurring.
NXTAS0028E
The items displayed and their descriptions are as follows.
Number Description
1 Select the check box to select that item.
2 Displays a list of the currently active warnings. This section
displays the line name, equipment name, slot, current success
rate, and the latest error.
3 Click to display the warning information details view.
4 Click to select all check boxes for the lines.
5 Click to clear the check box for the selected item.

7.6.4 Displaying warning details

Click the details icon in the warnings list screen to show further information about the
warnings. Plan countermeasures for the errors and prioritize these countermeasures
based on the problems with the highest frequency which can be determined by the error
code counts.
7.6.5 Displaying the warnings log list

Click [Log] in the header to display the warning log which displays previous warnings.
NXTAS0029E
Number Description
1 Indicates the date of the warning.
2 Indicates the name of the line at which the warning occurred.
3 Indicates the name of the equipment and module number at which
the warning occurred.
4 Indicates the nature of the warning and the slot at which the
warning occurred.
5 Indicates the current page number being displayed from the log. To
view other pages, click the relevant page number.
6 Clears the warning log.

7.6.6 Setting the success rate

Click [Success Rate] in the header to display the sucess rate screen.
Set the success rate for each production line, or for all the lines.
NXTAS0030Ea
Number Description
1 Specify the items for which the success rate settings are to be
made. If "All lines" is selected and [Apply] is clicked, then the
success rate settings will be for all lines.
2 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate
warnings are issued. The default value is 99%.
3 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate
errors are issued. The default value is 0%.
4 Click this to return the warning and error settings back to the
default settings. Click [Apply] after clicking this to enable the
default settings.
5 This applies the specified success rates for the warnings and
errors. Click this to enable the currently set values.

7.7 Messages
This function allows users to distribute information between shifts and Accessory Software
users within the network.
The five most recent messages display in the lower section of the Menu.
NXTAS0031E
7.7.1 Displaying messages

Click the icon for a message in Menu to display that message. Click [To List] to display the
entire list of messages and to access the message editing function.
NXTAS0032E
7.7.2 Editing messages

To edit a message, click the icon for that message and the message is displayed. To edit
the message, click [Edit]. To delete the selected message, click [Delete]. To close the
screen without making any changes, click [Cancel].
NXTAS0033E

7.7.3 Adding messages

To add a message, click [Add] from the message list. Enter the desired message and
specify the necessary settings and then click [Apply] to save the message.
NXTAS0034E

7.8 Error Search

Click [Error Search] in the menu to open the error search screen.
Enter the error code to search for in the search text box and click [Search]. A list of the
items that match the entered text is displayed.
NXTAS0035E
Click the link of the item from the list to display the details for that item. If [Edit] is clicked
from the details page, it is possible to edit the selected message.

7.9 Production Schedules

Production schedules are created to display the desired throughput and other settings in
Progress Monitor for the various lines.
This only affects the progress monitor displays in Accessory Software and has no affect on
machine operation. The schedules should be created based upon the timetables decided
by the company.
7.9.1 Making a new schedule

1. Click [Schedule] from the header in either the Progress Monitor or Trend screens to
display the schedule editor.
2. Select the line name from the [Line Name] drop-down list.
3. Click the blue arrow to the right of the [Job] text box. A list of jobs in the Fuji Flexa global
job directory displays.
NXTAS0017E
4. Locate and select the desired job. Specify if the job is for the top or bottom side of the
panel.
5. Click the blue arrow to the right of the [Job] text box again and the selected job is
automatically entered into the text box.
6. Specify the target quantity.
7. Specify the target starting time and finish time based upon the production timetable.
8. Click the blue arrow to the right of the [Color] and select the desired color for the job.
9. Click [Apply] to add the new schedule.
7.9.2 Editing a schedule

3. Select the schedule to edit from the [Production Tasks] list.
4. Change the desired settings.
5. When all desired changes have been completed, click [Apply] to register the changes to
the selected schedule.

7.9.3 Deleting a schedule

3. Select the schedule to delete from the [Production Tasks] list.
4. Click [Delete] and the selected schedule is deleted.
5. When all desired schedules have been deleted, click [Apply] to register the changes.

7.10 Service List

This screen displays the current working status and version of the realtime workingrate
buffer services installed on the computers with the Fuji Flexa machine communication
service to which an NXT is connected. In addition, the computers with this service are
listed.
From this screen, it is also possible to started the installation of the realtime workingrate
buffer service on the current computer.
7.10.1 Displaying the services

1. Click [Service List] from the header in Floor Monitor.
2. The names of the computers with the realtime workingrate buffer service installed are
displayed along with the service version and working status.
NXTAS0039Ea

1 [Check] for RWB Click this to display a list of the RWB services and their
services status.
2 [Check] for Click this to display a list of the network connections
network and their status.
connection
3 [Check] for After specifying the network item to connect to, click
individual network this to check the network connection status to that item.
connections It is possible to use the host name or IP address of the
item to check in the textbox.

7.10.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service installer

1. Click [Service List] from the header in Floor Monitor.
2. Click [Download] at the bottom of the screen. The screen changes to the download
screen.
3. Click [Download] to start the download process.
4. Click [Save] in the dialog box that displays.
5. Specify the location to save the downloaded file and click [Save]. The file is downloaded
to the specified location.

7.11 Machine Accessories

The section is used to make configuration settings for the machine, acquire data, manage
special machine data, and perform remote operations.
It is necessary to log on to access the commands from this section because these
commands are special and can affect the operation of the machine.
7.11.1 Starting Machine Accessories

1. From Floor Monitor, click the machine or module number for the NXT for which Machine
Accessories is to be used. The Machine Accessories log on page is displayed.
2. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
NXTAS0019E
right side, the details for the selected item displays.
NXTAS0018E

7.11.2 Making machine configuration settings

These settings affect the entire NXT machine.
1. Click [Machine Configuration] from [Menu]. Accessory Software connects to the

machine and receives the machine information. When completed, the settings page
displays.
NXTAS0047E
2. Select the type of setting to change with the [Category] drop-down list. When a category
has been selected the settings shown under the list automatically change to the selected
category.
Category Description
Fujitrax settings Specifies whether or not Fujitrax is used for the NXT and
basic settings that are required.
Tray unit settings This is used to specify whether or not the non-stop tray
resupply function is used.
Loader settings * This is used to specify the max conveyor width and which
lanes are used.
Panel Clamp Settings] This is used to specify the clamp timing and whether
vacuum is used or not.
Recovery settings This is used to specify the number of times that recovery is
performed before stopping the machine.
Signal tower setting This is used to specify the lighting/buzzer conditions for the
different status of the machine.
Skip boards at the This needs to be changed if a board in the multi-board panel
machine setting is not good and no parts should be placed upon it.
Alternate Feeder Change These are used to specify under what conditions the
Condition Settings alternate feeder or tray should be used.
Vacuum plate settings This is used to specify vacuum backup pin settings.
F Mark Read Settings This is used to specify mark read settings for when errors
occur during mark reading.
Automatic changeover This is used to specify whether or not auto changeover is to
settings be used and the settings for the type of mode.
XY-axis grease splash This is used to specify whether or not the function to help
prevention function prevent grease on the X and Y ballscrews from spattering is
used.

Changeover guidance This is used to specify whether or not guidance for changing
settings the placing head is displayed for H12 or H12S or H12HS
heads when the job specifies a different H12-type than what
is currently on the module.
READY ON check This is used to specify if the ready on check function is used
function or not.
Splicing Method Setting This is used to specify if empty spliced cavities are to be
skipped or not for feeders that have a splicing sensor.
3. Specify the necessary settings using the options available. For details on the settings,
refer to the NXT Accessory Software Operation Manual (online).
4. Once the desired settings have been completed, click [Send to Machine] to send the
new setting to the machine. During transmission to the machine, the operation panel
changes to the transmission display. When sending the new setting is complete, a page
displays with that message. If any other changes need to be made, use the drop-down
list to select the category for the setting.
5. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].

7.11.3 Making module configuration settings

Any changes to the settings made for the modules are only valid for the selected modules.
1. Select the module(s) to change.
2. Click [Module Configuration] from [Menu]. Accessory Software connects to the

module(s) and receives the setting information. When completed, the settings page
displays.
NXTAS0021E
3. Select the type of setting to change with the [Category] drop-down list. When a category
has been selected the settings shown under the list automatically change to the selected
category.
Conveyor pulley This is used to specify the type of conveyor pulley (toothed
settings or v-groove) that is in the module.
Panel stop offset This is used to specify any offset amount that the panel is
to be stopped.
Breakdown operation This is used to specify if the conveyor is only to be used in
settings the event that something is broken on the module.
Waste tape cutter This is used to specify if the tape cutter is to cut tape or not.
settings
Tray pickup point This is used to specify the column and row for pickup from
settings(Stage1) the different tray positions in the tray unit-L.
Tray Unit-M pickup point This is used to specify the column and row for pickup from
settings(Stage1 the different tray positions in the tray unit-M for the
Position A) indicated position.
Tray Unit-M pickup point This is used to specify the column and row for pickup from
settings(Stage1 the different tray positions in the tray unit-M for the
Position B) indicated position.
Calibration Settings This is used to specify whether auto calibration and hybrid
calibration are to be used.
Pre-mounted parts This is used to specify the maximum height of parts that
height setting are already mounted on the panel when it comes into the
module.
Auto backup pin setting This is used to specify if auto backup pins are to be used
or not and other auto backup pin related settings.
Feeder pickup height This is used to specify if the levelness measured of the
setting feeder pallet is to be considered when picking parts.

Tray pickup pressure This specifies the amount that the Z-axis is lowered when
setting picking parts to compensate for tray unit differences.
Read condition settings This is used to specify the lighting pattern and shutter
for Profiler Panel ID speed to be used when reading panel IDs with the mark
camera.
Glue application control This is used to specify settings for GL heads.
settings
Statistical nozzle error This is used to specify if a nozzle is to be skipped when
settings there is a statistical error.
Dip settings This is used to specify settings for dip flux unit operation.
Pressure control setting This is used to specify if pressure control with the
with calibration unit calibration unit is used or not.
Panel position This is used to specify if panel position correction is used
correction or not.
Placement angle This is used to specify whether or not measuring offsets
measurement/ for the placing angle is performed.
correction
Interval stop setting This is used to specify the number of panels at which the
module stops and also specifies the message that is
displayed when this occurs.
Simple periodic nozzle This is used to specify the number of panels at which the
changeover module exchanges the nozzles on the head. These
nozzles are exchanged with spare nozzles set in the
nozzle station.
Tray unit settings This specifies the amount that the Z-axis is lowered when
picking parts to compensate for tray unit differences.
This is used to specify whether the tray remover is used to
automatically eject empty trays.
4. Specify the necessary settings using the options available. If more than one module is
selected and the settings are different for each module, the setting that has different
values will not display any value. For details on the settings, refer to the NXT Accessory
Software Operation Manual (online).
5. Once the desired settings have been completed, click [Send to Machine] to send the
new setting to the machine. During transmission to the machine, the operation panel
changes to the transmission display. When sending the new setting is complete, a page
displays with that message. If any other changes need to be made, use the drop-down
list to select the category for the setting.
6. Once all changed settings have been sent to the module, click [Close].

7.11.4 Acquiring trace data

If a problem is encountered during the use of the machine that cannot be resolved, an
important step in helping to resolve the issue is to acquire trace data.
Acquiring Trace data is a two step process. The first step is to get the trace data from the
module to the server. The second step is to get the data from the server to the local
computer.
1. Select the module or base from which to acquire trace data. If the base is selected, all
modules are automatically selected. If the modules were already selected, then clicking
the base clears any module selection. When module(s) are selected, [Data Acquisition]
becomes available.
2. Click [Data Acquisition] and the [Data Acquisition] page displays.
3. Click [Acquire Trace]. A list of any previous trace data for the selected item displays.
NXTAS0022E
4. Click [Start] to start generating trace data for the most recent events. The data is
acquired from the selected item.
5. Click [Download] to download the acquired trace data from the Accessory Software
server to the computer being used. A list of the trace data on the server displays.
6. Click the file name of the file to download. A [File Download] dialog box displays.
7. Select the [Save this file to disk] option and then click [OK].
8. In the [Save As] dialog box that displays, specify the location to save the file and if
desired, specify a new name.
9. Once a location has been specified, click [Save] and the file is copied to the specified
location with the specified name.
10.Click [Close] when completed to return to the [Data Acquisition] page.

7.11.5 Acquiring images

If a vision problem is encountered during production, the image file of the part can be a
great help in troubleshooting. When getting data from the machine, two modes are
available. In one mode, only the images that resulted in error are displayed. In the second
mode, all images in the module are displayed. Downloaded images can be viewed with the
Viewer software.
1. Select the module(s) from which to acquire images. When module(s) are selected,
[Data Acquisition] becomes available.
2. Click [Data Acquisition] and the [Data Acquisition] page displays.
3. Click [Error Image Acquisition] to display only the error images or [Image Acquisition] to
display all images. A list of the selected modules displays.
4. Select the module to acquire the images from and click [Start]. A list of the images
available from the selected module displays. Images that resulted in errors, display the
error code for that image in the [Status] field.
NXTAS0023E
Note: From this point, the selected module is locked and cannot be used for production or be
accessed by another browser. Be sure to unlock the module after receiving the images.
5. Click [Save] for the image to save and a [File Download] dialog box displays.
9. Click [Close] when completed to return to the [Image List] for the module.
10.When all desired images have been acquired, click [Unlock] to stop the image
acquisition process and unlock the module. The [Image Acquisition] page with the list
of the selected modules displays.

7.11.6 Acquiring PAM results

After PAM has been performed on a module and the module has completed checking the
positions, the results need to be acquired from the module.
Note: Refer to chapter "9. Measurement and Adjustment" in the NXT Mechanical Reference
manual for details related to measuring PAM.
1. Select the module from which to acquire the PAM results. When the module is selected,
[Remote operation] becomes available.
2. Click [Remote operation] and the [Remote operation] page displays.
3. Click [On machine PAM].
4. Click [Start Acquisition] to start receiving PAM results. The data is acquired from the
selected module.
5. Click [Download] to download the acquired PAM results from the Accessory Software
server to the computer being used. A list of the PAM results on the server displays.
6. Click the file name of the file to download. A [File Download] dialog box displays.
10.Click [Close] when completed to return to the [Remote operation] page.
7.11.7 Sending the final offset file to a module

Follow the procedures below to send the offset file created based on the PAM results file
or the file converter (AsciiToBinV382.exe) to a module.
1. At the module, change the module to diagnostic mode by pushing MANUAL and then
use the arrow keys to select the diagnostic pictogram and then push OK. The module
then enters diagnostic mode.
Note: The module must be in diagnostic mode or the final offset file cannot be sent successfully
to the module.
2. Select the module to which to send the file and then click [Calibration].
3. Click [Send offset file].
4. Click [Browse] and select the file to send to the module and then click [Open]. The
selected file and path displays in the text box.
5. Click [Send File] to send the selected file.
6. Click [Close] when the transmission has been completed.

7.11.8 Managing module matrix measurement data

When performing items in this section, the modules must first have the Matrix software
directly loaded and be rebooted.
Performing the actual matrix measurement, cannot be done normally and requires a special
jig.
Directly loading the matrix software

Performing the following steps is essential to be able to manage the matrix data. If these
steps are not performed, then none of the other items in this section can be performed.
1. Install the matrix measurement software on the computer running the NXT Accessory
Software Server.
Note: This should be in the \fujiweb\masweb\directload\ folder for the item in question.
2. Push MANUAL on the module to load the software. The manual mode screen displays.
3. Use the arrow keys to select the exchange pictogram and then push OK.
4. Push the up arrow key once to display the eject nozzle option.
5. Push START and the nozzles are ejected from the head.
6. Push CANCEL when the guidance screen displays the step for pulling forward the
module. It is not necessary to pull forward the module.
7. Use the arrow keys to select the diagnosis pictogram and then push OK.
8. Select the module on which matrix data is to be managed from Accessory Software in
the Machine Accessories section and click [Remote Operation].
9. Click [Direct Loading].
10.Select the option for [Matrix measurement software] and click [Start loading]. The
software is loaded onto the selected module and the module reboots automatically and
enters matrix measurement mode.
Updating matrix measurement data

Follow the procedures below to copy the backup of the matrix data for the module from the
computer to the module. The matrix measurement file serial number must match the serial
number of the module in order for this procedure to work.
1. Load the matrix software onto the module. For the procedures on performing this action
see "Directly Loading the Matrix Software" in this chapter.
2. Select the module to which to send the matrix measurement data, and then click
[Calibration].
3. Click [Update Matrix Data].
4. Click [Browse] and use the dialog box that displays to specify the saved matrix data on
the computer that matches the selected module.

5. Once the data is selected, click [Open]. The location and file name displays in the text
box.
NXTAS0024E
6. Click [Update] and the file is sent to the module.
7. After transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the main menu.
Saving matrix measurement data

It is important that a backup of matrix measurement data for each module exists. Follow
the procedures below to save the current matrix data from a module onto the computer.
2. Select the module from which to save matrix measurement data, and then click
[Calibration].
3. Click [Save Matrix Data].
NXTAS0025E
4. Click [Save] and a [File Download] dialog box displays.
6. In the [Save As] dialog box that displays, specify the location to save the file.
Note: The module serial number is the file name by default.

Registering matrix measurement data

Follow the procedures below to copy matrix data from the computer to the module.
When updating the matrix data, the matrix measurement file serial number must match the
serial number of the module. However, the serial number does not have to match when
registering matrix data. This procedure should not be used under normal circumstances
since there is no check to ensure that the file sent is the correct file for the module. Use the
[Update Matrix Data] command instead. This command should be used only under
extraordinary circumstances.
2. Select the module to which to send matrix measurement data, and then click
[Calibration].
3. Click [Register Matrix Data].
4. Click [Browse] and use the dialog box that displays to specify the saved matrix data on
the computer for the selected module.
5. Once the data is selected, click [Open]. The location and file name displays in the text
box.
6. Click [Register] and the file is sent to the module.

7.11.9 Directly loading matrix or feeder pallet measurement software

Performing the following steps is essential to be able to manage the matrix data on the
machine or to load the feeder pallet measurement software. If these steps are not
performed, then related actions cannot be performed.
1. Install the matrix measurement software on the computer running the NXT Accessory
Software Server.
Note: This should be in the \fujiweb\masweb\directload\ folder for the item in question.
8. Select the module on which software is to be loaded using Accessory Software in the
Machine Accessories section and click [Remote Operation].
9. Click [Direct Loading].
10.If matrix software is to be loaded, then select the option for [Matrix measurement
software]. If the feeder pallet software is to be loaded then select the option for [Feeder
pallet measurement software].
11.Click [Start loading]. The software is loaded onto the selected module and the module
reboots automatically.

7.11.10 Changing to on machine PAM mode

Performing the following steps is essential to be able run PAM on the machine. If these
steps are not performed, then related actions cannot be performed.
1. Push MANUAL on the module on which to run PAM. The manual mode screen displays.
6. Push MANUAL to return to the main screen.
7. Select the module on which to run PAM in the Machine Accessories section of
Accessory Software and click [Remote Operation].
8. Click [On machine PAM].
9. Click [Change to PAM mode]. The selected module changes to PAM mode and PAM
can be performed
7.11.11 Updating software on the NXT

It is possible to upgrade the software for the following units by using this command.
• Head
• Feeder Pallet
• Operation Panel
• Feeders
• Conveyors
• Tray unit
1. Install the software for the units on the computer that has the Accessory Software server
installed.
2. Select the modules to upgrade and then click [Remote operation].
3. Click [Update software].

Note: If the software for the units cannot be located during the upgrading process, a page displays
indicating that the required software for upgrading the units is not installed on the computer
with the Accessory Software server. Reinstall the unit upgrade software on the computer
with the Accessory Software server.
4. Then click [Start updating]. Accessory Software copies the software and automatically
reboots the machine when completed.
5. After the machine has automatically rebooted, a selection screen displays. It is only
possible to select the items that have versions different than the version in the base
firmware. Select the unit to upgrade and then push [OK] and then [START] to start the
upgrade process.

7.11.12 Upgrading machine control software

It is possible to upgrade NXT machine control software through Accessory Software. When
Accessory Software is used to upgrade NXT machines, all of the bases that are together to
comprise “one” NXT machine in Fuji Flexa are upgraded at the same time.
Before this function can be used, the NXT machine control software must first be installed
on the computer on which the Accessory Software server is installed. Once this is installed
on the server computer, then any NXT on the network can be upgraded from a computer
accessing Accessory Software through Internet Explorer.
1. Ensure that all of the bases for the NXT to be upgraded are turned on and that the
modules not producing or performing any special processing.
8. Select the diagnosis pictogram and then push OK.
9. Log on to Accessory Software. Select the NXT base to select all items in the NXT line
and then click [Remote operation]
10.Click [Install machine application].

Note: If the software for the upgrade cannot be located during the upgrading process, a page
displays indicating that the required software for upgrading is not installed on the computer
with the Accessory Software server. Reinstall the upgrade software on the computer with
the Accessory Software server.
11.Then click [Start updating]. Accessory Software copies the software and automatically
12.After the machine has automatically rebooted, if the versions on the modules need to be
upgraded, a message asking to push OK to upgrade the modules displays on the
operation panels.
13.Push OK to upgrade the software on the modules.

7.11.13 Unclamping a module

Use the following command to unclamp a module.
With this command it is possible to override the safety function that limits the number of
modules that can be pulled out at the same time. Ensure that it is safe to unclamp the
module before performing this command.
WARNING
safely at the same time. (Maximum: Four M3(S) modules on an 8M
base, or two M3(S) modules on a 4M base.)
If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over to the
front, possibly resulting in serious physical harm.
1. Select the module that is to be unclamped and click [Remote Operation].
2. Click [Unclamp module].
3. Click [Start] and the remote command is sent to the machine.
CAUTION
4. When it is safe to unclamp the selected module, push OK on the operation panel at the
module and the module is unclamped.

7.11.14 Clamping a module

Use the following command to clamp a module.
Normally a module is clamped automatically when it is returned back to its position on the
base. When the module is not clamped without any errors, it is possible to use this
command to force the clamping process. Ensure that it is safe to clamp the module before
performing this command.
WARNING
1. Select the module that is to be clamped and click [Remote Operation].
2. Click [Clamp module].
3. When no one is near the module and it is safe to clamp the selected module, click [Start]
and the module is clamped.
7.11.15 Specifying a production mode

There are four types of production modes available. The first idle mode is "Idle mode (No
vision processing, no feeder indexing)". With this idle mode, no vision processing of panel
marks or parts is performed and the feeders are not indexed. The second Idle mode is "Idle
mode (No panel conveyance, VT253)". With this idle mode, parts are picked and feeders
are indexed, however all parts are processed with vision type 253 and panels are not
loaded and unloaded between modules.
1. Select the module or modules that the idle mode is to be specified for and click [Remote
Operation].
2. Click the desired production mode from the list.
3. Click [Start] and the command is sent to the selected modules.
4. When transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

7.11.16 Conveyor calibration

The conveyor calibration function is used to restore the correct movement of the conveyor
if one of the following errors occurs.
Error code “****0701” “****0703” “****0704”

“****0708” “****071D” “****0752”
Before using conveyor calibration, ensure that the main screen is displayed at the machine
operation panel. Also, check the following points.
• Safety relays are on.
• A feeder pallet or tray unit-L is attached to the module for which conveyor
calibration will be performed.
• Safety doors are closed and EMERGENCY STOP is released at the module for
which conveyor calibration will be performed, as well as the adjacent modules.
• Adjacent modules are returned to the base and are turned on.
• When using paired production, ensure that the main screen is displayed at both
modules in the pair.
1. When using paired production, ensure that the main screen is displayed at both modules
in the pair.
2. Select [Conveyor calibration].
3. Click [Start].
4. The dialog box shown below is displayed. Click [OK] to start conveyor calibration.
01SYS-0178E
5. A message is displayed indicating the conveyor calibration was correctly completed.

When this message is displayed, reboot the machine.
01SYS-0179E

7.11.17 Completing nozzle maintenance

Use the following command to change the status of nozzles in the nozzle station after they
have been cleaned so they can be used in production when using the simple periodic
nozzle changeover function.
When this command is used, the current quantity of produced panels being tracked for the
simple periodic nozzle changeover function is changed to "0".
Refer to " 4.12.29 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function " for details.
01SYS-0209aE

7.11.18 Check backup pin position

This is used by the operator to check the positioning of backup pins. When this command
is used, the selected module changes to backup pin allocation check mode and it is
possible for the operator to check the positioning of the backup pins.
For details on this, refer to " 4.12.30 Backup pin allocation check function " in this manual.
01SYS-0224E

7.11.19 Forcibly clearing errors

When the machine stops due to problems such as nozzle changeover errors or picker
upper limit errors, it is usually necessary for the operator to pull forward the module and
clear the error at the operation panel.
However, if for some reason it is difficult to pull forward the module, the error cannot be
cleared at the operation panel. In these cases errors can be cleared using remote
operation.
Note: Forcibly clearing errors is an emergency procedure. Accordingly, it is recommended that
access permission for remote operation in the Security Tool Editor of Fuji Flexa be
restricted to line administrators.
1. Select the module with the error and click [Remote operation].
2. Select [Forced error removal] from the list.
01SYS-0344E
3. Click [Start] to clear errors from the selected module.
01SYS-0345E
4. After completing the forced error removal, click [Close] to return to the remote operation
menu.

QD006-25 8. NXT Software Tools
8. NXT Software Tools

8.1 Introduction
There are extra tools that are available on the NXT system CD-ROM to perform actions that
Accessory Software cannot perform.
Software Description
Image Viewer This software is used to display the images acquired from the
machine. In addition to being able to display the images, it can
also display the details from vision processing and any errors that
occurred.
This software is installed from the CD onto the client computer and
is found in the ViewerSoft folder in the base directory of the CD-
ROM.
NetworkSetting This software is used to change the current network settings for a
base.
In order to be able to change the network settings, the current IP
address of the base must be known.
This software does not need to be installed and is found in the NXT
folder on the CD-ROM.
VersionUp This software is used to change the current machine version on the
machine to the version on the CD-ROM.
In order to start the upgrade process, the current IP address of the
base to upgrade must be known.
This should be used only if the machine control software cannot be
upgraded through Accessory Software.
This software does not need to be installed and is found in the NXT
AsciiToBinV382 This software converts an ASCII formatted file into a binary
formatted file. In most cases, this software will never need to be
used.
This software does not need to be installed and is found in the
NXT\Tool folder on the CD-ROM.
EmergencyInstaller This software is used when items cannot be upgraded normally
due to some error. The computer is directly connected to the item
to upgrade and this software is ran.
In most cases, this software will never need to be used. This
software does not need to be installed and is found in the NXT\Tool
MotionToolMini This software is used to display the servo counter position, update
the servo parameters in the NXT machine, and to reset the origin
positions.
software needs to be installed and is found in the NXT\Tool folder
on the CD-ROM.
TcpIpSetting This software is used to change network settings for a base when
the base is booted in emergency mode.
Unlike the NetworkSetting tool, the current IP address does not
need to be known. The software looks for a base using the default
IP address from emergency mode.
software does not need to be installed and is found in the NXT\Tool
TTraceSaveServer This software is for testing purposes and only displays in
Japanese. It is designed to convert the trace data taken from the
base into a format that can be read.

8. NXT Software Tools QD006-25
Software Description
IOMonitor This software is used display and change the I/Os for the base and
modules.
This software does not need to be installed and is found in the
NXT\Tool\IOMonitor folder on the CD-ROM.
However, for NXT V5.11 or higher, IO monitor is not included on
the CD-ROM. Confirm machine I/O states using Equipment
Check.
EquipmentCheck Can acquire information about each unit from the specified
module, check I/O states and single action operations. This is a
tool to support recovery when troubleshooting and performing
maintenance.
MEdit This software is used to perform basic editing of job data.
This is capable of acquiring the job on the NXT machine and after
the data has been edited, to send it back to the machine as well as
save the changes to the global directory.
Data Checker This software is used to perform a basic check of jobs edited in
MEdit and Fuji Flexa.
This should be installed on all computers with Fuji Flexa that are
used to make jobs for NXT machines. It is possible to download
the data checker installer from the download section of Accessory
Software (NXT V3.80 and later).
IPS Viewer This software is used to display the images and results taken by
the IPS (Intelligent Parts Sensor) system on heads equipped with
the parts side view recognition function on computers. These
images are acquired from the module by Accessory Software. It is
possible to check things such as the nozzle condition and the parts
pick up condition in the images and check the parameters used for
determining the results. (From NXT V5.00)
Refer to the Heads with Part Side Recognition Instruction Manual
for the procedures on using this software.

8.2 Image Viewer

This is the software used to display and check the vision process results of images acquired
from NXT machines.
NXTST0001E
8.2.1 Installing Image Viewer

1. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not

automatically displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the CD-ROM.
3. Click [Select the required images and install] from the [Setup support tools for the
engineering panel] section.
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Viewer Soft]
and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when
installation is complete, the final step is displayed.
5. Click [Finish] and installation is complete.
8.2.2 Checking images with Image Viewer

1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] and then [Image Viewer] and then click
[ImageViewer]. A [ImageView] window opens.
2. Click [Open] from the [File] menu.
3. Locate the location to which the image file from the machine was downloaded.
4. Double-click the file to select that file and display it in the view.
Note: It is also possible to just double-click the downloaded image file to open that image in Image
Viewer after installing the software.
5. Click [Display Result] from the [Image] menu. The display changes to display the vision
processing results and information.
6. Check any error messages and the condition of the part to help determine the
appropriate countermeasure.
7. When completed checking the data, click [Exit] from the [file] menu to close Image
Viewer.

8.3 NetworkSetting
This software is used to change the current network settings for a base.
NXTST0002E
1. Insert the NXT software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and open the drive for the CD-
ROM through Explorer.
2. Double-click [NXT] to open that folder.
3. Double-click NetworkSetting.exe to start the software.
4. When requested, enter the IP address of the base for which to change the network
settings and then click [OK].
5. Specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the appropriate text
boxes and click [Next].
Note: Even if not changing any of these items, these values must be entered using the current
values.
6. Specify the host name for the NXT and then enter any domain information if a domain
is used.
7. Click [Next].
8. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these
are used.
9. Once all settings have been completed, click [OK] and the new settings are sent to the
NXT machine.
10.Reboot the NXT machine to enable the new network settings.

8.4 VersionUp
If the machine control software cannot be upgraded through Accessory Software then this
software is used to change the current machine version on the machine to the version on
the CD-ROM. The current IP address of the base to upgrade must be known.
NXTST0003E
3. Double-click VersionUp.exe to start the software.
4. In the [Operator] text box, enter any text.
5. Enter the IP address of the base for which to upgrade in the [Host name] text box and
then click [OK].
6. If the target machine is found, a dialog box displays with the current version in the
machine and the new version. If the upgrade process should continue, click [OK]. A
dialog box displays with the upgrade progress. Once all of the files have been copied a
message box displays.
7. Click [OK] to close the message.
8. Restart the upgraded NXT. If the versions on the modules need to be upgraded, a
message asking to push OK to upgrade the modules displays on the operation panels.
9. Push OK to upgrade the software on the modules.

8.5 AsciiToBinV382
This software converts an ASCII formatted file into a binary formatted file for use as a final
offset file for a head.
NXTST0004Eb
2. Double-click [NXT] and then [Tool].
3. Double-click AsciiToBinV382.exe to start the software.
4. Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate and then double-click the final
offset file for PAM to select it. The path and name of the file displays in the text box.
5. Select the module type from the [Module NickName] drop-down list.
6. In the [Module Serial Number] text box, enter the serial number of the module.
7. Select the head type from the [Head NickName] drop-down list.
8. In the [Head Serial Number] text box, enter the serial number of the head.
9. Once all data has been specified, click [Make Bin File] to convert the file. A new file is
generated in the same folder as the original file with the name based on the head type,
serial number, and stage.

8.6 EmergencyInstaller
This software is used when items cannot be upgraded normally due to some error. The
computer is directly connected to the item to upgrade and this software is ran.
NXTST0005Ea
Be sure to record any module configuration settings for the module before performing any
of the steps below because it is necessary to specify these settings again after upgrading.
1. Unclamp the module to upgrade or the modules above the base CPU if upgrading the
base.
2. Turn off the NXT.
3. Connect a cross ethernet cable between the item to upgrade and the computer.
4. Change the IP address for the computer to 169.254.0.200.
5. Change the toggle switch to up on the item to be upgraded. This means that the next
time the item is turned on, it will boot in emergency mode.
Toggle switch
01SYS-0284E
6. Turn on the power for the NXT.
7. If upgrading a module, wait until the STAND BY lamp on the operation panel quits
blinking to being on, and then push POWER. Ensure that the Fuji screen is displayed
on the operation panel. If the STAND BY lamp on the operation panel only continues to
blink or a “SELFCHECK FAIL MODULE” message is displayed on the operation panel,
contact your Fuji representative.
Note: The above step is not used for upgrading bases because bases do not have operation
panel.
10.Double-click EmergencyInstaller.exe to start the software.
NXTST0005Ea

11.Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate the bin file for the CPU being
upgraded. (The file to be used is different depending on the unit type. Refer to the table
below for details.) Select the file for the unit being upgraded and click [Open]. The path
and files displays in the text box.
Unit type Bin file to be used
2M, 4M, 8M NXT/FujiInst/Fuji/System/Program/System/Base.bin (*1)

Base
2M-2, 4M-2 NXT/FujiInst/Fuji/System2/Program/System/Base2.bin
M3(S), M6(S) NXT/FujiInst/Fuji/System/Program/System/Module.bin (*1)

Module
M3-2, M6-2 NXT/FujiInst/Fuji/System2/Program/System/Module2.bin
01SYS-0283E
Note: Select the file marked with *1 unless the machine type is different than this manual.
CAUTION
If the wrong bin file is selected and installed, it will no longer be
possible to boot up the CPU for that unit.
12.Click [Install] and the file is installed on the item in question. After installation is
completed, a message displays.
13.Click [OK] to close the message.
14.Turn off the NXT.
15.Change the switch back to down.
16.Disconnect the cross ethernet cable and reconnect the old cable.
17.Change the computer IP address back to the original value.

8.6.1 Making all settings after upgrading

The following procedures are required.
a. Transmit the job
b. Remeasure calibration data
c. Specify module configuration settings

Note: When the CPU box is exchanged and upgraded, it is necessary to also register matrix data
and the feeder pallet levelness data. Refer to "6. Machine calibration data" and "12. Feeder
pallet level measurement" in "Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" in the online Accessory
Software Operation Manual.
Before proceeding with these procedures, ensure that there are no nozzles on the placing
head and no panels in the modules. Once this has been confirmed, turn on the main switch
for the machine and follow the procedures below.
1. Check the serial number for the target module.
2. Transmit the job to the machine. If another module in the machine is currently
producing, then transmit the job to the background and then change the background job
to the foreground at the module.
3. Set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and then specify that the calibration data is to be
remeasured. Refer to "6.10 Remeasure Calibration Data" in the Accessory Software
Online manual for details.
4. Push START and auto-calibration is performed by the machine.

Note: Ensure that the main switch has been on and the module has been powered on for more
than 30 minutes prior to performing this step. This ensures that temperature for the parts
camera is warm.
5. If a manual final offset is required, then measure the PAM data on the machine and then
send the calculated final offset file to the machine. Refer to “9.1 On machine PAM
(Placement Accuracy Measurement)” in the NXT Mechanical Reference manual for
details.
6. Specify the module configuration settings in Accessory Software that were noted before
the procedures in this section were performed.

8.7 MotionToolMini
This software is used display the servo counter position, update the servo parameters in
the NXT machine, and to reset the origin positions.
8.7.1 Installing MotionToolMini

This software needs to be installed before it can be used.
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and open the drive for the CD-ROM through
Explorer.
2. Double-click [NXT] and then [Tool] to open the folder with the installer.
3. Double-click MotionToolMini.exe to start the installation process.
4. Click [Next].
5. Specify the location for the software to be installed if desired and then click [Next].
6. Click [Next] and the software is installed and the final step displays.
7. Click [Finish] to complete the installation process.
8.7.2 Starting MotionToolMini

1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] - [Motion Tool Mini] and then click
[MotionTool(Mini)]. When [MotionTool(Mini)] is selected, the [MTMINI] dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter the IP address for the base to connect to in the main textbox and then enter the
module number.
3. Click [Connect] and the main dialog box displays.
8.7.3 Displaying servo positions

The power to the head and servos as well as the control power must be on before the servo
positions can be displayed. Start production and cancel production once calibration has
been completed in order to turn on these items. If production cannot be entered then these
items must be turned on through I/O monitor.
1. Start MotionToolMini.exe and connect to the module for which to display the servo
positions.
2. Click [Wake] and a [Wake Setting] dialog box displays.
3. Click [OK] and an attempt to wake the servos is performed. Waking the servos takes up
a a minute in some cases. Once the servos are woken, the servo positions display in
pulses.
8.7.4 Receiving a dump file via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini.exe and connect to the module from which to receive the dump file.
2. Click [Dump] and a [Save As] dialog box displays.
3. Specify the location and name to save the dump file as and click [Save]. The file is
acquired from the servo system and saved under the specified filename.

8.7.5 Receiving a trace file via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini.exe and connect to the module from which to receive the trace file.
2. Click [Trace] and a [Save As] dialog box displays.
3. Specify the location and name to save the trace file as and click [Save]. The file is
acquired from the servo system and saved under the specified filename.
8.7.6 Displaying servo details via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini.exe and connect to the module for which to view the details.
2. Click [Network] and the [Servo Network] dialog box displays with detailed information
about the servo system.
8.7.7 Displaying errors via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini.exe and connect to the module for which to view the error.
2. Click [Error] and the [Error] dialog box displays information about the error.
8.7.8 Using the MTReset function

Do not use this function unless directed by a Fuji representive. This function clears the turn
count for the absolute encoder on the motor. This can cause problems if performed
incorrectly and the module may be unusable until corrected.

8.8 TcpIpSetting
This software is used to change network settings for a base when the base is booted in
emergency mode.
NXTST0007E
1. Unclamp the modules above the base CPU.
2. Turn off the NXT.
3. Change the silver toggle switch to up on the base CPU. This means that the next time
the item is turned on, it will boot in emergency mode.
4. Change the IP address for the computer to 169.254.0.200.
5. Turn on the power for the NXT.
8. Double-click TcpIpSetting.exe to start the software.
boxes.
10.Then specify the host name for the NXT and then enter any domain information if a
domain is used.
11.Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these
are used.
12.Once all settings have been completed, click [Apply] and the new settings are sent to
the NXT machine.
13.Click [Exit] to quit the software.

14.Turn off the NXT.
15.Change the silver switch back to down.
16.Change the computer IP address back to the original value.
17.Boot the NXT machine to enable the new network settings.

8.9 TTraceSaveServer
This software is mostly for testing purposes and only displays in Japanese. It is designed
to convert the trace data taken from the base into a format that can be read.

8.10 IOMonitor
This software is used display and change the I/Os for the base and modules. When the
software is started a dialog box like the one shown below displays.
NXTST0010Ea
However, for NXT V5.11 or higher, IO monitor is not included on the CD-ROM. Confirm
machine I/O states using Equipment Check.
8.10.1 Elements of the dialog box

[Module] group
These buttons are used to specify and indicate for which item the I/Os are displayed.
NXTST0011Ea
[Page] group
These buttons are used to switch the I/O display for the selected item in the [Module] group.
The head and feeder buttons are not valid when [BASE] is selected.
NXTST0012Ea

[Input Status]
This area displays the current status of the inputs for the items selected above. A green
indicator means that the input is ON, while a white indicator means that the input is OFF.
NXTST0014Eb
[Output status]
This area displays the current status of the outputs for the items selected above. A green
indicator means that the output is ON, while a white indicator means that the output is OFF.
If the [Ouput signal] option is checked, the selected module item is then locked and it is then
possible to change the output signal status. If the item cannot be locked, then an error
occurs and the output status cannot be changed. Click [ON/OFF] to switch the status of the
output (i.e., turn the output ON and OFF).
NXTST0013Eb

[Ring] / [ON/OFF]
[Ring] is used to enable a sound when an input is activated. The I/O to have the sound
enabled for is first selected and then [Ring] is clicked. A bell displays in the I/O status box
for that input and if the input is activated a sound is output at the computer. [ON/OFF] is
used to change the status of an output. This is only enabled if the [Output signal] option is
selected and the module item could be locked. Select the desired output to change and
then click [ON/OFF] to change the output status.
NXTST0015Ea
[Specify the target] dialog box

This dialog box is displayed when [Start] is clicked. In this dialog box, specify the settings
for connecting to the desired NXT. Specify the IP address of the base unit in the [IP
Address] text box. [Update interval] is the time in milliseconds that I/O Monitor checks the
I/Os and changes outputs. If the default setting of 500 is used, and an input is activated
and then deactivated within 0.5 seconds, then it is possible that the I/O for that item in I/O
Monitor will not indicate the change. Select the desired language option if necessary.
Clicking [OK] starts the I/O monitoring status for the specified machine. When monitoring
I/O status, the [Start] button changes to [Stop]. Click this to stop checking the status of the
I/Os.
NXTST0016E
8.10.2 Installing I/O Monitor

This software needs to be installed before it can be used.

4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [IO Monitor]
and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when
installation is complete, the final step is displayed.

8.10.3 Displaying I/O statuses

1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] - [Fuji Accessory Software] and then click [IO
Monitor]. The [I/O Monitor] window then displays.
2. Click [Start] and the [Specify the target] dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the IP address of the base for which to view the I/O.
4. Specify the update interval using the drop-down list and the display language option and
then click [OK]. If the target base is found, the I/Os then display.
5. Select the module or base to monitor from the [Module] group.
6. From the [Page] group, select the item from the selected module or base to monitor.
7. In the two panes, the I/O indicators for the selected module and page item change to
indicate the current status of the input and outputs. If [Ring] is clicked and the selected
input is activated, a sound is played to indicate the activated status.
8. If an output is to be changed, select the [Output signal] option. When selected the
module/base that is currently select is then locked. Select the output to change and then
click [ON/OFF] to change the status of that item. Clear the [Ouput signal] when
completed changing the outputs in order to unlock the item.
9. When finished checking/changing the I/O, click [Close] to quit I/O Monitor.

8.11 Equipment Check

This can acquire information about each unit from the specified module, check I/O states
and single action operations. This is a tool to support recovery when troubleshooting and
performing maintenance.
01SYS-0227E
8.11.1 Installing Equipment Check


4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Equipment
Check] and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and
when installation is complete, the final step is displayed.

8.11.2 Checking modules on a production line

Start Equipment Check on the computer being used to troubleshoot problems that have
occurred at a module on a production line to check the condition of the unit.
First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box. Also, in the
[Select module] pane of the [Equipment check] window, and follow the steps in " 8.11.4
Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors " below to check the relevant items.
01SYS-0228E
Note: Before checking tray unit-L units, ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be
used in production in the magazine.
8.11.3 Checking modules not on a production line

The operation of modules not on a production line such as in a maintenance room that is
not being managed by Fuji Flexa can be checked. Start Equipment Check on a computer
that is not on the line in order to check the condition of the unit.
First, specify the base IP address of the unit to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog
box. Also, select the module to work with in the [Select module] pane of the [Equipment
check] window, and follow the steps in " 8.11.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors
" below to check the relevant items.
01SYS-0229E
Note: Before checking tray unit-L units, ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be
used in production in the magazine.
Note: Select the module position based on the position from the left because the actual module
images cannot be displayed.

8.11.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors

<For conveyors>
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Conveyor sensor status] from the [Menu] pane.
2. In the [Selected lane] group box, select the check boxes for the lanes to check.
3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push
START and the unit checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to
stop the machine.
4. Click [Start] and the condition of the sensors is displayed.
<For tray unit-Ls>

1. Select [Adjustment mode start] from the [Menu] pane.
Note: If the module is already in adjustment mode, then this command is not necessary.
2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-L] or [Tray unit-LT] - [I/O status check] from the [Menu]
pane.
3. Click [Start] and the condition of the I/Os is displayed.
4. When you have completed checking the I/Os, click [Adjustment mode end] from the
[Menu] pane and the module returns to normal operation mode.
<For base, module>

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane
2. I/O monitor displays.
01SYS-0346E
a. [Input signal]
• A green indicator means the input is on and a white indicator means the input is
off.

b. [Output signal]
• A green indicator means the output is on and a white indicator means the output
is off. If the [Output signal] option is checked, the selected module item is locked
and it is possible to change the output signal status.
c. [Ring] settings
• [Ring] is used to enable a sound when an input is on. Select the item for which
you want to enable the sound and then click [Ring].
d. [ON/OFF]
• [ON/OFF] is used to change the status of an output. Select the output you wish
to change and click [ON/OFF] to change the output status.

8.11.5 Checking the operation of units

<Conveyors>
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then select
the operation item.
2. In the [Selected lane] group box, select the check boxes for the lanes to check.
3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push
START and the unit checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to
stop the machine.
4. Click [Start]. Refer to the section " 8.11.9 Conveyor command list " in this manual for
details about the actions.
<Tray unit-Ls>
2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-L] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then select
the operation item.
3. Click [Start]. Refer to the section " 8.11.7 Tray unit-L command list " in this manual for
details about the actions.
4. When you have completed checking the operation, click [Adjustment mode end] from
the [Menu] pane and the module returns to normal operation mode.
<For bases, modules>

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane and then select each item.
2. Select the [Output signal] check box.
3. Select the output item from the list.
4. Click [ON/OFF].
8.11.6 Setting tray unit-L, tray unit-LT calibration values

2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-L] - [Calibration data] from the [Menu] pane and then
select the item you wish to set.
3. Click [Start]. Refer to sections " 8.11.7 Tray unit-L command list " and " 8.11.8 Tray unit-
LT command list " for details about each item.
4. When you have completed setting values, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu]
pane and the module returns to normal operation mode.

8.11.7 Tray unit-L command list
Command Name Description

(Acquire information)
Unit information Used to check the [Serial No.] and [Firmware Version].
Servo counter Used to check the current servo counter value.

(Not updated in real time.)
I/O status check Used to check the current I/O status.


(Operation check)
Retract position Used to check the operation that stores the TY-axis in the magazine and
moves the TZ-axis to the retract position.
• No operation is performed if the machine does not contain a job using
the Tray unit-L
Parts reject conveyor Used to check the parts reject conveyor operation.
Specify the movement distance and check. (Range: 1 - 200 mm)
Specified slot pickup Used to check the operation that pulls out the tray drawer for the specified
position slot to the pickup position.
• Only slots used in the job can be used.
• If a tray drawer exists in slot 21, this operation can also be performed
for slot 21.
Tray drawer supply and Used to check the following tray drawer operations.
remove
1. Changing tray drawers for specified slots
2. Returning tray drawers for specified slots to the supply area
3. Measuring the supplied tray drawer height
4. Ejecting a tray drawer to slot 0
• If equipped with a tray verification ID reader with position check, use
a tray drawer affixed with a position check barcode. If it is not be
used, disconnect the ID reader connector.
Single action positioning Used to check the following TZ- and TY-axis operations.
1. Advancing the shuttle for the current slot position
2. Moving the magazine to the specified slot position
3. Advancing the shuttle at the specified slot position
4. Storing the shuttle
5. Moving the shuttle to the TY-axis retract position when performing tray
ejection
6. Continuous shuttle forward/back operation
7. Continuous magazine up/down operation
• Advancing the shuttle for the current slot position can only be used for
slots used in the job.


(Operation check)
Verify Used to perform verification and check the results.

• If a tray drawer exists in slot 21, this operation can also be performed
for slot 21.
• If equipped with a tray verification ID reader with position check, use
a tray drawer affixed with a position check barcode. If it is not be
used, disconnect the ID reader connector.
Remover Used to check the following remover operations.

1. Raising the lifter
2. Lowering the lifter
3. Turning on the vacuum
4. Turning off the vacuum

(Calibration data related)
Calibration data check Used to check the current calibration data.
TZ-axis origin setting Used to set the TZ-axis origin.
TY-axis origin setting Used to set the TY-axis origin.
Calibration data setting Used to set calibration data for the specified table number.
Tray height check sensor Used to measure the attachment height of the tray height check sensor
measurement for the specified sub-slot.
• Always start after setting the measurement jig in slot 1.
• Operation is not possible unless the machine is in adjustment
mode. Select [Tools] - [Start Adjustment Mode] to set adjustment
mode.
Serial number setting Used to specify the serial number.

Operations for replenishing and ejecting tray drawers

These are explanations on the commands used when checking the operation related to
replenishing and ejecting trays.
When checking the tray drawer replenishment operation
Operation Mode Name Description
Exchange tray drawer at [Preparation]

specified slot
Set the tray drawer being replenished on the lower supply area.
[Actions]
1. Advances the tray drawer for the specified slot to the pick-up
position.
2. Moves the tray drawer set in the lower supply area to slot 21.
3. Stores the tray drawer at the pick-up position in slot 0.
4. Measures the tray drawer in slot 21 (tray thickness, barcode
reading), and advances it to the pick-up position.
5. Ejects the tray drawer in slot 0 to the upper eject area.
6. Stores the tray drawer at the pick-up position in the specified slot.
• If there is no tray drawer in the specified slot when starting, steps
1, 3 and 5 above are not performed.
When checking ejection of the tray drawer to the lower supply area
Return tray drawer at [Actions]

specified slot to parts
supply drawer 1. Advances the tray drawer for the specified slot to the pick-up
position.
2. Stores the tray drawer at the pick-up position in slot 21.
3. Ejects the tray drawer in slot 21 to the lower supply area.
• If the tray drawer for the specified slot is not at the pick-up
position when starting, step 1 above is not performed.
• If the tray drawer for the specified slot is stored in slot 21 when
starting, steps 1 and 2 above are not performed.

When checking the lower supply area tray drawer collection operation
Measure height of supply [Preparation]

tray drawer
If a tray drawer exists in the specified slot, eject the tray drawer.
[Actions]
1. Moves the tray drawer in the tray supply area to slot 21.
2. Performs tray height measurement for the tray drawer in slot 21.
• The operation is complete when the tray drawer is stored in slot
21. If returning the tray drawer to the lower supply area, execute
the Return tray drawer at specified slot to parts supply drawer"
command.
When ejecting the slot 0 tray drawer to the upper removal area
Remove tray drawer at [Actions]

slot 0 to top area of tray
unit 1. Ejects the tray drawer in slot 0 to the upper removal area.
2. Moves the TZ-axis to a position at which the tray removal area
door can be opened and closed.
• This operation is performed even if there is no tray drawer in slot
0.

Single-action positioning operations

These are explanations on the commands used when checking the operation related to
positioning.
When checking the shuttle operation
Advance shuttle to [Actions]

current slot position
Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position for the current slot
position.
• The offset TY minus value is toward the operator.
• An error will occur if the shuttle is unable to move due to the
positional relationship with the TZ-axis.
Move TY-axis to retract [Actions]

position during tray
removal Moves the shuttle to the TY-axis retract position when performing tray
ejection for the current slot position.
Move shuttle [Actions]

continuously back and
forward Moves the shuttle continuously to and from the advance and retract
ends for the current slot position.
When checking the magazine operation
Move magazine to [Actions]

specified slot position
Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.
• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to the
positional relationship with the TY-axis.
Move magazine [Actions]

continuously up and
down Moves the magazine continuously to and from the upper and lower
ends.
• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to the
positional relationship with the TY-axis.

When simultaneously checking the shuttle and magazine operation
Advance shuttle to [Actions]

specified slot position
1. Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.
2. Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position.
When storing the advanced tray drawer in the magazine
Store shuttle [Actions]

Stores the advanced shuttle in the magazine.
• The slot that was pulled out is the slot the tray drawer is stored in.

8.11.8 Tray unit-LT command list

(Acquire information)
Unit information Used to check the [Serial no.] and [Firmware version].
Servo counter Used to check the current servo counter value.

I/O status check Used to check the current I/O status.
Command Name
Description
(Operation check)
Leveling adjustment When adjusting levelness, moves magazine B to the position for
position movement the spirit level.
Command Name
(Calibration data Description
related)
Calibration data check Used to check the current calibration data.

8.11.9 Conveyor command list

(Status check)
Conveyor sensor status Used to check the status of the following conveyor sensors.
1. Conveyor panel pass check sensor L
2. Conveyor panel pass check sensor R
3. Panel unclamp check sensor
4. Conveyor back-up pin detection sensor
• A check cannot be performed if automatic operation has not been
commenced even once after booting up the machine. Clear all panels
by using the machine manual commands.

(Operation check)
Clamp Used to check the clamp operation for the specified lane.
• The clamp operation cannot be performed with the module pulled out.
Unclamp Used to check the unclamp operation for the specified lane.
• The unclamp operation cannot be performed with the module pulled
out.
Rail Used to check the specified rail movement. Specify the rail to be checked
and the movement distance.
• A check can be performed with the module pulled out.
Panel conveyance Used to check the panel conveyance operation for the specified lane.
Specify the lane to be checked and the movement distance.
• A check can be performed with the module pulled out.

(Adjusting)
Panel pass sensor Used to adjust the sensitivity of the panel pass sensors.
sensitivity adjustment

8.11.10 Checking unit configuration

[Equipment check] can be used during production to check items such as information about
nozzles set on modules, the serial number of each unit, and firmware versions.
Checking the nozzle station and condition of nozzles in modules

1. Select the applicable module from the [Machine Selection] dialog box.
01SYS-0347E
2. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Nozzle information] from the [Menu] pane.
3. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane. [Nozzle unit information]
displays.
01SYS-0348E
a. The following information can be checked here.
• Nozzle station information: unit type, serial number
• Nozzle information: unit type (and serial number), usage condition for current
job.
b. Nozzles not being used in the current job are colored gray.
c. For nozzles without registered specification data, only the serial number is displayed.

Checking items such as feeder pallet, feeder, and tray unit versions
01SYS-0347E
2. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.
3. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Device information] from the [Menu] pane. [Device unit
information] displays.
01SYS-0349E
• Feeder pallet information: version
• Feeder information: feeder ID, serial number, version
• Tray unit-L information: serial number, version
• Tray unit-LT information: serial number, version
• Tray unit-M information: serial number, version

Checking items such as module, head, and camera versions

01SYS-0347E
3. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Other unit information] from the [Menu] pane. [Another unit
information] displays.
01SYS-0349E
• Module information: unit type, serial number, version
• Head information: position, unit type, serial number, version
• Conveyor information: unit type, serial number, bank, I/F board version
• Camera information: unit type, serial number, version
• Pressure calibration unit information: version, correction value, filter frequency

Refreshing unit information

Use the following procedure to refresh the unit information being displayed.
2. Click [Refresh]. [Device information], [Nozzle information], and [Other unit information]
for the selected module are all refreshed.
01SYS-0351E
Exporting unit information to a text file

Unit information can be exported to a text file. Use the following procedure to do this.
2. Click [Export] and specify the directory where to save the file. All the information for the
selected module is saved to a text file.
01SYS-0352E

8.12 MEdit
This software is used to perform basic editing of job data and testing of panel/board skip
marks. It is capable of acquiring the job on the NXT machine and sending the edited data
back to the machine as well as saving the changes to the global directory.
Note: If a job currently being used in production is edited in Fuji Flexa and sent to the machine
using MEdit, be aware that problems such as incorrect placements or missing parts may
occur during production.
8.12.1 Installing MEdit

This software needs to be installed before it can be used. In addition, Data Checker must
also be installed on the same computer.

4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [MEdit] and
[DataCheck], and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software
and when installation is complete, the final step is displayed.
8.12.2 Editing jobs from the global job directory

1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] - [Fuji NXT Accessory] and then click [MEdit].
MEdit is started and the MEdit window displays.
2. Click [Open Job] from the [File] menu. The open job dialog box displays.
3. Select the location for the job to be edited in the left pane and then select the job to be
edited in the right pane. The name of the selected job is automatically displayed in the
[Job Name] dialog box.
4. Select the side of the panel to be edited and specify the machine for which to edit the
data from the drop-down list.
5. Click [Open] and the specified data from the job is opened.
6. Edit the desired data.
7. Click [Run Data Checker] from the [File] menu to start a check of the data. The [Data
Check] dialog box displays.
8. Click [Start] and a check of the job data is performed.
9. If no errors were found, click [Close] and then select [Save Job] from the [File] menu.
The edited data is saved back to the global directory.

8.12.3 Editing jobs currently in an NXT

This allows the job that is currently in a NXT to be edited and then the changes are then
sent back to the machine as well as being saved in the global job directory.
2. Click [Open Current Job] from the [File] menu. The [Acquire current production job]
dialog box displays.
3. Select the line with the machine for the job to be edited in the left pane and then select
machine in the right pane. The name of the selected job is automatically displayed in
the [Job Name] dialog box.
6. Edit the desired data.
7. Click [Run Data Checker] from the [File] menu to start a check of the data. The [Data
Check] dialog box displays.
8. Click [Start] and a check of the job data is performed.
9. If no errors were found, click [Close] and then select [Retransmit Job] from the [File]
menu. The [Retransmit Job] dialog box displays.
10.Select the lane to which to retransmit the job and any other desired options. Click [OK]
and the job is transmitted back to the NXT. Only jobs for which no errors occurred during
the data check can be transmitted back. In addition, only jobs were opened from the
NXT can be transmitted.
8.12.4 Restoring an edited job to its original state

It is possible to reject all changes and restore a job to its original state. This function can
be used in situations such as when changes to the data causes the machine to perform
unexpected operations. This cannot be used to restore jobs on the NXT and the job must
be retransmitted.
1. Click [Restore] from the [File] menu with the job to be restored opened. A confirmation
dialog box is displayed.
2. Click [Yes] to reject all changes and restore the job to its original state.
3. Click [Save] from the [File] menu to save the restored job.

8.12.5 Testing skip mark data in the job

It is possible to test the skip mark data in a job for board skip marks and global skip marks.
It is important to test the data because the skip mark read level that is used to determine if
a skip mark is present or not must be manually set. Due to color and reflective differences
between panels for jobs, a level that is good for one job might not be good for another job.
Thus it is important to test the data to ensure that the marks are correctly detected and there
are no false detections.
2. Select [Open Current Job] from the [File] menu. The [Acquire current production job]
dialog box displays.
3. Select the line with the machine for the job to be edited in the left pane and then select
machine in the right pane. The name of the selected job is automatically displayed in
the [Job Name] dialog box.
6. Load the panel to be tested into the module to be used.
7. Push MANUAL on the operation panel of the module to be tested to change to manual
mode. The module must be in manual mode or the following steps cannot be performed.
8. Select [Board Skip Mark Read Test] from the [Tools] menu. The [Board Skip Mark Read
Test] dialog box opens and the skip mark data in the job is displayed
9. Specify the module to perform the the read test on from the drop-down list.
10.Change the [Test] setting to "Yes" for the data that is to be tested. If an image is also to
be displayed, change the [Image] setting to "Yes".
11.Click [Start Test] and the results of the test display in red.
12.If skip marks are misidentified, check the result number and then click [Quit] to close the
dialog box and then edit the data in MEdit based on the test results.
13.Retransmit the job back to the machine and then run the test read again. Repeat until
the skip marks are correctly identified.

QD006-25 9. System Management
9. System Management
9.1 Upgrading Machine Control Software
When upgrading the machine control software, there are two methods. Use Accessory
Software to upgrade NXTs whenever possible. When Accessory Software is used, all of
the bases that make up a NXT “machine” in Fuji Flexa are upgraded at the same time and
module configuration settings are retained. When using VersionUp to upgrade the machine
control software, the upgrade process has to be repeated for each individual base and the
module configuration settings are reset back to the default settings.
9.1.1 Using Accessory Software

Before this function can be used, the NXT machine control software must first be installed
on the computer on which Accessory Software is installed. Once this is installed on the
server computer, then any NXT on the network can be upgraded from a computer
accessing Accessory Software through Internet Explorer.
modules are not producing or performing any special processing.
8. Then use the arrow keys to select the diagnosis pictogram and then push OK.
10.Enter the address (URL) "http://***/fujiweb” and then press Enter. If the server computer
is located and the server is running, a loading page displays. Once the necessary items
have been loaded, the [Home] page displays.
Note: Enter the name of the computer with Accessory Software Server installed in the *** section.
11.From Floor Monitor, click the NXT machine for which to upgrade. The Machine
Accessories log on page is displayed.

9. System Management QD006-25
12.Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
NXTAS0019E
13.Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. If the log on is successful, the
machine accessories page is displayed with the selected machine already selected.
NXTAS0018E
14.Click [Remote operation]
15.Click [Machine Application Installation].

Note: If the software for the upgrade cannot be located during the upgrading process, a page
displays indicating that, the required software for upgrading is not installed on the computer
with the Accessory Software server. Reinstall the upgrade software on the computer with
the Accessory Software server.
16.When [Start updating] is clicked, Accessory Software makes a copy of the machine
control software. After Accessory Software is finished making the copy, turn off the
machine.
Note: Turn off the machine by using the main switch located at the front of the base. Do not push
POWER at the control panel.
17.After the machine has been rebooted, if the versions on the modules need to be
upgraded, a message confirming whether to upgrade is displayed at the operation
panel.

9.1.2 Using VersionUp from the NXT tools

This software is used to change the current machine version on the base and attached
modules to the version on the CD-ROM. The current IP address of the base to upgrade
must be known. This can be performed from any computer that can connect to the NXT
over the network and has a CD-ROM drive.
Be sure to record any module configuration settings for the module before performing any
of the steps below because it is necessary to specify these settings again after upgrading.
10.Double-click [NXT] to open that folder.
11.Double-click VersionUp.exe to start the software.
12.In the [Operator] text box, enter some text.
13.Enter the IP address of the base for which to upgrade in the [Host name] text box and
then click [OK].
14.If the target machine is found, a dialog box displays with the current version in the
machine and the new version. If the upgrade process should continue, click [OK]. A
dialog box displays with the upgrade progress. Once all of the files have been copied,
a message box displays.
15.Click [OK] to close the message.
16.Restart the upgraded NXT. If the versions on the modules need to be upgraded, a
message asking to push OK to upgrade the modules displays on the operation panels.

9.2 Upgrading Unit Software on the NXT

It is possible to upgrade the software for the following units by using this command.
• Head
• Feeder Pallet
• Operation Panel
• Feeders
• Conveyors
• Tray unit
1. Install the software for the units on the computer that has the Accessory Software server
installed.
10.Double-click the [Internet Explorer] icon on the desktop.
11.Enter the address (URL) "http://***/fujiweb" and then press Enter. If the server computer
12.From Floor Monitor, click the NXT machine for which to upgrade the unit software. The
Machine Accessories log on page is displayed.
13.Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
NXTAS0019E

14.Enter the password for the user and click [Log on].
15. If the log on is successful, the machine accessories page is displayed with the selected
machine already selected.
NXTAS0018E
16.Select the modules to upgrade and then click [Remote operation]
17.Click [Update software].

Note: If the software for the units cannot be located during the upgrading process, a page displays
indicating that the required software for upgrading the units is not installed on the computer
with the Accessory Software server. Reinstall the unit upgrade software on the computer
with the Accessory Software server.
18.Then click [Start updating]. Accessory Software copies the software and automatically
19.After the machine has automatically rebooted, a selection screen displays. It is only
possible to select the items that have versions different than the version in the base
firmware.
20.Select the unit to upgrade and then push [OK] and then [START] to start the upgrade
process.

9.3 Changing Network Settings

The IP address for a base can be changed remotely with ease. It is necessary to know the
current IP address in order to change the IP address to an IP address that is appropriate
for the network. The NXT software tool, NetworkSetting, is used to change the current
network settings for a base.
3. Double-click NetworkSetting.exe to start the software.
4. When requested, enter the IP address of the base for which to change the network
settings and then click [OK].
Note: If the current IP address of the base is unknown, use the information command found in
manual mode on one of the modules attached to the base to display the current IP address
for the base.
boxes and click [Next].
Note: Even if not changing any of these items, these values must be entered using the current
values.
6. Specify the host name for the NXT and then enter any domain information if a domain
is used.
7. Click [Next].
8. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these
are used.
9. Once all settings have been completed, click [OK] and the new settings are sent to the
NXT machine.
10.Reboot the NXT machine to enable the new network settings.

QD006-25 10. Troubleshooting
10. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains basic procedures for troubleshooting the NXT and a list of common
issues encountered. Use this chapter to identify and resolve minor problems to restore the
machine to its proper condition.
Contact your Fuji representative for serious problems or repairs that cannot be performed.
10.1 Troubleshooting Points

Follow the points below to help speed up the troubleshooting process.
• Read the error messages.

Write down any codes so if contacting your Fuji representative is required, the
error message codes can be included.
• Use the instructions that display on the operation panel to help resolve most
issues.
Be sure to follow the on screen steps in order. There are some points that OK
must be pushed. If OK is not pushed or pushed out of order then the procedures
on the operation panel may not advance, or show the wrong steps.
• Check the most basic items first.
• Start with the most plausible cause.
• Check step by step while eliminating possible causes.
10.2 Checking Error Codes

The error display on the machine only displays the codes for the errors that occur. More
detailed information (such as contents and measures) about the different error codes can
be accessed though Accessory Software or the Fuji Website. Procedures for using
Accessory Software to search for error codes are listed below.
2. Enter the address (URL) "http://***/fujiweb" and then press Enter. If the server computer
3. Click [Error Search] from [Menu] and the page changes to display the error code search
page.
4. Enter the error code that displays on the operation panel in the text box for [Error Code]
and click [Search]. The specified error code is searched for and if located, the page
changes to display the information.
5. To conduct another search, enter the new error code in the text box and click [Search].
To view any additional details about the error, click [Details] if it is available.
6. To return to the main page, click the box with the X in the upper right corner of the page
(not the X for Internet Explorer).

10. Troubleshooting QD006-25
10.3 Troubleshooting Common NXT Issues

10.3.1 Mark vision processing errors
Restart the reading process and change the operation panel to display the vision
processing images by pushing MONITOR. Check the following points when the mark with
the error is displayed.
Point Description/Countermeasure
Is the mark present? If the mark is not present that can indicate that the mark
position in the job is incorrect or possibly that the panel was
loaded incorrectly. Remove the panel and ensure that it
was loaded correctly.
Check the position of the mark and then check the position
of the mark in the job and correct if necessary.
Is the mark clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the mark and that the mark
is clearly visible. Remove any items covering the mark.
This is especially common for marks read during calibration
due to the retractable reference conveyor tops.
If the mark is not clearly visible, check the lighting of the
mark camera. If out of focus, check to ensure the panel is
clamped.
If the panel is clamped and the mark is still out of focus or
too dark, replace the mark camera and lighting and try
again.
Is the mark within the This outer box represents the scan area. If the mark is
outer green box? outside of the scan area, it cannot be found even if it is
perfectly clear.
The scan area should be at least 1.5 times larger than the
entire mark. If it is not, open the job and change the read
area.
Does the shape of the The green outline indicates the shape of the mark in the
mark match the green job. If the mark is a different shape than the one expected,
outline? the mark will not be found.
Change the shape for the mark data in the job.
Is the mark the same size The green outline represents not only the shape but also
as the green outline? the size expected. If the mark is larger or smaller than
specified in the job, it cannot be found.
Check the mark size on the panel and change the mark
data size to be appropriate in the job.
Is the mark very bright or If the mark is too bright or too dark, the system cannot
very dark? locate the mark. Change the fiducial mark read brightness
setting in the machine configuration.
Start the Accessory Software client, and then click the
name of the machine in floor monitor.
Log on and then select [Machine Configuration]. Select the
[FMark setting] from the catagory drop-down list. Change
the [Fiducial mark reading brightness setting]. If the mark
is too bright, select the [Less] option. If the mark is too dark,
select the [More] setting.
After making the setting, click [Send to machine] to enable
the changes.
These points and countermeasures cover most of the common mark read error causes.

10.3.2 Part vision processing errors

If vision processing errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot
the error.
1. If the machine is still running, push MONITOR to display the vision monitor. Ensure that
the part was picked and displays on the monitor. Push MONITOR again to close the
vision monitor.
2. Read the error message for the error code.
3. Stop the module.
4. Acquire the error image from the module though Accessory Software.
5. Open the image in Image Viewer and check the vision processing results. Check the
following points when the part with the error is displayed.
Is the part present? If the part is not present, that indicates a pick up error of
some kind. Check the condition of the feeder and ensure
that parts are being supplied. Ensure that the correct size
of nozzle is used.
Is the part clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the part and that the part is
clearly visible. Remove any items that are possibly
obscuring the view such as parts on the glass covers for the
frontlighting unit.
If the part is not clearly visible, check the lighting and ensure
that the correct type of frontlighting is used for the part.
If the part is out of focus or too dark with the correct lighting
being used, replace the part camera unit and try again.
Does the direction of the The green outline indicates the orientation of the part based
part match the green on the data in the job.
outline? If the part is rotated, then that indicates that the direction
setting in the part data does not match the packaging
direction. Check the direction that the part is being supplied
in the packaging compared to the setting in the part data.
If different, then correct the direction setting in the part data
for the job.
Does the shape/size of The green outline indicates the shape/size of the part. If the
the part match the green part is a different shape or size then that indicates that the
outline? wrong part is present or that the part data is incorrect.
Ensure that the part is correct. If the part is correct, then edit
the part data in the job for that part to match the actual part.
Does the part match the There are several possible causes for this problem.
green outline but the Generally, the problem is with the pickup tolerance, wrong
green outline was not vision type, or wrong p_pattern (usually coarse positioning
moved to cover the part? cannot be performed for errors).
Check the shape data in the job for the part and ensure that
these settings are correct.
Does the green outline First, ensure that the part is a good part (e.g., no bent/
cover the part but errors missing leads). Check the error message for details.
still occur? Check the positioning of the elements to ensure that they
are specified correctly.
Check the tolerances in the shape data.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common part vision error causes.

10.3.3 Pickup errors

If pickup errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.
2. Stop the module.
3. Check the following points.
Is the cover tape being Check the condition of the cover tape take up. If the cover
taken up? tape is not taken up properly then it might cover the part
thus preventing it from being picked. Ensure that the cover
tape is being peeled back as the feeder advances.
Ensure that the cover tape take up path is correct and there
is more then 10 cm of cover tape extending from the bottom
of the feeder. If any problems are found, then correct them
and try pickup again.
Does the feeder advance Check the advancing of the feeder. When it is advancing,
smoothly? does the red error LED ever come on? If it does that
Are there any problems indicates a problem with the advancing of the feeder.
with the condition of the Ensure that the green power light comes on and that the
feeder? feed pitch is correct. Clean the sprocket area and ensure
no parts are stuck under the tape leaf area.
If there is a problem with the feeder, put the parts on
another feeder and perform maintenance on the current
feeder to correct the problem.
Is the nozzle size being Check the size of the nozzle being used for the part.
used for the part good? Ensure that the nozzle is not too big or too small for the
part.
Ensure that the part has a flat smooth surface in the area
where the nozzle picks at least the size of the nozzle.
If the nozzle size needs to be changed, open the job in
MEdit and correct the nozzle data in the shape data (part
data) for the part in question. Try pickup again after
resending the data to the machine.
If the nozzle size is good but the part still has trouble being
picked by that nozzle, try changing the soft pick speed in
the shape data to pick up the part slower.
If this does not work, try the procedures for the next item.
Is the pickup position Use the job test command from Manual Mode to check the
good? pickup position for the part. Is the pickup position at the
center of the desired pickup point (usually the center of the
body)?
If it is not correct, open the job in MEdit and change the
pickup point offset in the shape data for the part in question.
Try pickup again after resending the data to the machine.
Is the pickup height Check the pickup offset Z height for the part in question and
good? then check the actual pickup height for the part in the
feeder.
Is the pickup offset Z good? If it is not correct, open the job
in MEdit and correct the pickup offset Z (tray, if for tray
parts) in the shape data (part data) for the part in question.
Try pickup again after resending the data to the machine.
If it is very close to the correct height, try changing this
offset to just be a little lower and then try again. (Do no
lower too much or part/nozzle damage may occur.)
If the pickup offset Z is good, check the levelness of the
feeder pallet and send any necessary adjustments to the
module.

What is the condition of Check the condition of the nozzle being used for the part.
the nozzle? Is the nozzle cracked or chipped?
Check to ensure that he nozzle is not cracked or chipped.
Is the spring back motion for H08/H12(S)/H04 head nozzles
smooth? If it is not, remove the nozzle and check the
nozzle and holder for problems and correct as necessary.
Is the nozzle clogged? Clean the inside of the nozzle to
remove any items that might be blocking the vacuum.
Try using a different nozzle that is the same size if no
problems are found.
What is the condition of Ensure that the vacuum is sufficient in the base and the
the vacuum? module.
Check the nozzle vacuum filter in the head for clogging for
the nozzle in question. If it is dirty, clean it and if it cannot
be cleaned, replace it.
Ensure that there is no leak between the head and the XY-
robot head connection point.
If using a multiple holder head and all parts that are picked
by holders after the first few parts have pickup problems,
then that might indicate a vacuum leak problem between
the holders and the vacuum pump.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common pickup error causes.

10.3.4 Poor placing accuracy

If poor placing accuracy occurs, check the points below.
Is the placing accuracy Use the simulation test command from MEdit (available
problem just for one from V3.11) to check the placement position for that
point on the panel (other sequence.
parts with the same part If the placement position is not good, adjust the position in
number have good MEdit and transmit the changes back to the machine. If not
placements)? using V3.10, check the actual position for the part on the
panel and then check that position in MEdit manually.
Is the placing accuracy This could be due to a part data problem with this part
problem for all parts with number. Check the following items. Ensure that the nozzle
the same part number? size is appropriate for the specified transport speed.
Ensure that the part height setting is correct. Incorrect
settings can mean that parts are being dropped or pushed
in the panel, which will cause placing problems.
Ensure that there are no placement offsets specified in the
shape data. If a offset is specified, the part is placed using
that offset.
Check the vision type and element data settings to ensure
that misalignments are not due to data errors here or
incorrect processing.
Check the panel thickness and pallet thickness settings to
ensure that they are correct.
If there is a problem with these settings, then usually
multiple parts will have problems. If no problems with the
above data are located, try slowing down the transport
speed and the soft place speed.
Is the placing accuracy Is the nozzle size correct for these parts? If the nozzle size
problem for all parts is correct, replace the nozzle and check the old nozzle for
using the same nozzle? the following points.
Ensure that the nozzle is not cracked/chipped.
Ensure that the nozzle is not clogged.
Ensure that the spring back motion for multiple holder
nozzles is smooth.
Ensure that no items have adhered to the tip of the nozzle
(such as cover tape adhesive). If the problem still persists
after nozzle replacement, check the mechanical vacuum
break action for the nozzle in question for multiple nozzle
heads. Check the solenoid for a single nozzle head.
Is the placing accuracy If board fiducials are not being used for each board, then
problem for all parts for a this might indicate a panel circuit production problem or that
board with all parts the board position in the job is incorrect.
shifted the same way but Ensure that the board positioning in the job is correct.
the placing accuracy for Change the job to use board fiducials to compensate for
the other boards on the board misalignment if possible. If not, alter the board
panel good? positioning in the direction of the shift to improve accuracy.
Is the placing accuracy This can indicate a problem with a module.

problem for all parts for Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that
all boards on the panel when the panel is clamped that it is flat (and there is no
from a module? natural bowing of the panel).
Perform auto calibration on the module in question (jig
nozzles are required for this).
If the accuracy is still not good, then perform PAM on the
module in question.

Is the placing accuracy Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that
problem for all/most when the panel is clamped that it is flat (and there is no
parts for all boards on natural bowing of the panel).
the panel for all If the parts are all shifted in the same direction and board
modules? fiducials are not being used, this can indicate a panel
fiducial to board placement misalignment. Check the
positioning in the job compared to the actual placements
and fiducials. Check the panel thickness and pallet
thickness settings to ensure that they are correct.
If there is a problem with these settings, then usually
multiple parts will have problems.
Check the levelness of the machine.
Perform auto calibration on the modules (jig nozzles are
required for this). If the accuracy is still not good, then
perform PAM on the module in question.
How is the printing Check the condition of the solder after the panel comes
condition? from the printing machine before it enters the NXT.
Is the printing good with sufficient solder?
Solder printing conditions or dryness can cause part
deviations during panel conveyance, or can affect the self-
alignment during reflow.
Solder adhesion weakens when the solder dries.
Therefore, the sooner the placement occurs after printing,
the better.
Is the part placement Check the reflow temperature profile. Improper reflow
good at the machine but conditions can cause self-alignment problems and
poor after reflow? tombstoning. Provide a profile in which the temperature is
increased evenly over the entire panel. If the solder melting
speed differs from point to point, parts are pulled toward the
solder that melts first.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common poor placing accuracy
causes.

10.3.5 Panel conveyance errors

If panel conveyance errors occur, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the
error.
2. Stop the module.
Is the error that there is Check the condition of the panel clamp sensor.
no panel clamped, but If the clamped panel is within the machine panel thickness
there is a panel specification, the panel clamp sensor might need to be
clamped? adjusted.
Refer to Adjusting Panel Clamp Sensors in Chapter 9 of the
NXT Mechanical Reference Manual for procedures on
adjusting this sensor.
Is the error that a panel Check the condition of the panel left and right sensors on
is entering or exiting the the conveyor.
module but it never If there is no panel currently blocking one of these sensors
moves even though the but the sensor amplifier mistakenly says there is a panel,
panel actually does that can be the cause of the problem.
move? Refer to Sensitivity Adjustment for the Conveyor Panel
Pass Sensor in Chapter 9 of the NXT Mechanical
Reference Manual for procedures on adjusting these
sensors.
Is the panel stopping in If the panel is not stopping in the correct position, ensure
the correct position? that the conveyor belts are clean and have no items such
as grease on them.
Ensure that the panel is not slipping on the belts due to it
being too heavy or having some thing like grease on it.
If the belts and panel are clean, check the module
configuration setting for the conveyor pulley. Ensure that
the correct type of conveyor pulley is specified for the
module. This problem can occur if the wrong type is
specified. Correct as needed.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the panel conveyance error causes.

10.3.6 If there are missing parts

If there are missing parts on the panel, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the
error.
1. Ensure that the parts are being used during production and that there are no pick errors.
2. Ensure that a skip setting for that part has not been specified in Fuji Flexa or in MEdit.
3. Check the condition of the part after the panel is completed in the module.
Is pickup attempted but Use the pickup troubleshooting procedures to correct the
the part is not being pickup error and do not manually unload panels and put
placed due to pickup them for production in the next module.
errors and the panel is
manually being
unloaded?
Is the part picked but Clean the nozzle and ensure that no foreign items have
remains on the nozzle adhered to the nozzle to cause the part to remain on the
after placement? nozzle after placement.
Ensure that the spring back motion of the nozzle is smooth.
If the nozzle remains stuck in the up position, then
placement might not occur correctly.
Check for any placement height offsets in the part data and
correct as needed.
Check the panel thickness and pallet thickness settings to
ensure that they are correct. If there is a problem with
these settings, then usually multiple parts will have
problems.
Has the part been If the device skip function has been set in MEdit, production
skipped in MEdit using continuing without placing the part is normal. If this part
the device skip function must be placed, then do not use this function. If this
(no pickup and function is not used, then production cannot be continued
placement is until that part is supplied and placed (for example if parts
attempted)? run out during production). Exercise caution when using
this function.
Has the part been This setting must be manually set and should only be done
skipped in Fuji Flexa? when necessary.
If the part has been skipped in Fuji Flexa, then production is
being performed as specified.
If the part needs to be placed, then remove the skip setting
in the job, optimize (if necessary), wait until all current
panels in the machine have been unloaded and then send
the modified job to the machine and restart production.
Is the part being placed Check for interference between the part and machines after
by the module but not on the placing module.
the panels before the Ensure that the part is not too high for the heads following
reflow oven? the placing module (for example, if a placing head following
the placing module is an H08, then the max. height for parts
placed before the H08 module is 6.5 mm).
These points and countermeasures cover some of the missing parts causes.

10.3.7 An error occurs that the XS-axis is in an unknown position.

There are three sensors on the back of the XY-robot on M3(S) modules. These are the XS
interlock sensors. When performing action such as removing/returning a module, this error
will occur if two (2) of these sensors are not on. Push EMERGENCY STOP on that and
neighboring modules and gently move the XS-axis slide so that two of these sensors are
activated.
Note: Do not use the handle on the head or the removable head to move the axis.
10.3.8 An error occurs that a panel is between modules but there is

no panel.
The right and left conveyor sensors also check to ensure that there are no panels between
the modules when they are unclamped. If there is no panel but this error still occurs, adjust
the conveyor sensor that is falsely activated. For procedures on adjusting these sensors,
refer to the NXT Mechanical Reference.
10.3.9 An encoder backup error occurs

If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on the module (not on a head).
The individual batteries in the encoder lines for each axis maintain the encoder memory for
that axis. If the encoder cable is disconnected from the motor or the battery is disconnected
when there is no power being supplied to the encoder from the machine, the encoder
memory is lost. If the encoder memory is lost for some reason, an encoder backup error
occurs. Perform the following steps if this occurs for an axis on the module (not an axis on
the head). Only perform the following steps if a Fuji representative has trained you on how
to perform them. If you have not been trained on how to perform the following steps,
contact your Fuji representative.
1. Check the battery for that axis. If it is already connected and the encoder cable for this
axis was not disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good or
not, replace the battery with a new one.
2. Move the axis gently by hand to the correct position for that axis to reset the origin
positioning.
3. Perform a MT Reset.
4. Restart the machine and the error should be cleared and the machine can be used for
production. If it has not been cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure
that the battery connection is good.
If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on a head.

The battery in the head maintains the encoder memory for the axes on the head. If the
encoder cable is disconnected from a motor or the battery is disconnected when there is no
power being supplied to the encoder from the machine, the encoder memory is lost. If the
encoder memory is lost for some reason, an encoder backup error occurs. Perform the
following steps if this occurs for an axis on a head. Only perform the following steps if a Fuji
representative has trained you on how to perform them. If you have not been trained on
how to perform the following steps, contact your Fuji representative.
1. Check the battery for the head. If it is already connected and the encoder cables for the
axes were not disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good
or not, replace the battery with a new one.

2. Move all of the axes on the head gently by hand to their correct positions for each axis
to reset the origin positioning.
3. Perform a MT Reset for all of the axes on the head.
4. Set nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and perform autocalibration. Refer to section "
5.12.3 Setting nozzle jigs " for details on setting nozzle jigs in the module. Once
autocalibration has been completed, the machine can be used for production. If the
error has not been cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure that the
battery connection is good.
10.3.10 If the machine cannot download a job.

When the machine cannot download a job from the Fuji Flexa Job Server, it is possible that
the name (including revision) of the job and/or the job location has been changed or that
the job has been deleted.
Has the job been If the job has been renamed, moved, or deleted, the
renamed, moved, or machine will not be able to locate the job and an error
deleted? occurs. Use the remote command from Accessory
Software to delete the job from the machine.
Refer to the Accessory Software online manual for details
on deleting jobs from the machine.

10.3.11 If there is computer system trouble

The following are instructions for correcting trouble items that may occur within the
computer system (Fujitrax, Fuji Flexa, NXT Accessory Software) for the NXT.
When the error "????2108" and/or "8D32????" occurs on the

machine.
Error conditions:
• This error may occur after the power for the machines or computers have been
turned off for a long period of time (for example, after a holiday) and the power
is turned back on.
Were the computers and This occurs when communication cannot be performed
machines turned on in because the order in which items are turned on is incorrect.
the correct order? Turn on the power to the items in the following order.
The time for starting each item is different due to the
differences in computers and machines. Due to this, boot
one item and then log on and wait until that item is fully
booted before proceeding to the next item.
1. Boot the computer for the Fujitrax Verifier database and

then any computers for the Profiler databases (if Profiler is
being used).
2. Boot the computers with the Fuji Flexa User Server, Job
Server, and Line Server (in this order if on separate
computers).
3. Boot the computers for the Fuji Central Server for the
NXT machine.
(Ensure that the Fuji Central Server service has started.)
4. Boot any computers with the Fuji Flexa Machine

Communicate Service for NXT machines (if they are
separate from the Fuji Flexa User Server).
5. Turn on the NXT machines. Production can be started

once the job has been downloaded.
Was the power for If several NXT lines exist, and the power for all of the lines
multiple NXT lines turned is turned on simultaneously, then job downloading for all of
on at once? the machines is also conducted simultaneously. When this
happens, the Fuji Flexa server is requested to send several
jobs to several machines at once, and according to the
capability of the computer, a time up error may occur during
the job download process.
Turn on one line at a time and wait until the machine in that
line has finished downloading the job before turning on the
next line.

Is the network operating This error occurs when a network hub or network cables
correctly? are not functioning correctly and/or are disconnected.
Restart the power for the network hub or replace it and/or
the network cables.
When the error occurs only for the modules on a specific
base, replace the network cable that is connected to that
base.
When the error occurs for modules on several different
bases, replace the network hub that is being used for those
bases.
When the error "8D32????" occurs on the machine and/or the Fuji
Central Server (Fuji Profiler Central Server) stops because of an error.
Error conditions:
• Operation cannot be started even if the order in which the computers are started
is correct or the central server is rebooted.
Is the correct data saved It is possible that incorrect data is included in the data that
in the central server? is saved in the Fuji Central Server.
Perform the follow procedure to clear the central server
data.
1. Stop the Fuji Central Server service (also stop the Fuji
Profiler Central Server service if it is started).
2. Change the name of the "Resume" folder in the Fujitrax

install location.
<drive>:/Program Files/FUJI/Trx/Verifier/KitObj/Bin
3. Start the Fuji Central Server service (also the Fuji

Profiler Central Server if it is being used)
4. Transmit the job to the machine. If no error occurs,

begin production.
If the error is not corrected, turn the NXT off and then on.
Is the network operating This error occurs when a network hub or network cables
correctly? are not functioning correctly and/or are disconnected.
Restart the power for the network hub or replace it and/or
the network cables.
When the error occurs only for the modules on a specific
base, replace the network cable that is connected to that
base.
When the error occurs for modules on several different
bases, replace the network hub that is being used for those
bases.

When the error "8D32702A" occurs for the first module of a machine
that is in production.
Error condition:
• An error occurs at the first module in a line that is using Fujitrax Profiler (the
panel ID is read using an external panel ID reader and a FLP).
Is the panel unload This can be caused by the panel unload sensor (out side)
sensor on the conveyor for the conveyor before the machine (the conveyor installed
with the panel ID reading with the panel ID reading unit) remaining either ON or OFF.
unit remaining on or off?
Adjust the panel unload sensor (out side) on the conveyor
unit so that it is functioning properly.

Fujitrax Verifier has been started, but even if the feeders are set
correctly, a module does not verify that feeders are set correctly, or the
error "8D32702A" occurs when panel conveyance is started.
Error condition:
• This error occurs when using reverse panel flow or when the direction of panel
conveyance has been changed.
Is the setting correct in This error occurs when the settings in the Kit line
the Kit line configuration are incorrect.
configuration? In the Kit line configuration, it is necessary to specify
settings for the bases and modules in order from left to right
(when looking at the front of the machine). This left to right
order must be followed regardless of the panel flow
direction.
When using Kit Line Configuration, specify settings for all
bases and modules in order from left to right (when looking
at the machine from the front).
Example
Panel flow direction
Base 2 Base 1
NXTOPE240E
*Bases are specified using IP addresses. However, to

make the example here easier to understand, the bases are
specified using the names "Base 1" and "Base 2".

If the machine cannot download a job (the error "????2108" occurs).
Has the job been If the job has been renamed, moved, or deleted, the
renamed, moved, or machine will not be able to locate the job and an error
deleted? occurs.
Undo any changes that have been done to the previous job
(such as a new name) or delete the current job using
Accessory Software and then transmit the new job to the
machine using Fuji Flexa.
Refer to the Accessory Software online manual for details

on deleting jobs from the machine.
Are the Fuji Flexa server When the Fuji Flexa (user server, job server, machine
computers (user server, communication server) computer is turned off, is in sleep
job server, machine mode, or is not connected with the network, the NXT cannot
communication server) receive jobs and this error will occur when attempting to
turned on and connected download jobs.
to the network?
Turn on the NXT after ensuring that the Fuji Flexa server
(user server, job server, machine communication server)
computers are turned on and connected to the network.
Also, change the setting of the computers with Fuji Flexa
servers so that they will not enter sleep mode.
Change the settings for notebook computers so that the
computer will not enter sleep mode even when the cover is
closed.

Production information for a line cannot be compiled or displayed in

Line Reporter or Line Monitor Client.
Error conditions:
• Production information for a line report cannot be compiled only for a specific
line.
• In Line Monitor Client, the background of the machine name or the line name is
black.
• If the machine operation history or other functions are opened in Line Monitor
Client, no data is displayed in the graphs.
Was a line change Production information is not totaled correctly when line
performed successfully settings from Fuji Flexa or line change notices are not
or are the line settings performed correctly.
correct? The same error may occur when there are different
machines with the same IP address in the line settings.
Is there another machine
with the same IP address Follow the procedure below to report the changes.
in the line settings?
1. Push CYCLE STOP to stop production for the NXT line
for which production data is not correctly totaled.
2. In Fuji Flexa, change the status of the line to a virtual line

and send a line change notice.
3. Next, change the status of the line to a real line and send
a line change notice.
Was a current line copied One example of trouble that occurs is when a new line is
and then pasted in Fuji added to the factory and line configuration data in Fuji Flexa
Flexa Line Editor? is created. If the configuration of a line that closely
resembles the line that is being created is copied and then
pasted, then there is a temporary situation where two lines
with the same configuration (IP address) exist. This may
cause errors in the collection of production data.
Use the steps listed below when creating a new line by
copying an existing line.
1. Create the new line as a virtual line.
2. Copy the machine configurations that resemble the new

line being created and paste them into the virtual line that
was created in step 1.
3. After changing the machine configuration (machine IP

address, machine communication service IP address) for
the new line, change the line to a real line and send a line
change notice from Fuji Flexa.

There is a discrepancy in the production information for the number of

parts used and for the number of parts rejected.
Error condition:
• There is a significant discrepancy in the totaled production information for a

specific line only.
Is production being Production information is not totaled correctly when

performed using different production is performed using different job names in the
job names? same NXT line.
A particular characteristic of this error is that no information
is displayed regarding parts or feeders, but information
regarding machine errors is displayed.
This error occurs when a job is transmitted to the
background and job changeover is performed at an
individual module.
Make sure that the entire line is using the same job for
production.
A line does not display in Floor Monitor in Accessory Software or the

module configuration is not correct.
Error condition:
• After upgrading the machine or setting up the line, the line is not displayed in
Floor Monitor.
Is the data being used by The settings in Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service
the Realtime (hereafter referred to as RWB) are not correct, or RWB is
Workingrate Buffer not operating properly.
service correct?
Follow the procedure below to correct this data.
1. Ensure that the computer names or IP addresses are

correctly set in the machine communicate server in Fuji
Flexa for the line (bases) that does not display in Floor
Monitor.
The computer with the Machine Communicate Server is the
computer running the FNC Machine Communication
Service.
2. Send a line change notice from Fuji Flexa.
3. Open the [Service] window (from the Windows control

panel) on the computer with the machine communicate
server for the NXT machine and restart the Realtime
Workingrate Buffer service.
4. Access the Accessory Software website and in the upper

right section of the Floor Monitor page, click [Service List]
and the click [Check] in the [Checking and restarting RWB
services] section. Then click [Restart] for the RWB service
for the line with the problem. After RWB has restarted
(approximately 10 seconds), check to see if the line is
displayed in Floor Monitor.

10.4 Troubleshooting Common Fuji Flexa and

Fujitrax Related Issues
10.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors
After transmitting jobs, the machine requires many items to be
changed such as heads.
This can indicate a configuration problem in the job. Open the job and ensure that the
module configuration matches that of the actual machine (for example, module types, head
types, nozzle station types). If an error is found, correct the error and optimize the job for
the NXT again.
When I attempt to transmit a job, the NXT machine has a red X over the
icon in the [Transmit Job] dialog box, but I know the job has the correct
NXT machine.
The most likely cause for this problem is that the job being transmitted is in the local job
directory. Copy the job into the global job directory and attempt to transmit the same job
from the global directory. There should be no red X in the [Transmit Job] dialog box. Only
jobs in the global directory can be transmitted to NXT machines.
10.4.2 Fujitrax related errors

The NXT machine is registered and setup correctly in the line
configuration file for Fujitrax and the system has been restarted, but
the NXT still does not use Fujitrax.
The Fujitrax configuration setting for the NXT must be turned on and then the machine
rebooted before the NXT will access the Fujitrax system. Unlike previous machines, this
setting is not made on the machine. To change this setting, Accessory Software must be
used. Refer to the procedures "Making Machine Configuration Settings" in the NXT
Accessory Software chapter for how to change the Fujitrax setting.
I made IDs for the parts and feeders, but when I set the parts on the
machine, it will never accept the parts even though they and the
feeders are correct.
The most likely cause for this issue is that the Quickverify required mode is set to "ON" at
the computer with the Verifier Central Server for the NXT. When this setting is on, even if
the parts are correct and IDs are created, the parts will not be accepted when set on the
machine until a quickverify is performed on those parts. Perform a quickverify for the parts
and if the machine then accepts the feeders, then that was the issue. Turn this setting off
if this mode is not desired.

After logging on to the Kit Handy, I cannot select the NXT machine in
the device check mode. Nor do I see any parts out warnings or
machine errors for the NXT.
The most likely cause for not being able to access the NXT device check screen is that the
User ID used to log on is not registered for the NXT in the Kit Handy Settings. Start Kit
Manager and have an administrator level user log on. In the line display on the left side of
the window, right-click the NXT machine and select [Kit Handy Settings] from the shortcut
menu that displays. The dialog box for the [Kit Handy Setting] displays with a list of users
that are responsible for that NXT machine. Add the user ID previously used to this list. This
setting affects which machines display in the Parts out list and Machine Errors list at Kit
Handy as well as the machines that a device check can be performed on. In addition, this
setting also determines which machines display under the [Operator] branch in Kit Manager
for the user logged on.

10.5 Major Machine Issues

Many units on the NXT can be replaced easily without any special measurements or skill
required, refer to the NXT Maintenance Manual for procedures on replacing units. If a unit
quits working or there is an intermediate problem, replace the unit and check the condition
of the new unit. If the new unit is works fine, send the old unit to be serviced with a detailed
description of the problem.
It is important to note that while units are easy to replace, items in units should not be
changed or adjusted except by qualified Fuji representatives. This point ensures that all
units are the same and this is one of the reasons for easy replacement and the lack of
special measurements. Some examples of "units" are the parts camera/lighting unit, head,
module CPU, and the mark camera/lighting unit.
Note: If an item is not in the NXT Maintenance Manual and the procedures for replacing that are
unknown, then do not attempt to replace the item. Contact your Fuji representative for
guidance about the item.
If a major problem is encountered (such as, numerous OS errors) and it cannot be resolved,
acquire the trace data from all of the related items and send this data to your Fuji
representative along with a detailed explanation of the conditions in which the problem
occurs, any steps taken to resolve the problem, and any error codes displayed. If all of this
data is sent to your Fuji representative, the troubleshooting process is greatly aided and
steps already taken mostly likely do not need to be repeated, thus saving time.

10.6 Acquiring Trace Data

Use the following procedures to acquire trace data from the machine when errors and
software issues occur.
There are four methods for generating trace data.
a. Acquiring from Accessory Software.
b. After an OS error occurs, trace data is automatically generated.
c. Forcing trace data to be generated when turning on the machine.
d. Acquiring temporarily saved generated trace data on the machine.
10.6.1 Acquiring trace data using Accessory Software

Trace data can be acquired using Accessory Software in the following situations:
- An error message is displayed on the operation panel and production is stopped by
pushing CYCLE STOP or EMERGENCY STOP
- An incorrect operation is discovered and production is stopped by pushing CYCLE STOP
or EMERGENCY STOP
Trace data can be acquired if communication between the machine and Accessory
Software is possible.
1. Do not perform any operations on the machine until trace data acquisition is completed.
2. Acquire the trace data using Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] -
[Acquire Trace] from the machine accessories section when the machine is selected.
Refer to " 7.11.4 Acquiring trace data " for details.
10.6.2 Automatic trace data generation after an OS error

Use the procedure written below to acquire trace data that is automatically generated in the
following situations:
- An OS error occurs
- An application error occurs (the penguin pictogram is displayed).
The procedures below must be followed. If the main power switch for the machine is not
turned on and then off, trace data cannot be acquired using Accessory Software due to a
communication error.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. When the module has started and entered sleep mode, acquire the trace data using
Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire Trace] from the machine
accessories section when the module is selected.

10.6.3 Forced generation of trace data when turning on the machine

Forced trace data acquisition can be used when trace data cannot be acquired in
Accessory Software because the machine hangs up and no operations or communication
with Accessory Software is possible.
Follow the procedure below to acquire trace data.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. When the module turns on, and after the panel STANDBY lamp is lit and writing is just
starting to be displayed in the module operation panel, immediately push and hold the
OK and CANCEL buttons.
4. When [OS Error...] is displayed, release the OK and CANCEL buttons.
5. When the module has started and entered sleep mode, acquire the trace data using
Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire Trace] from the machine
accessories section when the module is selected.

By using commands on the module, it is possible to generate trace data. This allows trace
data to be saved temporarily in the machine if an error occurs during production.
Refer to " 4.12.20 Temporarily saving trace data on the machine " for details.

MEMO:

FUJI Internet
Fuji Internet aims at providing up-to-date information to our customers in

the most efficient manner. This site makes a range of services available,
from manual updates and virtual training, to online technical reports. Fuji
hopes that this site will be used as a source of information in addition to
the services provided by your agent.
Fuji Internet is located at http://www.fuji.co.jp/
Fuji Internet membership is required to access the Technical Information
section of the site. Please contact your agent for membership details.
Any comments or opinions regarding this document can be sent to
intnetqst@fuji.co.jp
NXT System Reference
Management No. Date Notes
QD006-00 June 15,2004 SYS-NXT-1.0E

QD006-01 July 30, 2004
QD006-02 September 10, 2004 NXT V2.71
QD006-03 December 6, 2004
QD006-04 December 14, 2004 NXT V2.81
QD006-05 January 18, 2005 NXT V2.92
QD006-06 April 13, 2005 NXT V3.01
QD006-07 June 17, 2005 NXT V3.11
QD006-08 August 24, 2005 NXT V3.21
QD006-09 October 5, 2005 NXT V3.42
QD006-10 February 10, 2006 NXT V3.51
QD006-11 April 26, 2006 NXT V3.70
QD006-12 July 19, 2006 NXT V3.80
QD006-13 August 21, 2006 NXT V3.90
QD006-14 October 25, 2006 NXT V4.02
QD006-15 January 16, 2007 NXT V4.10
QD006-16 March 2, 2007 NXT V4.20
QD006-17 June 4, 2007 NXT V4.30
QD006-18 August 31, 2007 NXT V4.43
QD006-19 December 25, 2007 NXT V4.52
- -
QD006-21 June 30, 2008 NXT V5.01
QD006-22 October 15, 2008 NXT V5.03
QD006-23 December 3, 2008
QD006-24 June 22, 2009 NXT V5.11
QD006-25 February 15, 2010 NXT V5.15
FUJI Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

19 Chausuyama, Yamamachi, Chiryu,
Aichi Prefecture, 472-8686 Japan
Copyright 2010 by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan
This manual is printed on recycled paper.
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. serves its customers from the following
locations:
Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

19 Chausuyama Yamamachi, Chiryu, Aichi, 472-8686 Japan
Tel: 81-566-81-2111 Fax: 81-566-83-1140
Fuji America Corporation
171 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL. 60061 USA
Tel: 847-913-0162 Fax: 847-913-0186
Fuji Machine Mfg (Europe) GmbH
Peter-Sander-Str. 43, D-55252 Mainz-Kastel Germany
Tel: 06134-202120 Fax: 06134-202200
Fuji do Brasil Maquinas Industriais Ltda.
Rua Joao Cachoeira, 128 Itaim Bibi, Sao Paulo, SP 04535-000 Brazil
Tel: 55-11-3167 1650 Fax: 55-11-3079 1833
FujiPhilippines Services, Inc.
Lot 1, Block 6, Panorama Bldg. 2, Calamba Premiere International Park
Special Economic Zone (CPIP - SEPZ) Calamba, Laguna, 4027 Philippines
Tel: 63-49-502-3683 Fax: 63-49-502-3560
Fuji Machine Mfg (Singapore) Pte Ltd.
Blk 2/51, Ubi Avenue 1, #01-24, Paya Ubi Industrial Park,
Singapore 408933
Tel: 67464966 Fax: 68412326
Fuji Malaysia Office
C/O Mecomb Malaysia Sdn Bhd 2487, Jalan Sultan Azlan Shah,
11700 Penang, Malaysia
Tel: 04-656-4002 Fax: 04-656-2941
Fuji Taiwan Office
C/O Ascentex Industry Corp. 3 Fl, No. 396, Sec. 1, Nei Hu Rd., Taipei,
Taiwan R.O.C.
Tel: 02-8797-8716 Fax: 02-8797-8717
Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. China Representative Office
Room A, 26F, Zhaofeng World Trade Building, No. 369, Jiangsu Road,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-5240-0730 Fax: 021-5240-0728

NXT System Refercence

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NXT System Refercence

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Update Notice

The following manual has been revised and released:

Manual title: NXT System Reference

Chapter, Section Summary of changes

1 Safety Guideline Added content related for the tray unit-LTC.

Minor changes and corrections have also been

FUJI Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Warranty and Liability

NXT System Reference i

3.2.2 Turning OFF the NXT........................................... 31

ii NXT System Reference

4.7.6 Setting the pickup position.................................... 77

NXT System Reference iii

4.12.5 Blocking feeders............................................... 131

iv NXT System Reference

5.2.1 Changeover guidance screen............................. 214

NXT System Reference v

vi NXT System Reference

6. Manual Mode Commands................................ 299

NXT System Reference vii

7.4 Vision processing error analysis .................. 326

viii NXT System Reference

7.11.4 Acquiring trace data.......................................... 354

NXT System Reference ix

8.7.7 Displaying errors via MotionToolMini ................. 379

x NXT System Reference

10.1 Troubleshooting Points .............................. 413

NXT System Reference xi

xii NXT System Reference

1.1 About Symbols

1.1.1 Degree of Hazards

Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe

Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to

1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols

A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to to

NXT System Reference 1

1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types

• Body parts or clothing may be caught in the machine causing

• Body parts may get caught in the machine resulting in injury.

Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors

• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or

Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP

• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP

Check the safety functions before starting operation

• Before starting the machine check the operation of the

Do not remove safety switches or disarm the safety

• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches. Persons

2 NXT System Reference

• Verify that nobody is within or near the machine before

Do not approach a machine that has stopped moving

• There are times during automatic operation when the machine

Do not place hands near the main conveyor

• Hands or other body parts may be caught in the machine.

Always perform maintenance work after turning OFF the

• Failure to observe this may result in sudden machine

Do not insert or remove connectors while power is being

• Removing or inserting connectors while power is supplied to the

Stay clear from the machine when it is being lifted

NXT System Reference 3

• Rubber gloves will tear when caught by the machine and

Long hair should be tied back

• Long hair may get caught in running machines.

Turn off the air supply when carrying out maintenance on